Home

SINUS PENTA USER MANUAL

Contents

1. List of Parameters C300 List of Parameters 1 R013 List of Parameters RO16 RO17 List of Parameter 1012 PE RR Status List SINUS PENTA SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN 0 4 How to Use this Manual 0 4 1 OVERVIEW This User Manual Programming Instructions provides any information required to setup and monitor the inverters of the Sinus Penta series manufactured by Elettronica Santerno SpA Setup monitoring may be obtained using one or both of the following options 1 Display keypad unit 2 Serial link through standard port 65485 or isolated optional serial board E5822 RS485 RS32 For the instructions on how to use and remote the display keypad unit please refer to Sinus Penta Installation Manual Any information sent to from the inverter through the display keypad unit may be obtained also via serial link using the RemoteDrive software application offered by Elettronica Santerno RemoteDrive allows the following functions image acquisition keypad simulation oscilloscope functions and multifunction tester table compiler including operation data log parameter setup and data
2. 114 18 1 1 Fact ry setting or ING analog OUI DUIS seni 114 18 1 2 Analog outputs overview eene hee hee hee ene een een ee tea ese ee tee tees ee eee ese ese 114 18 1 3 Overview of the Frequency ree ree see teer serene nnns 116 I S MEE 117 18 2 1 Operating Mode of Analog and Frequency Outputs ccccccseccsceeceeceeecceecceeeeeeaeceaeceaeeaeeeaeeeneees 118 18 2 2 Analog output programming examples eene eene nennen neni ee eere 119 18 3 List or Parameters tromi P 17640 P215 2 ert tite puo ga d quara tei ea abe p odora abate in oii esum 123 19 TIMERS MENU T 132 19 1 GU RNC gt 132 19 2 List or Parameters from P216 16 P228 ________ _ 133 20 FID PARAMETERS TEE EN EU 136 20 1 GU ul 136 20 2 Parameters from P230 to 256 e bx 137 21 DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU gt _ ___ _6_6 __ 6__ 144 21 1
3. m 290 41 ALARMS AND WARNINGS ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccccccceccceccccccesccencs 291 sla What Happens When a Protection __ __ _______ _ _ 291 41 2 WET EO When an Alarm Trips 292 Be a E 293 ___ __4_______ ________ __ 307 41 5 VY GMA 308 65 309 42 USER PARAMETERS LIST DIFFERENT FROM THE 310 43 INDES uer _______ _________________ 316 5 317 PROGRAMMING 9 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANTERNO 0 2 Figures FIG re ts E dU 13 Figure 2 5 5 5 14 Figure 3 Display ud p ad __ _6______ 20 Figure 4 5 ramps Application gt E __ qe 73 Figure 5 Speed Profile without Rounding Off and with Rounding Off 2 Example 74 Figure 6 Speed Profile with Acceleration Reset Yes to No Example eene enn 74 ligure 7 Speed tie e DIM EE RE 84 Figure 8 Torque Reference Processing uei 85 Figure 9 Processing Speed A
4. 123 Table 26 Lisi of Parameters P216 P228 rete rk qu e edd apa ra Siren deae prx Fe Exe PERS do eda S renes Dev es 133 Table 27 Codification of P226 Timers assigned to Digital Inputs Example 135 Table 28 Lisror Parameters P236 P250 uc tice eiernite rien uve td EVE VN CREE ea C S MU MERE 137 Table 29 Digia ________ __ _ __ ___ 145 Table 30 List of the Selectable Digital Signals and Analog e 146 148 Table 32 Parameterization for Example 1 esssssesssesssessseseseneeneeeene ene en e eene nee ese rentes tee rese sese een ee seen nean 154 Table 33 Parameterization for Example 2 154 Table 34 Parameterization Tor Example 3 ke a vea Yn ota Prax e rk ea eria des edo 155 Table 35 Parameterization Tor Example 4 sanisaveenenmlareasclancanbanoets 156 Table 36 Parameterization for Example 5 sesssesssesssssssesssesse eene een eene nennen eset tee t se essen ee seen enn 157 Table 37 List of Parameters P270 P305 mb rre rk
5. 200 200 20 2 ListofParameters trom TO _ _________ 200 27 CONTROL METHOD 203 DF Ms ICRC O OE 203 27 1 1 Command _______ _ 204 27 1 2 Sp ed Torque REFERENCE SOUT GCS 206 27 1 3 Alternative Command and Reference eene eene eene nee nnns 208 272054 Foroa NGI 209 27 1 5 ______ _____ _ _______ 209 27 2 List of Parameters from C140 res pes beraten bdo eb veda ep bw Fea eaa big i wie 210 28 DIGITAL INPUTS i dore RERO ERE S320 213 DOM 213 28 1 1 START cul rir t 214 28 1 2 ENABLE 215 28 1 3 ere 216 28 2 Factory se ting of the Digital Inputs uere xen nie o eta so nav EY n ux Oe a a au Ex EE RN FEE E Pede sa E M tirs 216 25 9 BsrobPerdmelers C498 t0 07 Locus e
6. c 101O A nua 101O N 15414 PELO EELO nua g u yw L609 0605 z u 8 00 2700 nuam p u puana b 0d nua Figure 8 Torque Reference Processing 85 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 12 2 Scaling Analog Inputs REF AINT AIN2 Terminals 1 2 5 6 7 8 AN NOTE Refer to the Installation Instructions for hardware details concerning analog inputs Three analog inputs are available REF AIN1 AIN2 They can be voltage inputs or current inputs switching is made possible through hardware Dip Switch SW1 and software parameters and are bipolar analog inputs 10V 10V or 20mA 20mA REF input is single ended inputs AIN1 and AIN2 are differential inputs Factory setting is as follows the main speed reference is given by analog input REF mode OV 10V only motor 1 is active Its max speed and min speed parameters are 088 1500 rpm and C029 0 rpm respectively For the analog inputs parameters PO50 P064 allow to set the type of signal to be acquired offset compensation if any scaling to obtain a speed reference or a torque reference the signal filtering time constant Parameter P053 sets the offset of the input analog signal if 53 0 offset is zero while parameter P054 defines the filtering time constant factory setting PO54 5ms
7. 72 Table TO List t Parameters POOF TOO ecciesie quin dope pep 75 Table 11 Parameters Used Tor References uiro ita pte EE ES tp pA REP TEENS 83 Table 12 Analog Input Hardware Mode 86 Table 13 List ot Parameters PODO eerie Im ada dtid eer d mp br AS o mt m ada dei ad map 90 Table P Liskot Parameters POSO 101 Table 15 List of Parameters P105 P108 sssssssssssssssssesssessene nennen ene ehe ee nee nee nsns ese ese rese ee tee trennen 105 Table Paromeers 1 19 11 M m 107 Table 17 Listol Porameters nner 109 Table 18 List or Parameters P1595 _____________ ___ ____ 111 Table 19 Variables to be selected for the Analog and Frequency eene nennen 117 Table 20 Programming 1 0 10V 119 Table 21 Programming AOT ABS S E 119 Table 22 Programming AO1 ABS 120 Table 23 Programming AO ABS 121 Table 24 Programming AQT 122 Table23 Lst 5 1 pcan 0
8. tae ge _______ __ _____________ 9 04 2 Men s and SUBMIEnUS _ ____ REEN 10 11 1 USING THE DISPLAY KEYPAD UNIT s o Vau pe od ES eue EA VE ya da Pa FER 12 1 97 0 TT O n 12 1 2 2 5 NR ________ __ __ 13 1 3 D TO Em 14 1 4 _ ___________ 15 1 5 Programming the Startup Page ect _ _ ________ 15 1 6 he MENU i E ___ 16 1 7 ESC Key contemporary use of the and Keys 17 1 8 RESET Key reset alarms and control ee e n eee nennen nen entes enne 18 1 9 TX RX Key Download Upload from to the nennen 18 1 10 LOC REM Key 19 SAVE ___ ________ _______ 19 1 12 Signal LEDs inthe di5pldy KeyDGIO 8 __ 20 2 DESCRIPTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS ccccscsccsccccccccescccccccccccsccccsccccsceccecs 21 3 _ _ ______ __ _ _ _ _ ____ _ _ ____ 22 3 1 8
9. UB WN eB 500 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 500 i 10 Figure 21 Curve voltage speed carried out by AO1 Example 4 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 19 20 21 121 317 PROGRAMMING 9 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTROMNICASANTERNO Example 5 Table 24 Programming AO 10V P176 Andog oupi AO Selected variable analog output AO1 Min value of the selected variable AO Max value of the selected variable 1 P181 ms Filter on analog output AO rpm Figure 22 Curve voltage speed carried out by AO1 Example 5 122 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 18 3 List of Parameters from P176 to P215 Table 25 List of Parameters P176 P215 P176 analog output ADVANCED 1 10V 177 AO analog output Variable selection ADVANCED 0 P178 AO Min value of selected variable ADVANCED 778 15 00 of 10000 rpm 1500 rpm 179 AO Max value of selected variable ADVANCED 779 15 00 10000 1500 185 2 analog output Variable selection ADVANCED reference P186 2 value of selected variable ADVANCED 786 1500 rpm 10 11 12 13 ___ 0 ___ Coon UB WN P202 FOUT Min value of selected value ADVANCED P203 FOUT Max value of selected value ADVANCED 803 P204 FOUT Output Min value with reference to P202 ADVANCED 10 00 kHz
10. 22 3 2 55 22 3 3 FO MR SN SS Lecture andrea diem a ete uen de UEM UM Em put UIN INN 22 3 4 PID Feedback _ _____________ IURE 22 4 PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS eene e ento there th tee reae sese stesse sse eeeso seen 23 4 1 AIEO 23 4 2 Voltage Frequency 23 4 3 SUID C OmIDBERSBIH 23 4 4 TETTE 23 4 5 Controlled stop in case of power failure Power m enne nens 23 4 6 23 4 7 Motor Thermal Protech OI miu sed usce EOD TUE 24 4 8 TT TR 24 4 9 PE DENT 24 Bridge Crone 24 4 11 Setting of two command sources and an alternative reference 24 S MEME RENTEN 25 5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES isassak xrkS ua RE E QUSE a Ya uova EUER EYES 26 9 1 26 5 2 Reference ______ __ 26 5 3 Configuring an External Torqu
11. Omm _ mwmOwme 1000 emorm wow 4l 000 ____ _ raono _ _ _ muse _ Mem _ _ 311 317 42 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P2 1x P22x Timers _ ee 216 1 delay On 0 05 P217 T1 delay 0 05 P218 T2 delay 0 0s P219 T2 delay Off 0 0s P220 T3 delay On 0 0s P221 T3 delay Off 0 0s P222 T4 delay 0 05 Fs P223 14 delay 0 0 5 P224 T5 delay 0 0 5 P225 T5 delay 0 0s P226a Timer MDI O P226bTimrMD2 o y O P226CTimr MDI3 0 X 0 P227a Timer MDI5 P227b Timer MDI6 P227c Timer MD7 0 CE P228a Timer 0 P228b Timer 0 MDOI MDO2 MDO4 P23x P25x PID Parameters pL p P236 PID Out Max 100 00 P237 PID Out Min 100 00 P238 Integ Max 100 00 P239 Der Max 100 00 P240 PID Kp 1 000 P241 PID KpMult 0 1 P242 PID Ti Tc 500 Tc P243 PID Td Tc 0 mTc P244 PID Tc 5 ms P245 PID Ref Min 0 00 96 P246 PID Ref Max 100 00 P247 PID Fdbk Min 0 00 96 P248 PID Fdbk 100 00 P249PIDTup 005 P250 PIDTdn 0005 P251
12. 174 24 1 3 175 24 1 4 FOC 175 24 2 List of Parameters from to 0 4 rennes 176 25 MOTOR CONTROL RESO STU 179 179 2511 Electrical Specifications of the Reus Deus esp loce ua vb dean vans stant 180 29 142 PAOIOT R coss e re sme EEUU 180 25 1 3 Parameters of the Equivalent Circuit of the Asynchronous Machine 180 25 1 4 CS i 181 25 1 5 Example 1 V T Pattern parametrization senes pie eo te en daa eta vacui tox Un Ea SER 183 25 1 6 Example 2 Pattern parametrization cesses ene enn en nee nentes rennen es 183 25 1 7 Slip Compensation IFD Only ccccccceccceccceccceeeneceeeeceecceeceeeceeceeeaeeceecseeeseeeaeceaeceaeceaeeeeeeeeeeees 184 25 1 8 Torque Control VTC and FOC 185 25 2 rom dO __4 ___ 186 25 3 TABLE OF THE PARAMETERS DEPENDING ON THE INVERTER SIZE 198 26 LIMITS MENU T
13. 184 Table 50 Liskot Parameters C008 Gl 26 NEU UMP 186 Table 51 Equivalence between AC mains range and DC range Ie Henne eene 188 Table 52 Parameters Depending on the Inverter Size Class 47 ccccccccscccsecceecceeceeeeeeceaeceeeeeeecaeceaeceeeceeeceaeeeaeeeneeees 198 Table 53 Parameters Depending on the Inverter Size and Voltage Class 199 Table 54 List ot Parameters __ __________ 200 Table 55 Remote command inputs 205 Table 56 Serial Reference Inputs eee ee ene nee hse ese ese ese ree ese 207 Table 57 Listot Parameters CUA 210 Table 58 Functions that cannot be 214 Table 59 Terminals used for other inputs 214 Table 60 Terminal board Factory setting 216 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Table 82 Table 83 Table
14. Figure 3 Display Keypad 20 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN 2 DESCRIPTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS The Sinus Penta series inverter has a control board with the following inputs and outputs Analog Inputs REF type single ended AINT and AIN2 differential that are programmable in voltage or current with Dip switch SW1 see the DIP Switches Configuration in the Installation Manual 3 Analog Outputs that are programmable in voltage or current with Dip switch SW2 see the DIP Switches Configuration in the Installation Manual 8 multifunction digital inputs MDI of which three are of quick acquisition and can be used to acquire frequency or encoder signals MDI6 MDI7 and MDI8 MDI6 may be used to acquire a frequency signal denominated FINA or coupled with MDI7 to acquire push pull encoder signal denominated Encoder A MDI8 may be used to acquire a frequency input denominated this precludes the possibility of acquiring encoder B with optional board ES836 4 multifunction digital outputs of which of Push pull type MDO2 Open Collector and MDO3 and 4 with relay For the electrical characteristics of the control board inputs and outputs please refer to the paragraphs Characteristics of the Installation Manual For the programming of Analog inputs see INPUT REFERENCES MENU Analog outputs see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU
15. 59 Pee i 19 LOC REM npu 231 ___ _ ___ 243 Local Mode 65 DC Braking at SOD Braking Command Sent from Terminal Board MEME 246 n DCE MDU om 224 Moos UENIRE PIENE CEU 13 Digital Input for disabling torque limit source ref MOTOR 2 SEL Input set ro rro et buds 228 233 MOTOR 9 SEL Input scene oeste 220 DIGITALINPUT vut obse be taedio sits 213 MOTOR 179 Digital Output 145 Motor Thermal 24 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Eee eth 144 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION 264 DISABLE 222 Multi programming enabling 232 Disabling of Keys LOC REM FWD REV 7 N 23 DISPEAY KEYDAD 12 NAULETIRAMDP IDIUBES 226 Download Upload from the keypad 18 MUE TSPEED Sener re re 101 MULTISPEED Inputs 222 E N 289 Electrical Specifications of the motor 180 14 ani 215 ENABLE S iecit aita omi isti s
16. 1 Disabled 2 Stop bit R004 Time added to 4byte time for Serial Link O D9 pole ENGINEERING 591 R003 Baud Rate for Serial Link O D9 pole ENGINEERING 590 ROIO Baud Rate for Serial Link 1 45 ENGINEERING 597 ___6011 Time Added to 4byte time for Serial link 1 RJ45 ENGINEERING 598 RO12 Watchdog Time Serial Link 1 RJ45 ENGINEERING 599 ROI3 Parity Bit for Serial Link 1 RJ45 ENGINEERING ROO1 Inverter MODBUS Address for Serial Link D9 pole 1 247 Default Level ENGINEERING Address 588 This parameter determines the address assigned to the inverter connected through RS485 of serial link O 9 pole male D connector Function ROO2 Response Delay for Serial Link O D9 pole 1 1000 1 1000 msec Default 5 msec Level ENGINEERING Address 589 This parameter determines the inverter response delay after a master query sent through serial link O 9 pole male D connector Function 280 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Baud Rate for Serial Link O D9 pole 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 38400bps gt MES 0 0 Di Level ENGINEERING 590 This parameter determines the baud rate expressed in bits per second for serial link 9 pole male connector ROOA Time added to 4 Byte Tim
17. 68 SW Versions 60 BID Wp Dewar Re seta sten Versions sisse xo Be c 23 T POWER DOWN niiina 251 E E 58 d 132 PowerOff Log 58 Torgue ius 185 ProhibiP ues edt 24 Torque Limit 22 Torque Limit source 209 R ed P ANE 75 Tip Log INEM 57 Reference from 237 2 eerie eot tea sea Est eso Po esee ode 209 d dud M 216 U RESET alarms on MD13 disabled 222 REVERSE B NDU ie 219 UP and DOWN Inputs 224 REVERSE MPU 219 UP DOWN M 97 64 Up Down Reset 224 S V E 73 VIF Gl OM EET 181 JERIA CEINE a 279 Voltage Frequency 23 Serial NICS i 61 179 60 Setting of two command sources and an W pM UII nasi S 308 AVEM 0 e E
18. ENGLISH ESPANOL PORTUGUES DEUTSCH Default ITALIANO for English Countries 1 English 13 Level Address With the factory setting the language used on the keyboard display is Italian by using the P263 parameter it is possible to change the setting The man machine keypad interface software is known as man machine interface and its version is displayed on the SW versions screen of the product menu 16 It is also possible to use the extended version of the MMI software CAUTION P containing languages different from the ones mentioned above Product Name and Type 18 19 20 21 59 317 his screen displays the product name and type see example below SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO The product name appears on the second line of the keyboard display The third line shows the voltage class and the size of the inverter and the type of fan management In the case shown in the example the voltage class 15 400V the size of the inverter is 0020 and the control board ES821 does not manage the fan functioning condition identified by the character The possible characters found in the third field of the third line have the following meaning e _ Fans not managed by the ES821 board S The ES821 control board only contains the information concerning the correct functioning of the fans if
19. INVERTER OK 00 0 00rpm 2 0 00 rpm MEA PAR CF IDP INVERTER OK MOO 0 00rpm 2 0 00 rpm MEA PAR CF IDP PARAMETERS MENU P type parameters modifiable with the motor running PAR PASSWORD AND ACCESS LEVELS PAR DISPLAY PAR RAMPS INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MULTISPEED PAR PROHIBIT SPEED PAR VARIATION REFERENCE PERCENTAGE PAR SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING PAR ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS PAR TIMERS PID PARAMETERS PAR DIGITAL OUTPUTS PAR FIELD BUS PARAMETERS IDP INVERTER OK M00 0 00 2 0 00 rpm MEA PAR CF IDP PRODUCT MENU Language selection and inverter data PRODUCT 10 ll 1 13 l4 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 13 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 1 3 Navigation INVERTER OK INVERTER OK INVERTER OK 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 INVERTER OK M00 0 00 M02 0 00 rpm MEA PAR 2 0 00 rpm 2 0 00 rpm 2 0 00 rpm MEA PAR CF IDP MEA PAR CF IDP MEA PAR CF IDP MEASURE MENU PARAMETERS MENU Non modifiable M type P type parameters modifiable parameters with the motor running PRODUCT MENU Language selection and inverter data IDP PRODUCT MEA PAR MOTOR PASSWORD AND MEASURE ACCESS LEVELS PAR DISPLAY KEYPAD
20. 221 O ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS 234 Outout F 173 External Alarm 225 ud M External Alarm Trip delays 225 316 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERN Slip Compensation 23 P Source Selection 230 Parameter Allerefiobusss eidete cia donee iet uova 15 eR dut n s M Speed 72 Parameters of the Equivalent Circuit of the Speed Searching 23 Asynchronous 180 SPEED YAR MMOS 229 M AA 62 Speed Tor REFERENCE Sour 206 PERCENT VARIATION OF REFERENCE 106 se PID CONFIGURATION 267 OUI NUUS INNEN 214 PID Digital Regulator 24 START B Input 218 PID DISABLE Input eee 228 A ee SIE 309 PID Feedback References 22 STOP B Inout 219 PID PARAMETERS 136 STOP TET 218 PID References 22 OF IOC toU muti IE mI NE 233 PID Units of
21. 22 41 4 Warnings 23 Warning messages are displayed on the display keypad They are flashing messages that usually appear on one or two of the first three lines of the display 2 4 25 Some warnings simply state what is happening or suggest what to do when using the keypad However most of the warning messages are Coded warnings they are displayed with letter W followed by two 2 7 digits stating which warning is active at that moment for example w s 2 1 28 Warning messages are detailed in the following section 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 AN NOTE Warnings are neither protections nor alarms and are stored in the trip log 42 307 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 41 5 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO Warnings List Table 85 Warnings List WO3 SEARCHING The user interface is looking for the data of the next page to display WOA DATA READ KO Software warnings regarding data reading WO5 DATA WRITE KO Software warnings regarding data writing W06 HOME SAVED The page displayed has been saved as the home page displayed at power on WO7 DOWNLOADING The keypad is writing to the drive the WORK zone parameters saved on its own flash memory WO8 UPLOADING The keypad is reading from the drive the WORK zone parameters
22. I DP The Root page is factory set as the startup page to be displayed when the inverter is turned on Only from this page you can access the four main menus available measures AN NOTE PAR programming parameters CF gt configuration parameters IDP product identification The startup line of this page displays the inverter operating status see the M089 description The second and third lines display two measures which may be selected with the parameters P268 P268a The fourth line displays four main menus of the inverter The menu selected is the one displayed in the square brackets to change the selection use the A and V keys to access the menu press the SAVE ENTER key 64 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 10 3 Keypad and Local Mode Page entering the local mode by pressing the LOC REM key pressing the SAVE ENTER key from the keypad page the Help page of the keypad is displayed for a few seconds where the description of the measures displayed on the keypad page is shown If the P264b parameter Navigation mode with the MENU key is set as the Operator The possible keypad pages If not in the Local mode by using the MENU key in addition to the Only measures Keypad page only those pages with references for which the keypad has been selected as source shall be displayed see the CONTROL METHOD MENU and the PID CONFIGURATI
23. Analog reference computing AIN1 Saturn Input Signal Speed Input type Vel Max selection 056 POS T Vel Min Tr Min Offset 1 2 3 4 5 9 Q Correction Sie See sn MA mode Speed Motor n 2 Max GOTI Duos orn Trq Min COAT Try_Max C046 pooossz Figure 9 Processing Speed Analog Reference from Terminal Board AINT The figures below illustrate programming examples for REF analog input if motor 1 is selected and in MASTER mode speed reference 20 21 87 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO Input type selection C029 Spd Max C028 Spd Min Input type selection M037 028 Min 4 Max 1 P054 P051 P052 P000333 b Figure 10 Input REF Processing Example 1 Settings of the first example shown in the figure P050 3 P051 1V P052 10V Vel_Min C028 100 rpm Vel_Max C029 1100 rpm Figure 11 Input REF Processing Example 2 Settings of the second example shown in the figure 050 3 P051 1V P052 10V Vel Min C028 1200 rpm Vel Max 29 400 rpm 88 317 SINUS PENTA 2 INSTRUCTIONS Analog Input gt Speed Saturation
24. PID Out Max P256 Mode PID Struct P238 P254 P236 S ruct un THREE ini Rate Limiter PID reference 1 Out gt Q a err dt 1 4 gt Io Out Sat PID Ti Min A Disable P238 0 Desaturation P237 0 Algoritm PID Out Min PID Feedback Deriv Max 292 2 Der Mode i dA td at 239 Figure 24 PID Block Diagram A A 136 317 NOTE NOTE In Local mode the PID regulator is disabled if it is used as a correction of the reference or of voltage C294 2 Sum Reference or C294 3 Sum Voltage In LOCAL mode if the inverter reference is the PID output C294 Reference the Type parameter of the Keypad page in Local is P266 Rif Active Vel by activating the local mode in the Keypad page it is possible to alter the PID reference By pressing the LOC REM key a second time with the inverter disabled the MDI LOC REM programmed as a key C180a Pushbutton the PID is disabled and the speed reference can be set directly from the Keypad page SINUS PENTA 2 TRONICASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 20 2 List of Parameters from P236 to P256 Table 28 List of Parameters P236 P256 P236 Max value of PID output Min value of PID output ENGINEERING 100 00 P238 Max value of PID integral term ENGINEERING 100 00 239 Max value of PID derivative term ENGINEERING 839 100 00 240 PID proportional constant ENGINE
25. be modified even if the inverter is enabled but the motor is not on When the ENABLE signal is shutdown for VIC and FOC controls the inverter 39 AN NOTE fluxes the motor It is possible to flux the motor only if the START is shutdown and C184 Yes is set 4 42 215 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 28 1 3 RESET TERMINAL 16 MDI3 The RESET function is assigned to input terminal MDI3 resets the alarms to unlock the inverter operation It cannot be programmed on other terminals but additional functions to the RESET function may be assigned to the same terminal To remove the reset function from the MDI3 set C154 Yes If a protection trips the inverter locks the motor starts idling the motor idles and stops due to friction or the mechanical load and an alarm message is displayed Reset procedure To unlock the inverter activate the RESET input for an instant or press the RESET key on the keypad When the inverter unlocks and the cause for the alarm has been removed Inverter OK comes up on the screen otherwise the alarm persists and cannot be reset To restart the inverter with the factory setting activate and deactivate the ENABLE command see parameter C181 The factory setting does not reset alarms The alarms are stored and displayed at next NOTE power on and by keeping the inverter locked To reset unlock the inverter The alarms stored may be automatically
26. 37 1 Overview 23 For lifting applications it may be necessary to consider the opening closing of a mechanical brake in order to obtain a proper control of the connected motor 24 For example if a mechanical brake takes 500msec to open after the start command the delay is due to the type of brake therefore during 500msec the motor will not be running while the speed reference increases the preset ramp The motor then pushes against the brake and when it can rotate freely the motor torque will not match with 2 5 the torque required to move the connected load If the speed setpoint is kept at zero for a given time after sending the start command considering the time required for the mechanical brake to open the motor control will implement the proper torque for the motor speed as soon 2 6 as the motor can start rotating The brake closing may take place with a properly set digital input thus when the inverter detects the brake closing it automatically adjusts the value of the current injected into the motor to the fluxing value This is required when 2 during the lifting stage the mechanical brake closes when the load is suspended after reaching a speed that is practically at zero In this case the motor torque output keeps the load suspended and because the motor is at a standstill the brake closing has no effect on the speed regulator and the inverter shall no longer produce the 29 torque value required to keep the load suspe
27. 864 The inverter keypad is factory set with navigation by menu Navigation by menu is also preset at each power on Set P264 1 Only Modified to navigate only those parameters that have been modified with respect to the factory set programming Navigation is no longer by menu but linear the modified parameters are displayed in sequence and with the A and keys go from one parameter to another If only a few parameters have been modified navigation shall be slower because the inverter must find all the modified parameters amongst all the other parameters If the P264 setting is 2 Linear the parameters can be displayed in sequence by using the and keys and are no longer divided into the menus Function inverter is turned on This parameter cannot be saved navigation by menu is restored every time the 66 317 SINUS PENTA 2 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P264a Circular Navigation 0 NO 1 YES Default 1 YES Level ADVANCED Ae 365 With the factory setting P264a 1 YES navigation within each keypad menu is of a wrap type navigation starting from the startup page of the menu press the up key A to go to the next page At the last page press the up key A again to return to the startup page of the menu To go to the last page of the menu from the startup page press the down key V If P264a 0 NO it is no longer possible to continue by pressing the up
28. C217 nour C219 with C219 equal to max 10 Possible cases a tl gt t time t1 for braking command is longer than t To restart the motor following the preset acceleration ramp when DC Braking is over simply disable the DCB command and disable and enable again the START command see figure below Speed IDc f C220 Spdl DCB Speed Level DCB Command ON OFF 54 Figure 42 Manual DCB Example 1 Motor Speed DC Braking Manual DCB Command and START Command if t1 gt 1 b time t1 for braking command is shorter than t Two different cases may occur depending on the control algorithm and the setup of the motor speed searching function 246 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ITRONICASANTERN IFD or Control when the Speed Searching function is disabled C245 NO 2 2 Prematurely disable the manual braking command to stop DC braking If the motor is still rotating it will start idling To restart the motor following the preset acceleration ramp simply disable and enable the 2 3 START command see Figure 42 Speed 2 4 f C220 Free wheel 25 DCB Speed Level 2 DCB er 28 Command 29 30 Start 3 2 Command 33 34 OFF 3 5 PODOS55 b 36 Motor Speed DC Braking Manual DCB Command and START Command if t1 t and the control algorithm is 3 either IFD Voltage Frequency or VectorTorque when the Sp
29. Default Function 166 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P301 MDOA Testing Variable B ec SS F Default Level ADVANCED 5 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P299 using P303 as a comparing value Function P302 MDO4 Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 320 00 Range 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable see Table 30 Default Level ADVANCED 202 This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test A UI 4 UJ NJ P303 MDO4 Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 96 320 00 96 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable B 10 30 Default Level 703 EUIS This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test P304 MDOA Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests 13 OR B A SET B RESET A AND B Range XOR A NOR B Default Level ADVANCED 16 O 904 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests to calculate the output value 1 Function P305 MDOA Output Logic Level O FALSE 18 19 Level ADVANCED 205 Digital output logic function MDOA to apply a logic reversal negation to 2
30. 5 ABS 0 10 6 ABS 0 20mA 7 ABS 4 20mA 2 10 Level ADVANCED 84 Selects the operating mode of the AO2 analog output outputs see the DIP switches configuration and follow the instructions on the Analog outputs are set as voltage outputs by default to switch to the current NOTE keypad or consult the Installation Manual P185 AO2 analog output Variable selection See Table 19 Default Constant speed reference ADVANCED ele E 792 Selects the variable to be represented on the AO2 output P186 AO2 Min value of selected variable Function according to Range selection of P185 1500 1500 rpm Level ADVANCED 786 Minimum motor speed value obtained in correspondence with the minimum iiie 2 value of the variable P190 P187 AO2 Max value of selected variable Function according to Range selection of P185 sen Tape Ua 1500 1500 Level ADVANCED 787 Funct Maximum motor speed value obtained in correspondence with the minimum AO2 value of the variable P191 126 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P188 AO2Offset on analog output mE me erem Default ADVANCED 788 AO2 Offset value applied to the AO2 analog output P189 2 filter on analog output 65000 0 000 65 000 sec Default ADVANCED
31. This parameter indicates the time spent for motor fluxing 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 197 317 Z Lu A D 2 Y PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO TABLE OF THE PARAMETERS DEPENDING ON THE INVERTER SIZE 25 3 Table 52 Parameters Depending on the Inverter Size Class AT ozt ool osi 014 ool z ool osi ozt ool z ool osi ozt ool z ool Oc ool osi z ool ool ozt ool ozt ool Oz ost osi ozt ost osi ost ost ost osi ost ost ozt ost osi ost ozt ost osi ozt ost osi Oc ost osi Oz ost z osi osi ost osi z ost osi ozt ost osi Oz ost osi ozt ost osi z ost ozt ost osi ozt ost osi ot ost osi 01 ost osi 1605 8800 80 9800 6200 v80D 05 8900 2900 9905 905 1905 io WoW eoio 012 zooo EN sro momo peoo wu ezoo uo wo GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC C 02 0c 02 OSL OSL OSL OOL OOL 8 8 L L ir
32. been measured The value set is added to the signal measured before saturation or conversion Function PO64 Filter time constant over analog input AIN2 O 65000 0 65000ms Default 5 ms Level ADVANCED E 664 This parameter selects the value of the filter time constant of the first command applied gels to the input AIN2 signal when the signal saturation and conversion is over P065 Minimum reference and threshold disable START 32000 32000 rpm rpm Level ADVANCED Address If this parameter is other than zero the current speed reference computed when processing of all active source reference is over it is saturated as an absolute value of this parameter s value Saturation implies absolute value i e this parameter determines a prohibit range of the reference approx zero Example P065 100 rpm and current speed reference is 500 rpm if reference drops below 100 rpm for example reaching 50 the value of the active reference is saturated to 100 rpm until reference exceeds 100 rpm again or is lower than 100 rpm in that case the preset value will be assigned to the reference If also parameter PO66 is other than zero the inverter disabling function is enabled if the absolute value of the current speed reference is kept in the prohibit range for a time longer than the time set in PO 6 reference is set to zero and the motor speed decreases following t
33. Possible cause Solution 300 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 A070 Field Bus WatchDog Watchdog Field Bus tripped The watchdog fieldbus tripped and communication is suspended Communication is interrupted the Master did not send any valid Event message for a time longer than the time set in the parameter relating to the value set with parameter RO16 of the field bus watchdog time see FIELD BUS CONFIGURATION MENU e Voltage removed from Field bus LOI EINI communication from Master e Watchdog times too short 1 Check field bus connections 2 Check that the master ensures a constant sequence of legal Solution messages see FIELD BUS CONFIGURATION MENU with max time intervals lower than the preset watchdog time 3 Set longer watchdog times see 8016 A072 3 A089 90 Parameter Upload Download Error from Keypad to Inverter em Upload download failed one of the controls of the parameter Description consistency detected a fault A communication error occurred while uploading downloading the programming parameters from the keypad to the inverter Temporary interruption to the serial link between keypad and control board Check the connection between the keypad and the control board reset the alarm and repeat upload download Event Possible cause Solution A074 Overload Inverter thermal protection trip
34. This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is NOTE gt 2 Example MDO1 270 gt 2 gt MDOT Function Applied to the Result of Tests A and B P277 P286 P295 P304 A logic function is applied to the two Boolean signals obtained in order to obtain the output Boolean signal TRUE FALSE Six different tests may be performed for variable A using the comparing value and variable B 148 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN A OR B The selected digital output is enabled when at least one of the two conditions below is true this function also allows enabling the selected digital input based on one test only _ 0 SET B RESET The selected digital output is activated as the output of a Flip Set Reset whose inputs are signal and signal B This function can be used in case of hysteresis The output status depends on the previous value Q hold and on the result of the two tests Test A is the Set command Test B is the Reset command Example Suppose that the output enables only when the motor speed exceeds 50rpm and disables when the motor speed drops below 5 rpm To do so assign the first condition to Test A representing the Set command for Flip Flop P271 Motor Speed P273 gt P275 50rpm and assign the second condition to Test B representing the Reset command P272 Motor Speed P274 lt
35. aeee 57 ALARMS AND WARNINGS 29 Feedback from 237 Alarms cUm ai Rates eevieu P ObPU DIE 293 E 284 Alternative Command and Reference Sources 208 Fire MOda NT TM 25 59 ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS 114 Fire Mode enabling 233 ue 60 FIRST SDARDUP a ebrei Uta 33 AUTORE ET perron E 262 Fluxing at esses 232 AUTOTUNE 169 MaX 232 179 FOC Current 112 BRAKING RESISTANCE 241 us ae E b BRIDGE CRANE 277 ene Bridge Crane 24 C jg T AIEE E 179 CARRIER 173 INPUT REFERENCES 83 Changeover from Remote to Local command 212 j Command 204 CONIROL METHOD 203 227 Controlled stop in case of power failure 23 CURRENT BALANCING 108 K 2 CURRENT LIMITS 200 KEYPAD 220 Z L iU 23 DC RUNG MM 243
36. minimum value of the variable P202 P205 FOUT Output Max value with reference to P203 1000 10000 10 00 100 00 kHz 10000 100 00 kHz Level ADVANCED 905 Maximum output value obtained in correspondence with the maximum value Function of the variable P203 P206 Filter on FOUT frequency output LE 65000 0 000 65 000 sec Level ADVANCED 806 Time constant value of the filter applied to the FOUT frequency output P207 AOT Gain P208 AO2 Gain P209 AO3 Gain P210 AO1 MODBUS Address Variable P211 AO2 MODBUS Address Variable P212 AO3 MODBUS Address Variable Reserved P213 Amplitude of sinusoidal analog output signal BETTE 0 1000 0 100 0 Default 100 0 ENGINEERING Address 913 Amplitude of the sinusoidal analog output signal when Sine or Cosine variables are selected Function 130 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS RONICA P214 Frequency of sinusoidal analog output signal 20000 200 00Hz Default 1 00Hz Level ENGINEERING 314 Frequency of the sinusoidal analog output signal when Sine or Cosine Function variables are selected P215 Frequency of triangular analog output signal 725 We 20000 0 200 00Hz Default 1 00Hz ENGINEERING efe 51 5 Frequency of triangular analog output signal when Si
37. 78 Time constant value of the filter applied to the AO2 analog output P190 2 Output min value with reference to P186 Function according to Xing selection of P184 PSP Ine qe Default 10 0 V Level ADVANCED 790 Minimum output value obtained correspondence with the minimum value of the variable P186 UB WN Function P191 AO2 Output max value with reference to P187 Function according selection of P184 See Table 19 Default EAR ADVANCED 13 Address 79 1 Maximum output value obtained in correspondence with the maximum 14 Range Function value of the variable P187 P192 AO3 analog output Disabled tse TOV 16 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA 1 1 Level ADVANCED 19 792 Selects the operating mode of the AO3 analog output 2 O ABS 0 10V ABS O 20mA ABS 4 20mA 10V Default 21 127 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO Analog outputs are set as voltage outputs by default to switch to the current outputs AN NOTE see the dip switch configuration and follow the instructions on the keypad or consult the Installation Manual P193 AO3 analog output Variable selection Range See Table 19 Default E 5 Motor current Level ADVANCED Address 723 Selects the variable to be represented on the AO3 output P194 AO3 Min value of sele
38. A045 nO pon i Fault of the precharge By Pass A046 BOO Precharge By Pass connector fault A051 A051 PWMA1 Fault Hardware overcurrent side A A053 A053 PWMA Not ON Hardware failure IGBT A power on impossible A055 A055 PTC Alarm External PTC tripped A071 A071 Ims Interrupt Control board failure OverTime A072 A072 Parm Lost Chk Parameter download upload error A073 A073 Parm Lost COMI Parameter download upload error A074 Inverter 074 Inverter thermal protection tripped Communication watchdog via keypad Functions programmed for MDI6 and MDI7 or encoder B and encoder board not detected 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 293 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO Parameter download upload error Parameter download upload error Overvoltage due to the overload of the braking resistor Control board failure ByPass relay open IGBT heatsink temperature too high A096 Fan Fault Fan alarm Motor not connected A motor not enabled with C009 selected from MDI A102 A102 REF gt 20mA Current input REF 4 20mA or 0 20mA greater than 20mA Current input AINT 4 20mA or 0 20mA greater than 20mA A104 A104 AIN2 gt 20mA Current input AIN2 4 20mA or 0 20mA greater than 20mA A105 m Control board fal A001 A032 Control Board Failure Control board failure There may be several causes
39. If a VTC control or a FOC control is used limits are expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque Values set in the two parameters relating to min torque and max torque represent the limits for saturation of the control torque demand an external torque limit is set C147 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU the values set in the parameters above represent the range of the source used for limit the torque ramp times set in the RAMPS MENU will be applied to the preset limit torque reference Also ramp time for torque limit can be selected C049 for motor 1 C092 for motor 2 and C135 for motor 3 for VTC and FOC controls only 26 2 List of Parameters from to C135 Table 54 List of Parameters C043 C135 Current limit while accelerating Current limit at constant rpm Current limit while decelerating Current limit decrease in flux weakening Minimum torque Maximum torque Ramp time for torque limit Reduced motor revs in acceleration limit 200 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z LETTRONICA C043 C086 C129 Current Limit While accelerating 0 Disabled O 400 1 0 Min Imax inverter Inom mot 400 0 See Table 52 Level BASIC C043 ADVANCED C086 C129 Nelle 1043 1086 1129 mee This parameter defines the current limit while accelerating it is expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the selected motor Function The maxim
40. Input type C029 Spd Max M037 P050 0 C028 Spd Min P000334 b Figure 12 Input REF Processing Example 3 Settings of the example in the figure P050 0 P051 5V P052 8V Vel Min C028 300 rpm Vel Max C029 1450 rpm 89 317 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 20 21 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 12 3 List of Parameters from P050 to P074 Table 13 List of Parameters PO50 74 Value of REF input for generativa min reference ADVANCED 451 E052 __ velve of REF input for generating max reference ADVANCED 100V 652 _ Value of Offset over REF med ADVANCED L 054 Fle ie constant over RF mpa ADVANGED 5 ma 558 Type of gnc oer IND input ADVANCED 660 62 Value of AIN2 input for generating max reference ADVANCED 20 0mA P063 Value of Offset over AIN2 input ADVANCED F065 Minimum reference ond threshold disable START ADVANCED 0 85 P066 Delay disable START at 5 threshold ADVANCED Os 666 P069 Range of UP DOWN reference ADVANCED l Unipolar 669 74 Value of ECH generating max reference ADVANCED 1500 rpm 90 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 50 Type of Signal over Input REF 4 Default Level Address Function ADVANCED 650 This parameter selects the type of single ended analog signal over term
41. TRONICASANTERN AG Speed Medos Ane Speed Ret Speed Motor Freq Selected Quanti y AGO GROUND P271 Out Test Vector Selection Ou Testing Quantity Comparing Value P276 fortest B Function Testing Out lest 2 UB 10 1 1 PO00263 8 Testing Quantity B ll 1 Figure 26 ANALOG Mode 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 151 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO D1 Inverter Run Ok 02 Inverter Ok On D3 Inverter Ok Off DO Disable P271 Selected Quantity A Vector Selection A Logic Selected Quantity B Function Vector Selection B 000261 Figure 27 DOUBLE DIGITAL Mode 152 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN P270 Digital output mode rn Te 5 Ful Uen E 5 Drorcesl Out Testi Vector Selection A P273 Selected Test A Digital mode Function UB 10 Selected Quantity B Veotor Selection ll 1 13 l4 5 Selected Test B 16 17 Figure 28 General Structure of the Parameterization of a Digital Output 18 19 20 153 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANT
42. v 4 o REGULATOR Access to P264 Navigation Display Keypad TO MENU Navigation inside Circular Display Keypad menu navigation ren mode 5 Qy P264a Circular menu navigation mode gt YES Access to parameter alteration P264a Parameter alteration Circular menu navigation mode P264a The parameter will be saved in the non volatile memory if the ESC key is pressed to quit and will therefore be lost when shut down On the contrary press SAVE ENTER to confirm the alteration Figure 2 Example of navigation 14 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 1 4 Parameter Alteration With factory setting parameter alteration is possible The parameters included in the Parameter Menu identified by Pxxx can always be changed instead the parameters included in the Configuration Menu identified by Cxxx Rxxx lxxx can be modified only with the motor stopped To respect better safety condition it is necessary to modify the configuration parameters only with the inverter disabled ENABLE command inactive to do so has to be set to only in standby To disable parameter alteration it is sufficient to modify and save writing enable With factory setting and 2 password are both equal to 1 setting 000 0 the parameters cannot be modified instead with POOO 1 it is possible to make change To improve
43. 16 1 18 19 20 21 39 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 13 Additional parameter alterations 14 Reset 40 317 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO For the optimization of the motor performance adjust parameters C021 no load current C024 mutual inductance C025 rotor time constant Consider the following C021 Too high values Lower torque specially at rated speed because most part of the voltage imposed by the inverter is used to magnetize the motor instead of generating a proper motor torque C021 Too low values Because of the motor flux weakening higher current ratings are needed C024 Mutual inductance This is computed each time the no load current level is altered This is not binding for the motor control but strongly affects the correct estimation of the output torque in case of overestimation decrease C025 and vice versa C025 Optimum value gt To obtain the optimum value of the rotor time constant the best way consists in performing several attempts with a constant load but with different values of C025 The optimum value is the one ensuring to obtain the output torque with the lower current see M026 in the Motor Measures Menu Note that with parameter standby only condition for altering parameters C it is possible to alter the Cxxx parameters in the CONFIGURATION menu only when the inverter is DISABLED or STOPPED whilst if Standby Fluxi
44. 169 Current Regulator Proportional Constant Mot n 3 ENGINEERING P170 Current Regulator Integral Time Mot n 3 ENGINEERING P172 Flux Regulator Proportional Constant Mot n 3 ENGINEERING P173 Flux Regulator Integral Time Mot n 3 ENGINEERING 16 18 19 20 21 111 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P155 P162 P169 Current Regulator Proportional Constant 0 65000 0 00 650 00 Default 300 Level ENGINEERING 755 Address 762 motor n 2 769 motor n 3 Control FOC Proportional coefficient Kp of current regulator Id and lq in field rotary reference for motor n 1 P162 and P169 relate to motors 2 and 3 The regulator s structure is as follows error Set Point Measure Function integral_status integral_status error Ki Ts Output Kp error integral status where Kp is the proportional coefficient Ki is the integral coefficient 1 Ti where Ti is the integral time Ts is the regulator operating time ranging from 200 to 400 microseconds based on carrier frequency 3 00 AN NOTE This parameter is automatically computed and saved with the Autotuning procedure P156 P163 P170 Current Regulator Integral Time Range 1 32000 1 0 32000 Disabled Default 20 0 ms Level ENGINEERING 756 Address 763 motor n 2 770 motor n 3 Control FOC Integral time Ti of current regulator PI Id and lq in the field ro
45. 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN SERIAL LINK 2 2 The Serial Link source is an input on the MODBUS link the reference value must be written by the user at the 2 3 addresses below Table 56 Serial Reference Inputs 24 1412 1025 ADVANCED Speed speed Min speed RPM 2 5 integral Max speed Speed reference 1413 1026 ENGINEERING Speed 99 99 100 decimal portion 1416 1029 ADVANCED joue J ree Tenths torque limit integral Max torque Speed value and Maximum Speed value as indicated by the C028 and C029 parameters for motor 1 and relevant parameters for motor 2 and motor 3 2 a If C029 lt C028 then Min speed C029 Max speed C028 If C029 gt C028 then Min speed C028 Max speed C029 2 O 1029 is the signal is used as a torque reference or as a Torque Limit is expressed as a percentage of the max absolute torque set with the parameters 47 and C048 motor 1 and relevant parameters for motor 2 and motor 3 The max 30 absolute torque is the max value between absolute values of parameters C047 1025 is the speed reference in RPM its range depends on the active Minimum and C048 i NOTE Max absolute torque Max CO47 C048 3 1 The unit of measure is tenths of 96 Torque reference 96 1029 0 1 96 Reference range 3 2 If C047 lt C028 then Min speed C029 Max speed C028 If C029 gt C028 then Min speed C028 Max
46. 285 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANTERNG NOTE D Virtual terminal board is the low byte of the word Bitmap MDI1 START MDI2 ENABLE MDI3 RESET MDI4 MDI5 MDI6 MDI7 MDI8 NOOB WN Ns illl The logic status of these bits is included in the overall status of the inverter digital inputs measure M031 along with the other command sources if at least one of the parameters C140 C142 is set as 6 FieldBus Important bit 15 must always be written 1 this means that data exchanged between the master and the inverter are consistent thus keeping the watchdog counter reset see Alarm A070 NOTE E Digital commands from FIELD BUS are the 4 lower bytes of the word Bitmap Fbus CMD 1 Fbus CMD 2 Fbus CMD 3 Fbus CMD 4 Columns 2 and 3 state the name and position of the commands sent via field bus Example to control digital input 1 via field bus through command 4 set the parameters below in the Digital Outputs menu P270 1 Digital Digital Output Mode P271 037 Fbus CMD4 Variable A Selection P278 1 True Output Logic Level NOTE F To control analog outputs the Field Bus set parameter 1 7 accordingly The correspondence between the exchanged value and the real value in volts of the digital outputs 1889 1000 111 286 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETTEC HIC ASANTERN 39 3 2 FROM SINUS PENTA T
47. Autotune must be performed only after entering the motor ratings or the ratings of 2 6 NOTE the encoder used as a speed feedback Please refer to sections Motor Control Menu and Encoder Frequency Input Menu 2 The selected motor may be tuned in order to obtain the machine ratings or the parameterization required for the correct functioning of the control algorithms It is also possible to check the proper operation wiring of the 2 a encoder used as a speed feedback The Autotune menu includes two programming parameters 1073 and 1074 Parameter 1073 allows to enable 29 and select the type of autotune Parameter l074 which can be programmed only if 1073 Motor Tune describes the type of autotune carried out Since the value of 1073 1074 can not be permanently changed and are automaticall reset following an autotune the ENABLE signal must be disabled and the ESC key must 30 be used to accept the set value 31 Set 1073 as Motor Tune to enable autotune functions that can be selected with 1074 3 2 For the correct operation of the tuning algorithms enter the motor ratings and the 3 3 NOTE ratings of the encoder used as a speed feedback Please refer to sections Motor Control Menu and Encoder Frequency Input Menu 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 23 1 1 MOTOR AUTOTUNE AND ADJUSTING LOOPS 169 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO Table 39 Programmable Motor Tu
48. If MDI6 and are used for encoder reading only Push Pull encoders be used NOTE For the reversal of the encoder speed measure properly set up parameter C199 29 1 1 WITHOUT OPTIONAL BOARD ES836 e Encoder reading Digital inputs MDI6 and MDI7 are used for reading the two channels of a 24V push pull encoder powered directly by the encoder board see the Sinus Penta Installation Manual No function can be programmed for MDI6 and MDIZ if you attempt to program MDI6 and MDI7 alarm A082 Illegal Encoder Configuration will trip when ENABLE closes e Reading a Frequency Input Digital input MDI6 or MDI8 can be used MDI6 is programmed as a frequency input FINA with C189 no other function must be programmed otherwise alarm A100 Illegal Configuration trips when ENABLE closes MDI8 is programmed as a frequency input with C189 no other function must be assigned and encoder optional board ES836 must not be applied to the power drive otherwise alarm A101 MDI8 Illegal Configuration trips when ENABLE closes e Reading a Frequency Input and an Encoder MDI6 and MDI7 are used to read the push pull encoder and MDI8 is used to read the frequency input The following alarms may trip e A082 Illegal Encoder Configuration if additional functions are programmed for MDI6 or MDI7 e A101 MDIS Illegal Configuration if additional functions are programmed for MDI8 or if the power drive detects the presence of opt
49. MDI8 39 _______ Level ADVANCED 3 PNe e E 1159 The Cw CCw function reverses the active reference signal the connected motor decelerates to zero following the preset deceleration ramp then it 4 Function accelerates following the preset acceleration ramp until it reaches the new reference value 4l 42 223 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C160 DCB Input Reem 8 Inactive MDI8 ADVANCED ele fA 1100 and For other types of control this function has no effect even if C1600 The DCB command enables DC braking for a period of time depending on the speed value determining the input activation See DC BRAKING MENU for more details Function C161 C162 UP and DOWN Inputs Neem O 8 Inactive MDI8 ________ Inactive EA ADVANCED 1161 1162 This function increases UP or decreases DOWN the reference for which the UpDown source from MDI has been selected by adding a quantity to the reference itself This also depends upon the following parameters C163 Up Down Reset P067 Up Down Ramp Time 68 Memorise Up Down value when power off 8 Up Down Reset Speed Torque at stop PO68b Up Down Reset PID at stop PO68c Up Down Reset Speed Torque at when sources changed PO68d Reset Up Down PID when sources changed PO69 Up
50. P253 End S Curve for PID ramps R S P254 PID Qut Threshold Enabling Integral Implem R W S P255 Inverter Disabling Time for PID Output Equal to Min Value R W S P256 Time Spent by PID Output from 0 to 100 R W S P257 Gain for PID Measure Scaling 26 59 7e 00 00 2 5 000 SOO Ts ms Disabled Ts ms ms 100 00 25 100 00 p 5 0 5 E EA 0 0 w Refmax 1000 5 Disabled 3 1 000 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 2 5 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICAS ANTERNO When the level of liquid in the tank exceeds the reference value set from the keypad a negative error is produced Error Reference Feedback Because the complemented output computing mode is selected and because the complemented output is the speed reference the higher the error absolute value the higher the PID output value This means that the quicker the level increases the quicker the pump suction Whereas if the level is lower than the reference a positive error is produced because the PID output is limited to 0 the pump will not activate if the PID output is equal to the min value for a timer longer than P255 1000 P244 5sec the inverter is put on stand by 276 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN 37 BRIDGE CRANE MENU 22
51. PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS EXAMPLE The speed of a motor is to be controlled through a 0 5 V analog input Speed range is O 1500 rpm two digital inputs are available to increase three speed values with steps of 100rpm Setting the min and max speed The parameters for the motor min max speed are C028 0 rpm C029 1800 rpm Setting the analog reference Default setting the analog reference is sent from input REF C143 REF The speed range for the analog input must be 0 1500 rpm Default setting in the Reference Menu for REF analog input 3 0 10V Type of reference for REF input 051 0 0V Min value for REF input P052 10 0 V Max value for REF input P052 is the voltage value for REF for a speed reference of 1800rpm C029 For a speed reference of 1500rpm with 5 V P052 is to be set as follows Max speed REF 5 V 29 Vx 5 1800rpm 1500rpm 6 V If PO52 6V a speed reference of 1500rpm is set for REF with 5V Setting the reference from digital inputs Default setting two digital inputs for multispeed values Digital Inputs menu C155 MDI4 C156 MDI5 Depending on the status of digital inputs MDI4 and MDI5 In the Multispeed menu set the speed steps as follows P080 1 Sum Speed 81 100rpm Multispeed 1 8 200rpm Multispeed 2 85 300rpm Multispeed 3 P080 Multispeed function the selected multispeed is summed up to the reference
52. SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 7 10 PowerOff Log Menu Power Off List This submenu contains the measures of some characteristic variables detected at the inverter power off in conjunction with the alarm if any tripped at that moment Press the SAVE ENTER key to access the submenu and navigate to the measures detected by the inverter when it was tripped Measures and codes are the same as the ones shown in the Trip Log Menu Fault List The next page shows a navigation example for the PowerOff Log Menu Power Off List Navigation Example PowerOff Log Menu SAVE ENTER a ESC 58 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 RONICAS 8 PRODUCT MENU 8 1 Overview In the product menu the P263 Language parameter used in the keyboard display appears as well as information relative to the product such as e Product Name read only e read only e Application read only e SW versions read only e Inverter service times read only e Serial Number read only e Fire Mode enable Password read write e Manufacturer read only 8 2 P263 Parameters and Fire Mode enable Password Table 5 List of Parameter P263 Fire Mode enable Password O Italiano P263 Language BASIC 1 English for English Countries Fire Mode enable Password BASIC 0 868 P263 Language 10
53. The FOC control has the same basic structure as that of any classic field oriented control The inner loops of FOC control are two current regulators PI having the same parameters The first regulator controls torque current lq the second regulator controls flux current Id Torque current Iq is computed based on the required torque set point In Slave mode torque reference the required set point comes from the external reference in Master mode the torque set point is given by the output of the speed regulator see SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU for the regulation of the motor speed of rotation Flux current Id results from the output of the flux regulator ensuring that the connected motor is always properly fluxed This menu allows to access the current regulators and flux regulators for the FOC control 17 2 List of Parameters from P155 to P173 on UB WN eB Table 18 List of Parameters P155 P173 10 P155 Current Regulator Proportional Constant Mot 1 ENGINEERING E Ww Current Regulator Integral Time Mot n 1 ENGINEERING P158 Flux Regulator Proportional Constant Mot n 1 ENGINEERING 7388 P159 Flux Regulator Integral Time Mot n 1 ENGINEERING P162 Current Regulator Proportional Constant Mot n 2 ENGINEERING P163 Current Regulator Integral Time Mot n 2 ENGINEERING 13 P165 Flux Regulator Proportional Constant Mot n 2 ENGINEERING P166 Flux Regulator Integral Time Mot n 2 ENGINEERING 14
54. Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO The maximum allowable value as an absolute value for C028 and C029 motor min and NOTE max speed depends on the type of control being used on the rated speed of the connected motor and on the max carrier frequency for IFD and FOC only for VTC control the max carrier frequency is always set to 5kHz NOTE The value set as the min speed is used as the saturation of the global reference the speed reference will never be lower than the value set as min speed The min speed is not respected only when the REV command or the CW CCW command are NOTE sent after setting a value for max speed exceeding the min value C029 C028 for motor 1 and with the max reference to the inverter The motor rpm will be C029 C028 gt gt gt C029 72 115 Motor Max Speed ZO 32000 note in Range parameter C028 0 32000 rpm see note in parameter 028 Default 1500 rpm Level BASIC 1029 Dee 1072 1115 This parameter defines the maximum speed of the connected motor When references forming the global reference are at their max relative value the global reference equals the max speed of the connected motor 73 116 Flux Weakening Speed 0 200 096 20096 XE 90 Level ENGINEERING 1030 1073 1116 This parameter defines the speed value determining the motor flux weakening Function It is expressed as
55. eens 144 21 1 1 FOOTY SEMINO cesses 144 21 1 2 SHC COUIDIIS 144 21 2 Programmable Modes IDIGgl imis caesa ______6_ _ ___ _________ _ 150 obi 154 21 4 List of Parameters from P270 to P305 ese eese se esse eese se ese ee eese eene 158 22 FIELD BUS PARAMETERS MENU cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecccccsescceccs 168 22 1 12 TM E 168 22 2 DsbotParamelers rom P330 to P33 T a doa tur PP NU OM RES 168 23 AUTOTUNE ________ _ _ _______ _ 169 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANTERNO em es ee eee 169 Motor Autotune and Adjusting Loops 169 23 1 2 Checking the Encoder Operation eese ne e eee nennen ren nennen 171 202 lsrerPatemslcisdqom EORNM RM __ 171 24 CARRIER FREQUENCY MENU REOR 090 Ea ORA EO ERR eO VOR EPIS Vau Pe 173 173 24 1 1 FOCON TRECE 173 24 1 2 Example E S EMI aM
56. ll 1 13 745 4 5 16 UB and FOC This parameter determines the min integral time for the speed regulator It may be accessed only if the min and max error thresholds are different PI30zP131 for 1 P140zP141 for Motor2 P150zP151 for Motor3 Function P126 P136 P146 Max Integral Time 1 32000 0 001 32 000 Disable ms 1 Default 500 500 ms 18 Level BASIC 726 7 36 19 746 and 2 This parameter determines the max integral time for the speed Function regulator 7 1 109 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO P128 P138 P148 Min Proportional Coefficient 0 65000 0 00 650 00 Default 10 00 Level BASIC Address 728 738 748 Control VTC and FOC This parameter determines the min proportional coefficient for the speed regulator Default Function value 10 if a speed error of 1 occurs the regulator will require 10 of the motor rated torque P129 P139 P149 Max Proportional coefficient Range 0 65000 0 00 650 00 Default 1000 10 00 Level BASIC Address 729 739 749 Control VTC and FOC This parameter determines the max proportional coefficient for the speed regulator Default value 10 if a speed error of 1 occurs the regulator will require 10 of the motor rated torque This parameter may be accessed
57. 92 200 sPorParaimelem rom C225 ______ 253 33 SPEED SEARCHING MENU 257 OO 0 Ec ___8 ____ 257 23 2 Lister Parameters trom 245 10 C240 _ _ _ 260 34 262 EEN _ _ _ _ _ ______ _ _________ ______ gt gt 262 4 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETIRONICASANTERN 34 2 List of Parameters from C255 to 258 262 35 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU cccccccccecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccccceccs 264 35 1 264 99 2 Parameters trom C264 10 __________ 265 36 PID CONFIGURATION MENU ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccceccccccceccccccesccecs 267 36 1 A I IMEEM 267 36 2 Operation and Structure of the 267 36 3 List of Parameters from C285 to 294 270 36 4 Keeping Fluid Level Constant Example 274 37 BRIDGE CRANE MENU 277 34 4
58. ADVANCED 651 This parameter selects the value for input REF signal for minimum reference or better the reference set in C028 Master mode or in C047 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor 3 is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used 91 317 1 2 3 4 5 9 20 21 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P052 Value of Input REF generating Max Reference 100 100 if PO50 0 10 0V 10 0V if PO50 0 10V 200 200 if P050 1 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO50 1 20 mA 40 200 if 5 2 4 0mA 20 0 mA if PO50 2 4 20 mA O 100 if PO50 O 0V 10 0V if PO50 3 0 200 if P050 4 0 20 0 mA if 5 4 0 20 mA Default 10 0 V Level ADVANCED 6 OD 2 This parameter selects the value for input REF signal for minimum reference or better the reference set in C029 Master mode or in C048 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and C048 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used P053 Value of Offset over input REF 10 00 V 410 00 V if P050 0 or 3 oom ELM 4000 2000 20 00 mA 20 00 mA if 50 1 2 4 MEMO 1 ov Level ADVANCED 653 This parameter selects the offset correction value of the analog signal REF Function tha
59. AINT C145 146 0 C145 C146 0 Disabled Level C143 C144 ADVANCED C145 C146 ENGINEERING 1143 1144 1145 1146 This parameter selects sources for the speed or torque reference The reference resulting from the sum of the selected sources represents the inverter speed or torque reference If the PID action has been set as reference C294 Reference the inverter speed or torque references shall only be given by the PID output and not by the sources set in C143 C146 iR OON 0 Function C147 Torque Limit Input Disabled REF AINT AIN2 Frequency input Serial Link Field Bus Keypad Encoder UpDown from MDI Disabled 0 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 0 Level ENGINEERING ele 147 Sonic VIC and FOC If a speed control with FOC or VTC control algorithms is used it is possible fo use an external torque limit Parameter C147 selects the Torque Limit source At the selected torque limit source reference the torque ramp times set in PO26 PO27 shall be applied The external torque limit may be disabled by closing the digital input set with C187 Function If the reference source is disabled the torque limit results from the max absolute torque determined by the inverter size and the motor size The max absolute torque is the max value ranging between the absolute values of C047 and C048 motor 1 and relevan
60. C parameters see to modify them even when fluxing and the motor 15 not running can be written only if the inverter is not running and the ENABLE command is disabled terminal MDI2 open parameters have the same features as C parameters but the new parameter value once written and saved will be used only at next power on To use the new parameter value immediately turn the inverter off and on or press the RESET key for at least 5 seconds The Work zone may be copied to the BACKUP zone through input 1012 included in the Eeprom menu and described in the section below With the same input it is possible to copy the Backup zone onto the WORK zone to restore the parameter values stored in the WORK zone With input 1012 it is also possible to restore the factory setting values for all parameters in the WORK zone DEFAULT 1 Restore back up 2 Save back up BACK UP Memory locations 3 Save work 4 Restore default 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4l 42 289 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 40 2 List of Inputs Table 83 List of Parameter 1012 0012 EEPROM Control BASIC 1399 40 2 1 1012 EEPROM CONTROL 0 No Command 2 Restore Backup 4 Save Backup 5 Save Work 11 Restore Default Not a parameter at power on and whenever the EEPROM comman
61. C034 Preboost ooo y C00x C04x Motor Control M1 C010 Ctrl Type M1 0 IFD C008 VmainsNom 012 0 No CO015 Fmot 50 0 Hz 017 M1 C019 Vnom C021 10 MI 0 C023 Ld MI 26 21 28 C037 FraBst 50 C036 Boost 1 0 C038 AutoBst C040 DV 1 Disabled 44 1 1 C046 defilimRed 1 0 No C048 Tmax C050 NoDimfM1 0 No C05x CO8x Motor Control 2 C062 Vnom M2 064 10 2 0 CO080 FraBst 50 96 _____ 08 09 Limits M2 C090 Tmin M2 0 0 CO9x C12x Motor Control TT Loe ee C104 Inom M3 106 0 0 C108 Rstat M3 C110 Lm M3 250 00 mH C114 nmin M3 0 rpm C116 spddeflux M3 90 96 C118 red Trq3 30 0 96 071 M2 0 rpm C127 Tfl M3 313 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO C12x C13x Limits M3 C129 lacclim3 C131 Ideclim3 Tmi 0 C130 lrunlim3 C132 defilimRed3 0 No C134 Tmax M3 C136 NoDimfM3 0 No ee ee a l C141 Sel Comm 2 1 Terminals C143 Sel InRef 1 1 REF C145 Sel InRef 3 0 Disabled C147 Sel T lim 0 Disabled C140 Sel Comm 1 1 Terminals C144 Sel InRef 2 2 AINI C146 Sel InRef 4 O Disabled C148 RemLoc mode 0 StandBy Fluxing O C15x C18x Digital Inputs C154 DisabReset 0 No C156 Mltsp 1 5 MDI5 C142 Sel Comm 3 O Disabled C149
62. C162 C163 32 C164 C164a C165 C165a 3 3 1 167 3 4 C168 C169 C170 3 D C171 C172 C173 3 6 C174 C175 3 177 178 179 3 9 180 180 181 C182 3 C183 C184 Fluxing at activation only with START closed C185 4 186 Fire Mode enabling Input C187 4 1 42 ___ 156 CI57 CI58 ___ 159 Cl C163 ___ 164 Cl 4a ___ 165 Cl o L con _ C0172 0173 C174 0175 EN MED a Cl800 8i C182 C184 Cl85 C186 217 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO If a parameter is set to zero its function is disabled otherwise the parameter value stands for NOTE the input assigned to the function T CAUTION The setting of two functions on the same terminal is only possibly by enabling the 182 1 parameter C149a START B Input LE o Inactive MDI8 Level ADVANCED 1277 The START B Input acts as the START Input see paragraph START terminal 14 MDIT1 Function when Terminal Board B is active C150 STOP Input O 8 Inactive Default O Inactive Level ADVANCED ele 150 This parameter disables the RUN function enabled by the START command The setting of this function has eff
63. EDEN 227 E ad 317 317
64. O t K L2 1 eT where T is the motor thermal time constant Motor 1 lt C267 Motor 2 lt C270 Motor lt C273 The motor heating is proportional to the square of RMS current flowing through the motor 102 Alarm A75 Motor overheated relating to thermal protection modes different from trips when current flowing through the motor makes the motor temperature exceed the allowable asymptotic value set with It pick up current Motor 1 lt C266 Motor 2 C269 Motor 3 C272 Alarm A75 can be reset after a time depending on the motor thermal constant allowing for the motor cooling In thermal protection mode from PTC alarm PTC A55 trips when voltage acquired by input AIN2 used as a PTC signal input exceeds a preset threshold value when characteristic temperature is attained Alarm 55 can be reset only if temperature decreases by 5 C with respect to trip temperature Forced Self 2 K lo 2 Klo A75 Alarm Thresh t T Os 05 n Figure 48 Motor Heating Patterns 264 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICAS ANTERN Motor heating with two different current values l and 1 that are kept constant in time and pick up current It of 2 2 thermal protection depending on speed output based on parameter C265 for motor 1 C268 for motor 2 and C271 for motor 3 2 3 If motor thermal time constant T is not known you can enter a value equa
65. P205 FOUT Output is os with reference to ADVANCED 100 00 kHz P206 Filter on FOUT frequency output ADVANCED 16 ADVANCED 17 19 20 21 123 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO P176 AO1Analog output 0 Disabled 1 10V 2 0 10V 3 0 20mA 4 4 20mA 5 ABS 10V ABS 0 20mA 7 ABS 4 20mA Default 1 10V Level ADVANCED Address 776 Function Selects the operating mode of AOlanalog output The example shows the analog output current setting and the relative Dip switch SW2 position is indicated with the contact open and contact 2 closed NOTE DIP switches configuration and follow the instructions on the keypad or consult the Installation Analog outputs are set as voltage outputs by default to switch to the current outputs see the Manual P177 AOI analog output Variable selection _ Range See Table 19 Default Motor speed Level ADVANCED e EE 777 Selects the variable to be represented on the output P178 AOI Min value of selected variable Kange A according to selection of See Table 19 BEN 245800 sis 15 00 di 10000 rpm 1500 rpm Level ADVANCED Address 7 7 Minimum value of motor speed corresponding to 1 Output min value with reference to P182 Function 124 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ROHI P179 AOI Max value of selected varia
66. P276 5rpm A more detailed example 15 described at the end of this section Coon UB 10 XOR B The selected digital output enables when either one or the other condition is true but not both at the same time ll 1 13 l4 15 16 1 18 19 20 149 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO A NAND B The selected digital output enables when no condition is true or when only one of the two conditions is true NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 and 9 Example MDO1 2 lt 270 lt 9 MDOI 2 3 4 Logic applied at the Digital Output P278 P287 P296 P305 At the end of the processing chain it is possible to reverse the logic of the Boolean signal The user can choose whether the logic level of the digital output is POSITIVE or NEGATIVE FALSE a logic negation is applied NEGATIVE logic 1 TRUE no negation is applied POSITIVE logic NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is other than zero Example P2700 21 2 Programmable Modes Diagrams P271 DO Disable 01 Inverter Run Ok D2 Inverter Ok On D3 Inverter Ok Off P278 Selected Quantity A Logic Vector Selection 260 Figure 25 DIGITAL Mode 150 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2
67. PO69 Range of UP DOWN reference 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar Default 1 Unipolar Level ADVANCED 660 If PO69 1 the quantity added through input digital signals UP and DOWN or with the A and keys local mode is unipolar i e it is positive only and has a min value equal to zero For bipolar quantities the added quantity may be negative P070 JOG reference Speed Torque Range 100 Default O 0 BAR ADVANCED 670 Value of the JOG reference For speed control the percentage of the reference relates to the maximum speed value of the selected motor max value as an absolute value between min and max speed parameters in case of torque control the percentage of the jog reference relates to the torque max value of the selected motor max value as an absolute value between min and max torque limit Function 1 2 3 4 5 9 Q P071 Value of FIN generating min reference EST M 1000 10000 10 kHz 100 kHz Default 10 kHz ADVANCED 67 This parameter selects the value of the frequency input signal for minimum reference or better the reference set in C028 Master mode or in C047 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor 3 is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used P072 Value of FIN generating max reference Range
68. Table 11 Parameters Used for References Menu Scaling parameters for references sent from analog inputs REF AINT AIN2 Scaling parameters for references sent from encoder and frequency P050 74 input Parameters for modifications using UP and DOWN keys Parameter for JOG reference set up Parameter for inverter disabling in case of reference at min value 080 P098 Preset Speed setting preset speed values to be selected through igital inputs P105 P108 Prohibit Speed Parameters setting prohibit speed values Percent Parameters setting slowing down values percent to be selected P115 P121 e Mee Variation through digital inputs C143 146 Parameters setting the reference source Method Parameter setting Master speed mode or Slave torque mode C011 C028 Motor 1 Parameters setting min speed and max speed C029 For motor n 1 Parameter setting Master speed mode or Slave torque mode C054 71 Motor 2 Parameters setting min speed and max speed C072 For motor n 2 Parameter setting Master speed mode or Slave torque mode C097 C114 Motor 3 Parameters setting min speed and max speed C115 For motor n 3 C047 C048 Current Limit Parameters setting min torque and max torque For motor 1 C090 C091 Current Limit Parameters setting min torque and max torque n 2 For motor n 2 C133 C134 Current Limit Parameters setting min torque and max torque
69. The preset value expresses the voltage increase when the motor is running at rated torque 25 1 5 EXAMPLE 1 PATTERN PARAMETRIZATION 33 Motor 1 voltage frequency pattern is to be programmed for an asynchronous motor 400V 50Hz with a rated 34 speed of 1500rpm up to 2000rpm Type of V f curve C013 Constant Torque 3 5 Rated frequency C015 50Hz Rated voltage C019 400V Preboost C034 depending on the starting torque 36 Max speed C115 2000rpm 25 1 6 EXAMPLE 2 V F PATTERN PARAMETRIZATION 3 Voltage frequency pattern is to be programmed for an asynchronous motor 400V 50Hz having a rated power of 39 7 5 kW and a rated speed of 1420 rpm with a voltage compensation depending the motor torque Voltage compensation AutoBoost is calculated as follows Type of V f curve C013 Constant Torque 3 Rated frequency C015 50Hz Motor rpm 016 1420rpm Rated power C017 7 5kwW Rated voltage C019 400V Preboost C034 depending on the starting torque 4 1 Autoboost C038 4 42 183 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO Voltage compensation AutoBoost results from the formula below AV C019 x C038 100 x T Tn Where T is the estimated motor torque and Tn is the motor rated torque Tn is calculated as follows Tn Pn x pole torques 2nf C017 x pole torques 2x x C015 Where pole torques is the integer number obtained by approximating 60 15
70. The ramps range from 1 to 4 for the selected ramp add 1 to the binary figure obtained If one of these functions is not programmed the value of the relative bit is zero Function Table 64 Multiramp selection Selected Ramp d Table 65 Selected Ramp Multiramp O 0 ____ 0 1 j 1 If one of these functions is not programmed the value of the relative bit is zero For example if C167 is Inactive 0 and C168 is programmed for one terminal it is therefore possible to select only ramp or ramp 4 NOTE If the ramp rounding off function is enabled PO21z0 the real ramp times also depend on the values of parameters P022 P023 24 P025 P031 226 317 SINUS PENTA 2 RONICA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C169 JOG Input O 8 Inactive MDI8 80 Level ADVANCED ele EM 1 169 When the JOG function is enabled the motor rotates at low speed with slow ramps manually controlled by the user only by means of the key If the inverter is enabled ENABLE activated but is not running and if the terminal is enabled the inverter will run the connected motor will accelerate with JOG ramp P029 up to the JOG speed reference PO70 On the other hand if the terminal is disabled the inverter will stop the connected motor will decelerate to zero speed following the JOG ramp P029 Reverse the direction of rotation of
71. Type of input for each analog input Dip Switch SW1 allows to set the acquisition method of the input signal voltage signal or current signal The voltage signal can be bipolar 10V 4 10V or unipolar OV 4 10V The current signal can be bipolar 20 20mA unipolar OmA 20mA or with a minimum offset 20 The user will set each analog input mode in parameters P050 P055 060 Table 12 Analog Input Hardware Mode Single ended input Input 10V SW 1 A off REF P Input O 20mA SW1 A on a Ditferential input Input 10V SW1 B off AINT input O 20mA SW1 B iii Input 10V SW1 C off SW1 D E off 2060 MEEN input InputO 20mA SWI C on SWI D E of Input SW1 C off SW1 D E on NOTE If AIN2 input is configured as PTC refer to MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU to select the proper parameters Its measures are not significant any longer AN NOTE Configurations not explicitely showed are not allowed CAUTION For each analog input REF AINT AIN2 check that the mode parameter setting PO50 P055 P060 matches with the setting of the relevant Dip Switches SW1 Scaling is obtained by setting the parameters relating to the linear function for the conversion from the value read by the analog input to the corresponding speed torque reference value The conversion function is a straight line passing through 2 points in Cartesian coordinates having the values read by the analog input in
72. as Disabled and set low values for the parameters relating to proportional gain P127 P128 Set equal values for P127 and P128 and increase them until an overshoot takes place when the setpoint is reached Decrease P127 and P128 by approx 30 then decrease the high values set for integral time in P125 and P126 keep both values equal until an acceptable setpoint response is obtained Check that the motor runs smoothly at constant speed If alarm A060 Fault No Corr trips this means that the current loop is not properly tuned Follow the instructions given in step 8 and decrease the value of 10 parameter C021 in the Configuration Motor 1 menu If the motor is noisy when starting this means that the rotor time constant is not correct Follow the instructions given in step 9 again or manually change the value of the rotor time constant parameter C025 for a smooth motor startup If no failure occurred go to step 13 Otherwise check the inverter connections paying particular attention to supply voltages DC link and input reference Also check if alarm messages are displayed In the Motor Measure submenu check the speed reference the reference speed processed by the ramps 2 the supply voltage of the control section M030 the DC link voltage M029 the condition of the control terminals M033 Check to see if these readings match with the measured values 1 2 3 4 ES 8 9 10 ll 1 13 l4 15
73. for values Val Max Out Max 16 Offset Defines the offset value applied to the analog output Offset is set in parameter P180 for analog output AOT in parameters P188 P196 for AO2 and AO3 respectively 1 Filter Defines the filter time constant applied to the analog output The filter time constant is set in parameter P181 for analog output AOT in parameters P189 P197 for AO2 and AO3 respectively 19 20 21 115 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 18 1 3 OVERVIEW OF THE FREQUENCY OUTPUT When programming the frequency output the setting of MDO1 in the Digital Outputs Menu is disabled The figure below illustrates the structure of the frequency output the parameter description is similar to the analog outputs Max Val Out Max P203 P205 P206 MDO1 Selection Filter 50 duty Selection vector Min Val Out Min P202 P204 P000339 b Figure 17 Structure of the Frequency Output 116 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETTEONICASAMTERN 18 2 Variables This section covers the variables that can be represented for the analog and frequency outputs 1 Table 19 Variables to be selected for the Analog and Frequency Outputs 2 Selection Value FS Ref Description 3 0 Disable 100 0096 Disabled output 1 Motor Speed 10000 rpm Speed of the connected motor 4 2 Speed Ref 10000 rpm Speed reference at constant speed 3 Ram
74. key A at the last page of the menu but it is only possible to go back to previous pages by pressing the down key back to the startup page 1 Function P264b Navigation with the menu key mp 0 STANDARD A 1 OPERATOR O STANDARD Level ADVANCED 2 When the MENU key is pressed from any parameter access is gained to the menu page in which that parameter is contained when pressed again the Root page is displayed and from here once the MENU key is pressed again the keypad page comes up When pressing the key with the factory setting P264b 0 STANDARD the root page comes up and then the parameter from which the operation began If the keypad page is displayed with the P264b 1 OPERATOR setting navigation is blocked and it is possible to continue only by holding the ESC key down for a few seconds this is useful for preventing inexpert operators from using the keypad parameters By setting P265 l measures as the startup page of the keypad and P264b 1 OPERATOR the navigation of the inverter will always be blocked for inexpert users Function P265 Startup Page O Status 1 measures 2 Keypad Defoult Status Level ADVANCED 866 The P265 setting determines the page to be displayed when the inverter is turned on The factory set startup page is the Root page By setting P265 1 measures
75. l4 5 16 1 18 19 21 141 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P253 PID Ramp End Rounding Off _ Range 0 100 Default 50 50 Level ENGINEERING Address 853 Function As P252 but P253 sets the rounding off applied at the end of the ramps AN NOTE When P253 is used the preset ramp time is increased by P253 2 P254 Integral Term Activation Threshold Range 0 0 500 0 1 1 Level ENGINEERING Address 854 This parameter sets a threshold value below which the integrator is kept to zero It has effect only when the PID regulator is used as a reference corrector or generator In this case the threshold percentage value refers to the max speed or torque absolute value set for the active motor The integral term is not calculated when the speed or torque percentage value expressed as an absolute value is lower than the value set in P254 If P254 is set to zero the integrator is always activated Function P255 Delay Disable START with PID Out P237 0 Disabled 0 60000 1 60000 Ts JjO Disobled Level ENGINEERING Address 855 This parameter is expressed in time units of the PID regulator cycle see P244 and it sets the max time for the inverter operation with the PID regulator output continuously at its min value If this is true for a time equal to the time set in P255 the inverter is automatica
76. n 3 For motor n 3 The following pages contain block diagrams illustrating speed reference processing Figure 6 and torque reference 2 processing Figure 7 Menus and parameters used are also stated 2 1 5 lt UB 83 317 gd FeLOO0d 5 2 1010 A N gt D nua SS SASI SN 101001 15 14 SLLO PLLO L600 NMOG ae E 1010 N PUL MOM 1010 puooes nua 6209 8209 1102 9994 2909 NUAN 1040W 1514 e lie i Me e oro sro 80 450 8608 080d ELETTRONICASANTERNO nus nua nue peeds nue _ 9 BUIMOIS uopenes 195944 mins BY Jo 5 9 9 HP 7 204 Figure 7 Speed Reference Processing 64 317 2 gt gt a SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS TRONICASANTERN c sin lt nam nue 690d 490d nue 5 uBis UOHEJTIES J PSJ9A9H 790d 0904 m ST m ci
77. the board autodiagnostics file constantly checks its operating conditions e Considerable electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference Possible cause E e Possible failure of the microcontroller or other circuits on the control board 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET command Solution 2 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service incompatible Software Texas version When switched on DSP Motorola detected an incompatible version of the software downloaded to Flash Texas software version incompatible with Motorola The wrong software was downloaded 1 Download the correct DSP Texas software version Solution 2 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service A039 Texas Flash not programmed 9775799710 Texas Flash not programmed ET When switched on DSP Motorola detected that Flash Texas is not correctly programmed Mes VH M A prior attempt to download DSP Texas software failed 1 Download the correct DSP Texas software version 2 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service Solution 294 317 SINUS PENTA 2 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A040 User Alarm trip caused by the user as a test Event The user commands the inverter to trip the alarm Possible cause Solution Value 1 was entered to address MODBUS 1400 via serial link Reset th
78. the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied 167 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS INSTRUCTIONS 22 FIELD BUS PARAMETERS MENU 22 1 Overview In this Menu it is possible to select the Third measure and the Fourth measure from the Field Bus The list of the selectable measures is the same as MEASURE MENU The First measure and the Second measure are fixed Output Current and Motor Speed see EXCHANGED PARAMETERS 22 2 List of Parameters from P330 to P331 Table 38 List of Parameters P330 P331 P330 Third measure from the Field Bus ENGINEERING 930 12 Torque Out P331 Fourth measure from the Field Bus ENGINEERING 931 22 PID Out P330 Third measure from the Field Bus WOE 0 74 M000 M074 Default M012 Torque Out Level ENGINEERING Address 930 Function Third measure exchanged via the Field Bus P331 Fourth measure from the Field Bus 0 74 74 Default M022 PID Out Level ENGINEERING Address 931 Function Fourth measure exchanged via the Field Bus 168 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 23 AUTOTUNE MENU 22 23 1 Overview 24 NOTE See the chapter FIRST STARTUP for tuning based on the control algorithm to be used 2 5 At the end of the Autotune procedure the system automatically saves the whole NOTE parameter set of the inverter
79. the current reference value and the current value measured Set the current regulator s parameters see FOC REGULATORS MENU so as to obtain the smaller difference between the two waveforms Manual tune of the flux loop The correct parameters of the flux regulator are calculated whenever the rotor time constant value changes see 2 FOC Auto rotation 5 FOC Man In any case it is possible to manually tune the flux loop rotation flux Display analog outputs AO1 and AO2 showing the flux reference value and the flux value obtained Set the regulator s parameters so as to obtain the smaller difference between the two waveforms See the FOC REGULATORS MENU all Auto no rotation 3 VIC FOC Man rotation speed AY NOTE If a manual tune is selected do the following to quit the function disable the ENABLE command and set 1073 0 Disable 170 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICA TERN 23 1 2 CHECKING THE ENCODER OPERATION 22 Set 1073 as Encoder Tune to check the correct operation of the encoder selected as a speed feedback see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU and to automatically set the correct rotation direction Before checking the correct operation of the encoder used as a speed feedback 24 AN NOTE enter the motor ratings and the encoder ratings Please refer to the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and the ENCODER FREQUENCY 2 5 INPUTS MENU Once 1073 is set as Encoder Tune and the
80. 016 by defect The programmable parameters relating to the AutoBoost functions are the following C038 AutoBoost variable torque compensation expressed as a percentage of the motor rated voltage 019 The value set in C038 is the voltage increase when the motor is running at its rated torque C017 Pn rated power of the connected motor 25 1 7 SLIP COMPENSATION IFD ONLY This function allows to compensate the speed decrease of the asynchronous motor when the mechanical load increases slip compensation only for the IFD control Parameters relating to this function are included in the Motor Control Menu Configuration Menu Table 49 Parameters for Slip Compensation IFD Control Rated voltage rated voltage of the connected motor voltage rating No load power Power absorbed by the motor when no load is connected to the motor it 15 expressed as a percentage of the motor rated power Stator resistance determines the resistance of the stator phases used to compute the power consumption due to Joule effect Activation of slip compensation If other than zero this parameter enables slip compensation and C039 C082 C125 defines its relevant value Once the inverter power output has been estimated and the power losses due to the Joule effect and to the mechanical parts function of output voltage and no load power have been subtracted mechanical power is obtained Starting from mechanical power and the value set for sl
81. 0800 s vri ozi 200 005 ooe 01 rss 00082 021 ooro 28 5 eoi 2900 045 ooe 01 00082 ooz ozio 229 s 0900 ozs ooe 01 soz 00082 ooz OSUO 195 921 s 96 0 ozs 01 461 00082 ooz 0000 s sz 0700 SIS ooe 01 26 00082 ooz 0000 90 s 6 69 8600 SIS 01 ezz 00062 ooz OSCO ror c tv 600 015 01 ezz 000852 osz 0050 192 90 95 0200 015 01 852 000852 00 oovo 91 6200 015 00 01 srz 00052 005 0090 91 s 9 oe 0400 015 00 01 792 00052 009 0080 9t s 2100 015 00 01 792 00052 009 0080 91 s 9100 015 00 01 ooe 00052 008 0001 91 s sz 591 100 SOS 00 01 soz ooosz 0021 ooer 91 S iz 591 1100 GOS 00 01 z i 0005 009 ooi 6 91 S szi 591 6000 SOS 002 01 ezi 00052 0052 0002 28 91 S Se 2000 SOS 002 01 vel 00052 COE 0062 v9 91 S sii SOL 5000 SOS CN 40 CN OIN EM NUM 198 317 SINUS PENT
82. 10 kHz 100 kHz Default 100 kHz Level ADVANCED 072 This parameter selects the value of the frequency input signal for maximum reference or better the reference set in C029 Master mode or in C048 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C029 and C048 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used 20 21 99 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P073 Value of ECH generating min reference 32000 32000 32000 rpm BITE 1500 1500 rpm Level ADVANCED Address 073 This parameter selects the value of the Encoder input for minimum reference or better the reference set in C028 Master mode or in C047 Slave mode If motor 2 is active the values set in C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor 3 is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used P074 Value of ECH generating max reference Range 32000 rpm Default 1500 rpm Level ADVANCED De 074 This parameter selects the value of the Encoder input for maximum reference or better the reference set in C028 Master mode or in C047 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor 3 is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used 100 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 13 MULTISPEED MENU
83. 100 times faster than deceleration set in C227 start ramp C227 100 sec C228 1 00 start deceleration is zero deceleration ramp of infinite time Function C229 Increase sensibility of DC bus control 1 250 Default Level ENGINEERING Address 1229 Based on voltage trend on the DC bus this function allows to detect mains loss in advance If the value for this coefficient is too high erroneous mains loss conditions can be detected due to a sudden drop in DC bus voltage Function 254 317 SINUS PENTA 2 LETTRONICA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C230 Voltage Level of DC Bus in Power Down 250 450 V for Class 2T 400 800 V for Class 4T 500 960 V for Class 5T 600 1150 V for Class 6T 339 V for Class 2T 679 V for Class 4T 380 480V 707 V for Class 481 500V 813 V for Class 5T 976 V for Class 6T 250 450 for Class 2T 400 800 for Class 4T 500 960 for Class 5T 600 1150 for Class 6T 339 for Class 2T 679 for Class 4T 380 480V Default 707 for Class 4T 481 500V 813 for Class 5T 976 for Class 6T Level ENGINEERING 230 Determines the reference value for DC bus voltage in case of automatic deceleration in Power Down C225 Yes V C231 Proportional constant of automatic deceleration BETTE 0 32000 0 000 32 000 Default 50 0 050 ENGINEERING NICE 1231 Proportional coefficient used in Pl regulator
84. 13 1 Overview AN NOTE See also INPUT REFERENCES MENU and DIGITAL INPUTS MENU The Preset Speed menu allows defining the values for 15 preset speed or multispeed references set in parameters P081 P098 Their application method is set in 8 The desired speed is selected through the digital inputs described in the previous section relating to the Digital Inputs Menu The programmable reference range using these parameters is 32000 if multispeed unit of measure is gt P100 1 00 rpm 3200 0 rpm multispeed unit of measure is gt P100 0 10 rpm e 320 00 rpm multispeed unit of measure is gt P100 0 01 rpm Use parameters C155 C156 C157 and C158 to set the digital inputs in multispeed mode Parameter defines the functionality of the references set in the preset speed function PRESET SPEED EXCLUSIVE PRESET SPEED SUM SPEED If PRESET SPEED the speed reference is the value set in the preset speed which is active at that moment If digital inputs set as multispeed are all open inactive the speed reference is the reference coming from the sources selected in the Control Method Menu C143 C146 If POBO EXCLUSIVE PRESET SPEED the speed reference is the value set in the multispeed which is active at that moment If digital inputs set as multispeed are all open inactive no other reference source is considered speed reference is zero If SUM SPEED the speed reference value ass
85. 15000 83 10 0V if PO6O 3 0 10V en 0 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO60 4 0 20 mA Default 4 0 Level ADVANCED 66 This parameter selects the value for input AIN2 signal for minimum reference or better the reference set in C028 Master mode or in C047 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor 3 is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used 20 21 95 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO P062 Value of input AIN2 for generating max reference 100 100 ifPO60 O 10 0V 10 0V if P0602 0 105 200 200 if PO60 1 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if 60 1 20 mA 40 200 if PO60 2 4 0mA 20 0 mA if PO60 2 4 20 mA 100 60 3 0 0V 10 0V if P0602 3 0 200 if PO60 4 0 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO60 4 0 20 mA 120 0 Level ADVANCED 662 This parameter selects the value for input AINT signal for maximum reference better the reference set in C029 Master mode or in C048 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and C048 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used 10 00V 10 00 V if P060 2003 2000 2000 20 00 mA 20 00 mA if PO60 1 2 4 MEMO jov Level ADVANCED 663 This parameter selects the offset correction value of the analog signal AIN2 that has
86. 1670 This is the measure of the PID feedback expressed as a percentage Please refer to the PID Parameters and PID Configuration Menus for the feedback scaling of the PID input M021 PID Error 96 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min and max saturation values of the reference and the feedback set in the following parameters P245 P246 reference P247 P248 feedback 10000 Always active Address 1671 This is the measure of the PID input error expressed as a percentage See also the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU Function 10 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 21 47 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO M022 PID Output 96 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min and max saturation soll 0909 values of the PID output set in the following parameters P236 P237 Active Always active Address 1672 This is the measure of the output produced by the PID regulator and expressed as a percentage Please refer to the PID Parameters and PID Configuration Menus for the scaling of the PID output M023 PID Reference after ramps Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min value of the PID reference set in parameters P245 P246 and on the gain level set in P257 32000 Active Always active Address 1673 T
87. 2 2 1 0 rpm Level BASIC Address 700 Determines the unit of measure considered for the 15 multispeed values and the Fire Mode speed in P099 Function CAUTION If the unit of measure of the multispeed values in P100 is modified the programmed speed values for the multispeed and Fire Mode values will be RECOMPUTED UB 20 21 103 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS INSTRUCTIONS A 14 PROHIBIT SPEED MENU 14 1 Overview This menu allows to set prohibit speed ranges that the motor may maintain constant due to problems with mechanical resonance Three prohibit speed ranges are available 3 intermediate values of the speed range and their semi amplitude one for all ranges In this way the speed reference value is never included in one of the preset speed ranges when decreasing if the speed reference matches with the max allowable value of a prohibit speed range the value assigned to the reference is given by the min allowable value of the speed range and vice versa when the reference is increasing The discontinuity of the speed reference has no effect on the actual speed of the connected motor because it will vary with continuity until it reaches the new rpm value of the speed reference The intermediate values of the prohibit speed ranges are to be intended as absolute values independent of the reference sign Motor 4 opeed Decreasing Re
88. 2 O With the IFD control the inverter enabling is also dependent on the START input and on the current value of the active reference If the START command is active but the reference is lower than a preset threshold the inverter 30 operation is inactive To enable this operating mode with other types of control it is necessary to set parameters P065 and P066 appropriately 3 1 The PID regulator may also disable the inverter operation see parameter P255 If the ENABLE input signal is disabled for one of the active terminals the inverter 3 2 T CAUTION is instantly disabled and the motor starts idling The motor could reach uncontrolled speed due to the mechanical load In this case the mechanical 33 load could bring about uncontrolled speed shut down N CAUTION If a protection alarm trips the inverter disables and the motor starts idling 34 If software timers are enabled for digital inputs the timer for the ENABLE signal 3 5 AN NOTE timer active for MDI2 delays the signal enabling The ENABLE signal is always instantly disabled for the ENABLE function Toff in MDI2 is ignored 3 6 The activation of the ENABLE command enables the particular alarms which NOTE controls the configuration consistency of certain parameters When the ENABLE signal is shutdown it is impossible to modify the type NOTE parameters with the factory setting By setting the condition for modifying 39 C parameters Standby Fluxing the parameters
89. 38 1 2 SPECIAL CODES 0x01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function sent by the Master is different from 0x03 Read Holding Registers and from Ox10 Preset Multiple Registers 0x02 ILLEGAL ADDRESS The reading writing address used by the Master is illegal 0x03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The numerical value written by the Master is not included in the correct range 0x06 DEVICE BUSY The inverter did not acknowledge the Master s written values for example because it is running with a Cxxx parameter 0x07 ANOTHER USER Other users are writing values to the same parameter that the Master is trying to use WRITING editing through display keypad or Upload Download from keypad 0x09 BAD ACCESS LEVEL The Master tried to write a parameter which is not included in the current access level for example an ADVANCED parameter with a BASIC level 38 2 List of Parameters from 8001 to 8013 Table 81 List of Parameters R001 R013 2002 Response Delay for Serial Link O ENGINEERING 589 beue D9 pole 6 38400 bps 2msec 1 Disabled 2 Stop bit 2001 Inverter MODBUS Address for Serial Link O D9 pole ENGINEERING 598 2005 Watchdog time for Serial Link 0 ENGINEERING 92 D9 pole ROO6 Parity Bit for Serial Link O D9 pole ENGINEERING 593 ROO8 Inverter MODBUS address for Serial Link 1 5 ENGINEERING ENGINEERING 596 5 msec 6 38400 i 2msec
90. A master device typically a computer is then needed to start serial communications The following items may be configured for both serial links 1 Ev Io The inverter MODBUS address The inverter response delay to a Master query The baud rate of the serial link expressed in bits per second The time added to the 4 byte time The serial link watchdog which is active if the relevant parameter is not set at 0 The type of parity used for serial communications The parameters in this menu are of an R type NOTE Once saved they are active only when the inverter is turned on again or offer a control board reset pushing Reset for more than 5 sec 38 1 1 WATCHDOG ALARMS The Watchdog alarms determined by the serial link may be the followina e A061 Serial alarm n 0 WDG e A062 Serial alarm n 1 WDG e A081 Keypad Watchdog The first two alarms trip when no legal message is sent from the serial link to the inverter for a time longer than the time set in the relevant watchdog parameters these alarms are active only if the relevant parameters are not set at zero 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 The third alarm trips only if the display keypad used as a reference command source detects a communication loss for a time longer than 2 seconds 2 9 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO
91. Action selection Feedback sources selection E PID Feedback Active only with C171 z No and 3 6 Figure 49 Structure of the PID Regulator 34 The above figure illustrates a block diagram of the PID regulator Each block will be analysed in the sections that follow 3 5 First select the sources for the PID reference block 1 Three different sources may be configured for which their sum shall be considered The same applies to the feedback sources block 2 3 38 39 40 4l 42 267 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO C285 C286 C287 Sources PlDref vector C PID Reference 1 Sources PlDref vector C285 0 Disabled 1 Ref AT PID Reference 2 Sources PlDref vector C28 6 3 AIM IPTC FIN 5 e 5 Serial Link PP i Field bus PID Reference 3 Sources PlDref vector C28 7 4 Keypad ps 1 Encoder Ref min P245 UpDwn C288 C289 C290 Sources PIDfbk rf D Disabled 1 Ref PID Feedback 1 Sources PIDfbk vector C288 Fbk Max P248 2 AINT 3 AIN2 PTC i FIN oe Sn ID 5 Serial Link PID Feedback 2 Sources PIDfbk vector C289 PID Feedback Field bus 7 Keypad _ E 8 Encoder PID Feedback 3 Sources PIDfbk vector C290
92. Always active Address 1679 Function Measure of the voltage in the inverter DC link Supply Voltage 0 1000 0 1000 V Active Always active Address 1680 Measure of the effective value of the inverter supply voltage 46 317 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 7 3 PID Regulator Menu This menu contains the measures relating to the input and output values of the internal PID regulator M018 PID Reference at constant rpm 96 100 00 96 10000 Note The actual range depends the max value and the min i value of the PID reference set in the following parameters P245 P246 Active Always active 1668 This is the measure of the PID reference expressed as a percentage Please refer to the Function PID Parameters and PID Configuration Menus for the scaling of the PID input M019 Pld Reference after ramps 96 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min 5 value of the PID reference set in the following parameters P245 P246 Always active 1669 This is the measure of the PID reference expressed as a percentage Please refer to the Xa PID Parameters and PID Configuration Menus for the scaling of the PID input M020 PID Feedback 96 100 00 410000 Note The actual range depends on the mox value and the min value of the PID feedback set in the following parameters P247 P248 Always active
93. C133 Minimum Torque 5000 5000 _500 0 500 096 Defouit ADVANCED Address 1047 1090 1133 Control VTC and FOC This parameter determines the min limit of the torque demanded by the control Function being used Torque is expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor If an external torque limit is set C147 in the Control Method Menu the values set in the NOTE parameters above represent the range of the source used for limitation the torque ramp times set in the Ramps Menu will be applied to the preset limit torque reference PO26 P027 C048 CO91 C134 Maximum Torque HS 5000 5000 500 0 500 0 Default 1200 120 096 ADVANCED Address 1048 1091 1134 Control VTC and FOC This parameter determines the max limit of the torque demanded by the control Function being used Torque is expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor If an external torque limit is set C147 in the Control Method Menu the values set in the NOTE parameters above represent the range of the source used for limitation the torque ramp times set in the Ramps Menu will be applied to the preset limit torque reference PO26 PO27 C049 C092 C135 Ramp time for torque limit Range 10 30000 10 30000ms Default 50 50ms Level ADVANCED Address 1049 1092 1135 Control VTC and FOC This parameter determines the ti
94. COMMUNICATIONS SUSPENDED This alarm trips if Sinus Penta is not sent any legal message via FIELDBUS within the timeout set in parameter 8016 To disable this alarm set the parameter to A legal message is the word of the digital inputs M035 with bit 15 1 written by the master Important this is enabled only when the inverter receives the first message with bit 15 1 288 317 SINUS PENTA 2 INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING 40 EEPROM MENU 40 1 Overview The inverter has tour different memory zones e RAM Volatile memory containing the inverter s current parameterisation e Default Zone Non volatile memory that cannot be accessed by the user containing the factory setting of the inverter parameters e Work Zone Non volatile memory where customised parameters are saved Whenever the inverter is reset this parameterisation is loaded to the RAM e Back up Zone Non volatile memory storing a new inverter parameterisation Back up parameters are modified only when the user explicitly saves the back up zone Any parameter can be changed by the user The inverter will immediately use the new parameter value The user may save the parameter value in the Work zone If no new value is saved for a given parameter when the inverter is switched on again it will use the parameter value stored in the Work zone parameters can be written at any moment With the factory setting the
95. Digital Inputs see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Digital inputs used as Frequency or Encoder inputs see ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU Multifunction digital outputs see DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU and AINT and AIN2 configured for 4 20mA The factory setting for the inverter is to have REF input configured for O 10V input N CAUTION SW These settings require that SW1 dip switches which are located on the control board are in the following position 1 3 4 5 9 Q 10 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 21 21 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 3 REFERENCES The references of the inverter may be as follows e Processing speed torque references e Torque limit references e PID references e PID feedback references 3 1 Speed Torque references If the type of control used is a speed control e g for Motor 1 C011 Speed the main reference is a speed reference whilst if the programmed control is in torque e g for Motor 1 CO11 Torque or C011 Speed but the digital input is closed for the Slave programmed with C170 the main reference of the inverter is a torque reference The main reference may be made up of e The sum of analog digital inputs programmed as sources see parameters C143 C146 in CONTROL METHOD MENU e The PID output if C294 PID Implementation Reference e From the digital inputs programmed as Multispeed see MULTISPEED MENU only when the main refer
96. Down Range Reference C163 Up Down Reset Input Reem 8 Inactive MDI8 AM o _____ Inactive ADVANCED 11623 This function sets to zero the variation of reference obtained with the UP or DOWN inputs or with the keys A and on the keypad display The Up Down reset reference may also be carried with other functions see PO68a 8 224 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z RONICA C164 C165 C166 External Alarm Inputs 2 2 CIN Inactive MDI1 MDI8 Meo Inactive EAR ADVANCED 1164 1166 1166 25 By programming a digital input with one of these 3 functions the status of this input will ALWAYS AND ONLY BE DISPLAYED ON THE INVERTER S TERMINAL BOARD 2 6 When the command contact opens the inverter is blocked by an alarm A delay of the external alarm operations can be set with the relative parameters C164a C165a C166a To restart the inverter the digital input set as an external alarm must be closed and it is necessary to perform a reset procedure Alarms generated by these 3 functions are respectively A083 A084 A085 With a factory setting this function is disabled Function 28 The terminal board for these 3 functions is only the terminal hardware of the 29 inverter If different command sources are enabled see CONTROL METHOD MENU the External Alarm signal command is obtained only for the inverter
97. ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and wait until tune is completed Warning W32 Open Enable is displayed The inverter has computed and saved the values for C022 stator resistance and C023 leakage inductance If alarm A097 Motor Wires KO trips check the motor wiring If alarm A065 Autotune KO trips this means that the ENABLE command has opened before autotune was complete In this case reset the drive sending a command of terminal MDI3 or press the RESET key in the display keypad and repeat the autotune procedure Set parameters in the Motor limits 1 submenu depending on the max desired current Activate the ENABLE input terminal 15 and the START input terminal 14 and send a speed reference the RUN LED and REF LED will come on and the motor will start Make sure the motor is rotating in the correct direction If not operate on terminal terminal 18 CW CCW open the ENABLE and START terminals Shut off the inverter wait at least 5 minutes and reverse two of the motor phases 1 2 3 4 ES 8 9 10 ll 1 13 l4 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 33 317 PROGRAMMING 9 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANTERNO 9 Possible failures If no failure occurred go to step 10 Otherwise check the inverter connections paying particular attention to supply voltages DC link and input reference Also check if alarm messages are displayed In the Measure submenu check t
98. Hz Default 500 50 0 Hz Level BASIC ENT 1015 1058 1101 Control Al This parameter defines the motor rated frequency frequency rating 190 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 74 016 C059 C102 Motor Rated 1 32000 1 32000 rpm Default 1420 1420 rom Level BASIC 1016 Address 1059 1102 Function This parameter defines the motor rated rpm rpm rating C017 C060 C103 Motor Rated Power 2T 0 1 660 0 kW AT 0 1 1120 0 kW 5T 0 1 1620 0 kW 6T 0 1 1940 0 kW 1 19400 Range See Table 53 Default See Table 53 Level BASIC 1017 Address 1060 1103 Function This parameter defines the motor rated power power rating C018 C061 C104 Motor Rated Current 1 12000 0 1 1200 0 9 See Table 52 See Table 52 Default See Table 52 Level BASIC 1018 Address 1061 1104 Function This parameter defines the motor rated current current rating 50 12000 5 0 1200 0 V 2300 for inverter class 2T 230 0V for inverter class 2T 4000 for inverter class 4T 400 0V for inverter class 41 5750 for inverter class 5T 575 0V for inverter class 5T 6900 for inverter class 6T 690 0V for inverter class 6T Level BASIC 1019 Address 1062 1105 Function This parameter defines the motor rated voltage voltage rating C020 C063 C106 Motor No Load Power Default 0 1000 0 0 100 0 MENO 0 0 Lev
99. LOC REM key is pressed P266 Only measures Page with the four set measures impossible to modify any of the references 1 P266 Ref Activated The last line of the keypad page is the inverter reference if a control is active in a speed mode there will be a speed reference if a control is active in a torque mode a torque 18 mode will be active and if the inverter reference is the PID output C294 PID Action 1 Reference there will be a PID Ref By using the A and V keys it is possible to modify the reference displayed on the fourth line of the keypad page 19 P266 Ref Activated Speed To be used only with a speed mode control the inverter reference 15 given by the PID output C294 PID Action 1 Reference when pressing the LOC REM key the startup time and entering the Local mode the fourth line displays the PID Ref and it is possible to modify the PID 2 reference when pressed a second time the PID is excluded and it is possible to modify the speed reference By using the A and V keys it is possible to modify the reference displayed on the fourth line of the keypad page 2 65 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 10 4 List of Parameters from P264 to P269 Table 7 List of Parameters P264 P269 mme rane Roc page mooo speede P264 Keypad navigation 0 By Menu Range 1 Only modified 2 Linear eo By Meno ADVANCED
100. MENU and CONTROL METHOD MENU 3 Check the mechanical load 4 Make sure that the encoder works properly check its mechanical connection to the motor and check that the encoder signal cables are properly connected to the terminals Event 302 317 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS 2 PROGRAMMING A081 Keypad Watchdog Description Event Watchdog for communication with the keypad Communication failed when the keypad was enabled as a reference source or a command source or when it was in local mode Watchdog time is equal to approx 1 6 seconds e Keypad cable disconnected e Failure of one of the two connectors of the keypad Possible e Electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference cause e Keypad failure e Incorrect setting in parameters relating to serial link 1 see SERIAL LINKS MENU 1 Check the connection of the keypad cable 2 Make sure that the keypad cable connectors are intact on both inverter side and keypad side 3 Check communication parameters of serial link 1 Solution A082 Encoder Configuration Description Event Functions programmed for MDI6 and MDI7 or Encoder B selected and encoder board not detected e Encoder A has been selected for soeed measure or as a reference source but different digital command functions are programmed for terminals MDI6 and MDI7 Encoder B has been selected for the speed measure or as a reference source but t
101. Maximum output value obtained in correspondence with the maximum Function value of the variable P195 P200 FOUT output in MDO1 frequency Disabled 0 2 1 Pulse 2 ABS Pulse 10 Default 0 Disabled J Ul 4 UJ NJ Level ADVANCED Selects the operating mode of the FOUT frequency output and any eventual MDO1 settings in the Digital Outputs Menu are ignored P201 FOUT frequency output variable selection When not set to DISABLE the 1 digital output is used as a frequency output 77580 o 40 See Table 19 Default no selection 16 Level ADVANCED 801 Selects the variable to represent on the FOUT frequency 1 P202 FOUT Min value of selected value Function according to Range selection of P201 ace Tapie l 19 1 o Default Level ADVANCED 2 No lo E 802 Minimum value of the selected variable 2 1 129 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P203 FOUT Max value of selected value See Table 19 ESI Function according to selection of P201 Default ADVANCED Maximum value of the selected variable P204 FOUT Output Min value with reference to P202 ESTEE 1000 10000 10 00 100 00 kHz Default 1000 10 00 kHz ADVANCED 304 Minimum output value obtained in correspondence with
102. NO 1 YES EMO ___ BAR ADVANCED Address 941 Se PO68b 1 Yes the PID reference given by UP DOWN from digital signals UP and DOWN or with the and keys on the keypad returns to zero each time the START is removed from the inverter and terminates the deceleration ramp PO68c Reset UP DOWN Speed Torque at source change JONO 1 YES 80 Level ADVANCED 742 Se 8 1 Yes the Speed Torque reference given by UP DOWN from digital signals UP and DOWN or with the A and W keys on the keypad returns to zero each time the command source is changed from Remote to Local and vice versa using the LOC REM key or digital input or when the command source switch is effected using the programmed digital input in C179 MDI for source selection see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Function PO68d Reset UP DOWN PID at source change Range 0 1 __ Level ADVANCED 943 Se 068 1 Yes the PID reference given by UP DOWN from digital signals UP and DOWN or with the A and keys on the keypad returns to zero each time command source is changed from Remote to Local and vice versa using the LOC REM key or digital input or when the command source switch is effected using ihe programmed digital input in C179 MDI for source selection see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Function 98 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z LETTRONICA
103. Output Frequency 10000 1000 0 Hz see Table 41 Always active THEE 1656 ases This is the measure of the voltage frequency output of the inverter 42 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 7 Torque Reference at Constant Speed Nm 3200 Nm Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 C090 CO091 Motor 2 C133 C134 Motor 3 Active Active only when a torque reference is used for the selected motor Address 1660 Range This is the measure of the torque reference required at constant speed and expressed Function as percentage of the motor rated torque M008 Torque Demand Nm 32000 Nm Note The actual range depends on the rated torque and the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 CO048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C134 Motor 3 Active for and FOC controls only INR 1658 With speed control Torque demand of the speed regulator for the type of control used With torque control Torque reference processed with respect to the preset torque ramp time 32000 Function M009 Torque Generated by the Motor Nm Range 32000 32000 Nm Active Active for VTC and FOC controls only Dee MEM 1059 value of the torque produced by the connected motor Torque Reference at Constant Rp
104. Speed Feedback from Encoder R 0 No 1 Yes Default Level BASIC 1012 Address 1055 1098 Control VTC and FOC This parameter enables the encoder as a speed feedback Function It defines the encoder characteristics and whether Encoder A MDI6 and MDI7 in the terminal board or Encoder B with optional board is used as speed feedback see ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU C013 C056 C099 Type of V f pattern of motor Constant Torque 1 Quadratic E 5 Free Setting Default o Constant Torque Level BASIC 0770 1013 1056 1099 err Selects from different types of With C013 56 99 Constant torque it is possible to set only the voltage at zero frequency preboost C034 CO77 C120 With C013 56 99 Quadratic it is possible to set the voltage at zero frequency preboost C034 077 120 the maximum reduction in voltage with respect to the theoretical V f pattern C032 C075 C118 and the frequency to which it has to be realised C033 C076 C119 With CO13 56 99 Free Setting it is possible to set the voltage at zero frequency preboost CO34 CO77 C120 increase voltage to 20 of the rated frequency BoostO C035 C078 C121 and increase voltage to a programmed frequency Boost C036 C079 C122 frequency for Boost C037 C080 C123 C015 C058 C101 Motor rated frequency 10 10000 1 0 Hz 1000 0
105. Speed reference from FIELD BUS integer portion 32000 NOTE A Speed reference from FIELD rpm BUS decimal portion Torque reference 5000 Torque limit NOTE C 10000 10000 M035 Digital Inputs from FIELD BUS ___ NOTE D Commando for Digital _ Analog Output 1 controlled grapes _ Analog Output 2 controlled ERR 2 NN _ Analog Output 3 controlled 9 j Moree tiie ieee nown gt _ NOTE A The speed reference from the FIELD BUS is obtained by adding the decimal portion 100 to the integer portion Example M042 210 43 50 speed 210 50 rpm This value is included in the global speed reference of the inverter measure along with the other reference sources if at least one of the parameters C143 C146 is set as 6 FieldBus NOTE B The decimal portion is the high byte of the word NOTE C The torque reference from the FIELD BUS is significant if at least one of the parameters C143 C146 is set as 6 FieldBus and if the type of reference of the active motor parameters 11 054 097 is set as 1 Torque or if the inverter is in slave mode from digital input The torque limit from the FIELD BUS is significant if parameter C147 is set as 6 FieldBus 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 4l 42
106. Using the MENU Key The MENU key makes it possible to scroll through the internal menus whilst from the Root page it is possible to scroll to the Keypad pages Root page NV E RT ER 0 16 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 1 7 ESC Key contemporary use of the A and Keys The contemporary pressing of the and keys performs the same function as pressing the ESC key and makes it possible to move up one level in the menu tree In the following example starting from the C015 parameter of the First Motor Submenu inside the Configuration Menu it is possible to move up to the Root page by using the ESC key or by pressing the and keys simultaneously Page C015 Parameter of Configuration Menu Motor 1 NOMI NA When altering a parameter using the SAVE ENTER key that has more fields of application for this reason the signal gt appears on the display in correspondence to the ESC key the ESC key is used to move the alteration 10 to subsequent field in the following example P269 has 2 programmable fields p XL ll 1 13 l4 15 16 1 18 To quit the last page shown in the example use 19 e ESC without saving in eeprom e SAVE ENTER to save in eeprom 2 21 17 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 1 8 RESET Key reset alarms and control board The R
107. a fan failure is detected the corresponding alarm will go off e Activation of the fans managed by the state of the thermoswitch detected by the control board N An NTC temperature sensor manages the functioning of the fans the temperature is measured by the ES821 board and the fan threshold activation is defined by parameter C264 Application This screen displays the type of application uploaded on the inverter e g Multi pump Regenerative etc See the Elettronica Santerno Software Accessories Catalogue For the application software downloading instructions see the Applications Manual SW Versions SW versions Function This screen displays the SW versions programmed on the inverter Texas SW version of the DSP Texas module MMI SW version of the display keyboard man machine interface Motorola SW version of the Motorola microprocessor Service Times This screen displays the ST supply time activation times and the OT operation time Operation time means the activation time of the inverter s IGBT Service times screen 60 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Serial Number Serial Number Function Fire Mode enabling Password Function Manufacturer The serial number of the inverter To gain access to the Fire Mode enabling password contact Elettronica Santerno customer service with the Seria
108. acceleration time ADVANCED ADVANCED P031 ADVANCED P032 Fire Mode Ramp acceleration time ENGINEERING P033 Fire Mode Ramp deceleration time ENGINEERING 9 Speed Ramp 1 Acceleration Time 1 2 3 4 5 9 Q 0 327 00 sif 14 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if PO14 0 0 1 5 0 32700 s if P01420 1 5 0 327000 s if 14 0 gt 10 5 Default 10 sec Level BASIC Range 0 32700 Address 609 Determines the time the reference takes to go from O rpm to the max preset speed considering the max value between absolute values for max speed and min speed set for the selected motor If S ramps are used the actual time the reference takes to reach constant rom exceeds the time set in POO9 for a percentage equal to P022 023 2 Function 20 21 75 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 10 Speed Ramp 1 Deceleration Time 0 327 00 s if 14 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if P014 0 gt 0 1 s 0 32700 s if P014 0 gt 1 5 0 3270005 if 14 0 10 5 Default 10 sec Level BASIC Range 0 32700 Address 1610 Determines the time the reference takes to go from the max preset speed considering the max value between absolute values for max speed and min Function speed set for the selected motor to zero rpm If S ramps are used the actual time the reference takes to reach speed exceeds the time set in PO10 for a percentage equal t
109. analog input see Installation Manual 2 Make sure the SW1 hardware switch the is correctly set Motor speed measure error During the encoder tune a speed error measure occurred with respect to the estimated speed although the sign of the measured speed is consistent with the estimated speed e Incorrect parameterization of the encoder concerning the type and number of pulses rev e Voltage removed from one of the two encoders e Incorrect mounting of the encoders e Encoder failure 1 Check that the encoder parameters are correct see ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 2 Check that both encoders are properly connected 3 Check mounting of the encoders 4 Check that the encoder signals are correct SINUS PENTA 2 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A060 No current fault FOC Error detected in FOC control by the current loop exceeds the max Description allowable value Event The FOC control detected a current regulation error One motor cable is disconnected Possible D e Failure in the current measure circuit e Wrong setting of current regulator parameters for control 1 Check motor connections terminals U V W 2 Check parameterization of current regulators for FOC control see FOC REGULATORS MENU Perform a new current regulator autotune see AUTOTUNE MENU 3 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service Solution A061 A062
110. and RESET functions are always enabled on terminals MDI2 and Table 55 Remote command inputs Serial 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 Remote virtual terminal board Bit input 1 for 8 bits 3 1 bid Mi deii from serial link corresponding to MDIT1 MDI8 Example 32 33 By setting C140 3 Field bus and C141 2 Serial link the ENABLE command is sent by closing terminal MDI2 on the terminal board and AND by forcing bit MDI2 from the serial link on input 1019 address MODBUS 1406 34 and bit MDI2 from Field Bus see FIELD BUS CONFIGURATION MENU The START command may also be sent OR by forcing bit MDI1 from serial link on input 1019 or by forcing bit MDI1 from Field Bus on the relative variable 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 205 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 27 1 2 SPEED TORQUE REFERENCE SOURCES The main reference is the value at constant speed to be attained by the controlled variable speed or torque MOOO M007 required from the inverter This reference is acquired by the inverter only if the START command and the ENABLE commands are active otherwise it Is ignored When the main reference is acquired by the inverter START and ENABLE are active it becomes the input signal managed by the time ramp functions that generate the speed torque reference setpoint for the connected motor The speed or torque references may c
111. and the speed error exceeds the speed threshold C193 this parameter determines the error threshold for the speed error timeout Even if the alarm speed is disabled time set in C192 and error threshold set in C193 are used for a speed searching error to digital outputs set with BRAKE or LIFT mode Digital outputs are then disabled Function C194 Speed Error Enabling 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default 1 Enabled BAR ENGINEERING ENSE 1194 Range 1 INSTRUCTIONS 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 Function This parameter enables the speed error alarm C195 Filter Time Constant over Value of Feedback from Encoder 095 __ Range Default Level Address Function 5 3000 0 ms 50 5 0 ms ENGINEERING 1195 This parameter defines the time constant used for filtering the reading of the encoder used as a speed feedback C196 Filter Time Constant over Value of Reference from Encoder C9 _ Range Default E Address Function 5 3000 0 ms 5 0 ms ENGINEERING 1196 This parameter defines the time constant used for filtering the reading of the encoder used as a reference C197 Number of Channels of Encoder A 0 2 Squaring Channels Default Level Address Function ____________ 0 2 Squaring Channel ENGINEERING 1197 This parameter defines the number of channels used for encoder A reading Factory sett
112. but as pushbutton see 180 The LOC REM key is not operating if a digital input is configured as Loc Rem and as a switch see 180 By using the C148 programming we can determine if the passage from the Remote to Local mode and vice versa may be effected only with the inverter disabled or not It is also possible to determine if in the passage from remote to local the running status but not the reference remains unaltered bumpless commands or if both are preserved all bumpless For a more detailed explanation refer to the description for C148 see CONTROL METHOD MENU When in the LOCAL mode indicated by the L CMD and L REF leds for which the commands and references of the inverter are displayed by the display keypad the Keypad page is used to vary the reference by using the A and V keys see P266 in DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU When not in the LOCAL mode the Keypad pages can be accessed via the Root page by using the MENU key and only the keypad pages with references from which amongst the sources the Keypad has been selected will be displayed in addition to the measures Keypad page For example if the parameter Selection reference torque limit C147 Keypad from the Root page by pressing the MENU key the measures only keypad page will be displayed When pressing this key again the Keypad page of the torque limit where it is possible to alter the torque limit reference is displayed using the A and keys measures contain
113. cannot occur C008 xT Regen where x can be 2 4 5 or 6 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 253 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C226 Power Down Enabling Delay 1 250 1 250 ms Default 10 ms Level ENGINEERING Address 1226 This parameter determines the Power Down delay after a mains loss is detected by the inverter When Power Down is disabled C225 Disable and the mains loss alarm is enabled C233 Yes the Power Down enabling delay is applied to the alarm trip Function AN NOTE To delay excessively the power down during a mains loss can use the inverter switch off C227 Stop Ramp Time in Power Down Range 1432000 1 32000 sec Default 20 sec Level ENGINEERING Address 1227 Determines the gradient of the deceleration ramp occurring at Power Down after the first extra deceleration stage if C225 Yes Control algorithm IFD C227 is the basic gradient for deceleration adjustment when C225 Yes V Function C228 Start Increment of Ramp Gradient in Power Down _ Range 1 00 100 00 Default 0 1096 Level ENGINEERING Address 1228 Determines an increase in deceleration ramp gradient at the beginning of the Power Down function This is required to increase DC bus voltage C228 0 start deceleration is due to C227 C228 has no effect C228 100 start deceleration is
114. concerned Access the Configuration motor 1 menu and set the motor ratings as follows control algorithm Voltage frequency C015 rated frequency C016 1 rated rpm 17 Pmot1 rated power 18 rated current C019 Vmot1 rated voltage C029 1 max speed desired If the no load current of the motor is known 21 lo set the value of lo expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current If the no load current of the motor is not known but the motor can run without load start the motor at its rated speed read the current value detected by the inverter parameter M026 in the Motor Measures Menu and use it as the first attempt value for lo If the no load current of the motor is not known and the motor cannot run in no load conditions use a first attempt value for lo that is automatically computed by the inverter as described in step 7 NOTE everytime the autotune described in step 7 is done with parameter no load current CO21 lo 0 the inverter will set automatically a value according to the motor rating Once a no load current value is entered in C021 the value of the parameter relating to mutual inductance C024 will be automatically computed when parameters 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 1 FOC Auto no rotation are set up as for current autotune CO24 is computed even if no autotune procedure occurs Also set C022 res
115. controlling automatic D deceleration in case of Power Down C225 Yes V C232 Integral time Pl of automatic deceleration 0 001 31 999 sec IE 22000 32000 Disabled Default 500 0 5 sec Level ENGINEERING Nee EM 232 Integral time used in PI regulator controlling automatic deceleration in Function case of Power Down C225 Yes V 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 255 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO C234 Ramp action at the end of Power Down 0 Stop 0 2 1 Stand by 2 Dcb Default o 0 5 ENGINEERING Address 1234 When the motor speed during Power Down attains the Power Down end value set in C235 three operating modes are possible depending on C234 programming Stop regardless of the speed value set in C235 if the inverter is capable of bearing DC bus voltage it will control the motor until it stops If power supply is restored when the deceleration ramp is over the RUN command must be disabled and enabled again to accelerate the motor If power supply is restored when the motor is still decelerating the speed of reference is imposed to the motor with the preset acceleration ramp Ramp action at the end of Power Down Stand by When decelerating once the speed value set in C235 is Function attained the inverter is put in stand by and the motor k
116. d eR EE nalis ra Sad Eos daa eb rear Isai sa oiu 158 Table 38 List of Parameters P330 P331 sessssssssssesssesseeseeneee eee mee nen hee ns thee es tesi ee tee nee res tenter nens 168 Table 39 Programmable Motor Tune FUncllons iso eet ERE RENE RES ESAE ERR EP EX X TYPE DERE VR SERE IEEE 170 Table 40 List Gt Parameters 074 171 Table 41 Max Output Frequency Depending on the Inverter Size ccc cece ccceecceeeeeeeeeceeeccaeeeeecceeceueceeceeecseeeeaeceneeees 173 Table 42 Liot Parameters 176 Table 43 Default Values and Max Values of the Carrier Frequency Depending on the Inverter 1 176 Table 44 Description of the Parameters Classified by Motor 179 ___ LAMP D OP D IE 180 Table 46 Parameters of the Equivalent Circuit of the Asynchronous Machine eee 180 Table 47 Motor Parameters Used by Control Algorithms eese enne enn enn enne eene 181 Table 48 IFD Control Parameters for the Connected eene nnne 183 Table 49 Parameters for Slip Compensation IFD
117. direction 277 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO C301 Pretensioning Time 32000 32000 ms Default 0 Level ENGINEERING Address 1301 Delay time passing between the start command and the speed ramp Function start During this time the motor torque output is set in C300 to keep the load suspended Disable MDI1 START MDI2 ENABLE MDI3 RESET MDI4 MDI5 C302 Closed Brake Input contact NO MDI6 MDI7 MDI8 II E Default Disable Level ENGINEERING Address 1301 This parameter determines the digital input assigned to the mechanical brake closing feedback contact NO closed only when brake is engaged When the brake closing is detected after a deceleration ramp current required for motor fluxing is injected into the motor If no digital input is available for the Function detection of the brake closing set max time in C183 in order to avoid injecting current into the motor after the deceleration ramp When the motor is not running the START command is disabled and the speed setpoint is at zero for a longer time longer than that set in C183 the inverter will be put on standby 278 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 38 SERIAL LINKS MENU 38 1 Overview Please refer to the Sinus Penta Installation Manual for the
118. each time a new parameter is set First remove the ENABLE command then access the Autotune Menu and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 All Auto no rotation Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and wait until tune is completed Warning W32 Open Enable is displayed The inverter has computed and saved the values for C022 and C023 If alarm A097 Motor Wires trips check the motor wiring If alarm A065 Autotune trips this means that the ENABLE command has opened before autotune was complete In this case reset the drive sending a command of terminal MDI3 or press the RESET key in the display keypad and repeat the autotune procedure Set parameter C048 Motor 1 Limits submenu depending on the maximum torque that can be generated expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque Activate the ENABLE input terminal 15 and the START input terminal 14 and send a speed reference The RUN LED and REF LED will come on and the motor will start Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction If not operate on input MDI5 terminal 18 which is factory set to CW CCW or open the START and ENABLE inputs Shut off the inverter wait at least 5 minutes and reverse two of the motor phases If an overshoot occurs when the speed setpoint is reached or if a system instability is detected uneven motor operation adjust the parameters relating to the speed loop Speed loop and current balanci
119. er MENT X E __ __ 2 7 37 2 List of Parameters from C300 to 2 2 7 38 _______ NRA 279 38 1 279 38 1 1 MVC Cl OG ________ _______ 279 38 1 2 PECA COGS esas EE T TT TT TT TT 280 38 2 List of Parameters from 0001 to ee me e eme e hehe me se eese sese see ise ee esee ee eese eene 280 39 FIELD BUS CONFIGURATION MENU cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccceccs 284 39 1 GUI M E EE 284 39 2 List or Parameters trom ROT to EE Rev Ea puae Foro UE TC vl 284 29 9 EXCHANGED PARAMETERS 4 eettete t inMein in EREE eU Enim Leite tt np RE E EE et 285 32 3 1 From Master To Sin s Pelei _ Gases 285 39 9 42 From mus Penta 287 39 4 ALARM A070 COMMUNICATIONS 505 nenne nennen nennen nenas 288 40 EEPROM MENU M 289 40 1 GE ______ ____________ _ nteet 289 a 0 290 40 2 1 EEPROM
120. for the analog input P081 P083 85 are the steps depending on the selected multispeed for digital inputs MDI4 MDI5 l 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 ll 1 13 l4 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 29 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 5 3 Configuring an External Torque Limit Settin 2000 Writing Enabling Selecting the Reference 1 Eng Access Level Source The Control Method menu contains parameter C147 for the selection of the torque limit source Forcing the Reference Sources Sources Sources REF Analog Input Ref Serial Link Reference from serial link AINT Analog Input AINT Field Bus Reference from field bus AIN2 Analog Input AIN2 Keypad Ref from display keypad Pulse Input Frequency Input MDI8 Encoder Encoder Input The reference scaling is obtained through the parameters included in the Reference menu Each No reference scaling is required References are source is assigned to a parameter setting its min expressed as a percentage of the motor rated value and max value for the min max torque of torque Saturation of the reference values the motor e g Motor 1 C047 for min torque depends on min max torque parameters e g C048 for max torque Motor 1 C047 for min torque C048 for max torque The torque ramp set in parameters PO26 PO27 of the Ramps menu is assigned to the limit torque The torque ramp set in parameters 26 P027 referen
121. greater than Vdc max A050 IGBT FAULT A Hardware Fault from Convertor IGBT side A A051 OVERLOAD HW A Overload Hardware side A When in Fire Mode an infinite number of alarm autoresets are automatically enabled The signal with the letters INVERTER OK on the display will cause a decay in the guarantee of the product N WARNING This asterisk appears when at least once during functioning in the Fire Mode an 16 alarm that might be damaging for the integrity of the drive was ignored 20 21 25 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES 5 1 Overview This section illustrates some programming examples for particular functions of the inverter Flowcharts are used for easier reference For any detail concerning individual parameters see the relevant explanations in the sections dedicated to each menu of the Programming Instructions 5 2 Reference Programming Speed Torque Reference PID Reference Feedback Speed PID Ref Fdb torque Flowchart B Flowchart A 26 317 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS FLOWCHART A Setting POOO Writing Enabling POO1 Eng Access Level In the Configuration Motor 1 menu select the type of speed torque reference C011 The Control Method menu includes the parameters for selecting the reference source You can set up to four sources which are sum
122. in correspondence to the change in gradient is the value set for the deceleration starting stage If parameter is set to No acceleration is brought to zero before the speed reference starts decreasing then deceleration begins with the preset pattern Figure 6 Speed Profile with Acceleration Reset Yes to No Example 74 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN 11 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE TORQUE RAMPS If the control algorithm is VTC or FOC and if it is controlled by setting Torque C011 for motor 1 C054 for motor 2 and C097 for motor 3 respectively the reference is ramped based on the values set in parameter PO26 torque increase ramp time P027 torque decrease ramp time and P028 unit of measure for the ramp times The ramp up time setting is the time the output torque reference takes to go from to the max value as an absolute value between Torque min and Torque max of the selected motor C047 C048 for motor 1 and so on 11 2 List of Parameters from P009 to P033 Table 10 List of Parameters POO9 P009 Speed ramp 1 acceleration time BASIC 10s 60 ADVANCED ADVANCED P014 Speed ramps land 2 time unit of measure ADVANCED 0 1 5 614 Speed ramp 3 acceleration time ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED ADVANCED P028 Unit of measure for torque ramp time ADVANCED 10 1 5 628 ramp
123. in order to enable the RUN command the main speed reference must not be zero When START is inactive even when ENABLE is active RUN is disabled the reference is set to zero and the speed or torque setpoint decreases down to zero depending on the preset deceleration ramp The way the START enables or disables the RUN command also depends on the setup of other functions in particular the STOP REVERSE and JOG functions see parameters C150 C151 C169 If the REVERSE C15120 function is enabled it can enable disable the RUN command If however the START and REVERSE commands are both active the RUN command is disabled AN NOTE In this case START is interpreted as FORWARD and REVERSE as REVERSE When both Start and Reverse are active the system cannot interpret the query to be FORWARD or REVERSE If the JOG function is enabled C169 0 it can enable disable the RUN command but only if the RUN command has not been previously enabled by other functions If the STOP function is enabled C15020 the RUN command may enabled disabled only by pressing the relative key see descriptions of the STOP function C150 NOTE If only the keypad is enabled as the command source press the START key on the keypad to enable the inverter RUN and press the STOP key to disable the inverter RUN By setting C185 Free Wheel when activating the start command the inverter will not carry NOTE out the deceleration ramp and goes into sta
124. loss 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DCB MANUAL DC Braking at starting LIMIT IN ACCEL Current torque limit in acceleration LIMIT IN DECEL Current torque limit in deceleration LIMIT IN CONSTANT RPM BRAKING Start up braking module or extend deceleration ramp CONSTANT RUN Inverter running with speed set point reached IN ACCELERATION Inverter running with motor in acceleration stage IN DECELERATION Inverter running with motor in deceleration stage INVERTER OK Inverter on Stand by with no alarms tripped FLUXING MOTOR FLUXED Motor fluxed FIRE MODE RUN Constant rpm in Fire Mode FIRE MODE ACCEL Acceleration in Fire Mode FIRE MODE DECEL Deceleration in Fire Mode Inverter on Stand by with no alarms tripped however with no guarantee due to alarm trip in Fire Mode REF min DISAB Inverter disabled for REF Min Inverter enabled with IFD control Watting for reference in order to start Inverter enabled with IFD control Waiting for START in order to start DISABLE NO START During fluxing the RUN command was not given within the max time set in C183 The inverter remains disabled until the RUN command is given 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 309 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 42 USER PARAMETERS LIST DIFFERENT FROM THE DEFAULT Use thi
125. only if the min and max error thresholds are different P130 z P131 for Motor1 P140 z P141 for Motor2 P150 P151 for Motors P130 P140 P150 Min Error Threshold 0 32000 0 00 320 00 Default 1 00 Level BASIC Address 730 740 750 Control VTC and FOC This parameter determines the min error threshold Function In case of speed errors lower than or equal to the min threshold parameters P126 and P128 will be used P131 P141 P151 Max Error Threshold Range 0 32000 0 00 320 00 Default 1 00 Level BASIC Address 731 741 751 Control VTC and FOC This parameter determines the max error threshold Function If P130 P131 or in case of speed errors greater than or equal to the max threshold parameters P125 and P129 will be used Function P152 Symmetry regulation of three phase current Range 100 Default Level ENGINEERING Address 752 Influences on the balancing of the three phase current be used in cases where there is dissymmetry of motor currents that is especially evident in no load current and low speeds 110 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETIRONICASANTERN 17 FOC REGULATORS MENU 17 1 Overview AY NOTE Please refer to Motor Control section as well This menu may be accessed only if the FOC control is programmed for one of the NOTE connected motors 010 2 for motor n 1 CO53 2 for motor n 2 096 2 for motor n 3
126. overcurrent Excessive carrier frequency for the application required IFD control only Check ambient temperature Check motor current IFD control decrease IGBT carrier frequency see CARRIER FREQUENCY MENU Fan alarm Power heatsink overheated with fan locked or disconnected or faulty see also A094 and A099 Fan locked or disconnected or faulty Replace fan 304 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A097 Motor Cables KO Description Event Possible cause Solution A098 Illegal Motor Possible cause Solution Description Possible cause Solution A100 MDI Illegal Configuration Description Event Possible cause Solution Motor not connected This protection trips during autotune or DC Brake if the motor is not connected to the inverter or if its current value is not compatible with the inverter size e One cable of the motor is disconnected e The motor size is too small if compared to the inverter size 1 Check that motor cables are properly connected to terminals U V W 2 Check the motor parameters perform autotune procedure again VTC and FOC controls A disabled motor has been selected e Motor 2 is enabled but only 1 motor can be enabled 009 1 see MOTOR CONTROL MENU e Motor is enabled but only 1 2 motors be enabled 009 1 or 2 see MOTOR CONTROL MENU e Incorrect setting in parameter 009 e Incorre
127. protection condition it is possible to change the password memorized in 2 AN NOTE It is recommended to note and keep the value of P002 To make alterations press the SAVE ENTER key when a flashing cursor appears press and V to change the parameter value Use one of the following operations to quit the editing mode Press ESC the parameter value used by the inverter is altered and is maintained until the inverter is shut down Press SAVE ENTER the parameter value is stored to non volatile memory and is not deleted when the inverter is shut down Inputs lxxx cannot be saved to non volatile memory and are automatically set to their default values after they have performed their function l 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 Parameters Rxxx become active only when the inverter control board has been reset by pressing the RESET key for a few seconds or by switching off the inverter 10 1 5 Programming the Startup Page The factory settings of the Startup Page of the display keypad that is displayed when the inverter is switched on show the Root page from where it is possible to access the various menus Measure Parameters Configuration Product ID or shift to the Keypad pages using the MENU key 13 Root page It is possible to customise the Startup Page by using parameter P265 see DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU 16 1 18 19 20 21 15 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 1 6
128. speed C029 Example 1200 120 096 33 FIELD BUS For a description of the Field Bus source see FIELD BUS CONFIGURATION MENU 34 KEYPAD 3 5 The keypad is a particular reference source The keypad reference may be modified with the keys A and V only if this reference is on a Keypad page where 36 there is a reference on the fourth line If the keypad is enabled it is possible to add a variation to the active reference by way of an algebraic sum calculated by processing the other reference sources that 3 AN NOTE are activated at that moment The reference variation method can be selected with parameters P067 PO68 P069 and C163 39 This function is the same as the UP and DOWN functions from the terminal board see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU C161 and C162 and PO68 P069 in the INPUT REFERENCES MENU 39 The LOCAL mode that can be enabled with the LOC REM key on the keypad or with the LOCAL command function from terminal board see C180 forces the 4 keypad to become the only command and reference source thus ignoring the values set in parameters C143 C144 C145 C146 ENCODER 4 1 The Encoder source is an encoder input it can come from the terminal board terminals MDI6 MDI7 Encoder A or from the optional encoder board Encoder B see ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU It 4 2 generates a reference resulting from the correct setting of the relevant parameters P073 P074 allowing the relevant scaling see INPUT REFERENCES ME
129. the logic function accomplished by the inverter for the terminals of all active command sources is the following e AND for terminals where the functions ENABLE ENABLE S External Alarms no 1 no 2 no 3 are programmed e OR for all other terminals 204 317 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE gt PPS If the keypad is enabled as a command source the START STOP RESET FWD REV LOC REM functions are enabled to disable FWD REV LOC REM see parameter P269 The keypad is ignored for the processing of logic functions AND OR of the other command sources that are enabled at that moment As the ENABLE command of the hardware terminal board is a hardware safety device it enables the inverter it is always active even when none of the parameters C140 C141 or C142 selects the terminal board 1 The commands for the External Alarm no 1 no 2 no 3 functions are always and only considered on the inverter terminal board The LOCAL mode that can be enabled with the LOC REM key on the keypad or with the LOCAL command function from the terminal board see C180 forces keypad as the only command source thus ignoring the values set in parameters C140 C141 C142 In this case the following functions are in any case enabled on the hardware terminal board External Alarm 1 no 2 no 3 Motor Sel no 2 Motor Sel no 3 SLAVE PID Disable LOCAL and the ENABLE
130. the setting CAUTION in P0O2 It is strongly advised to take note and conserve the password Condition for modifying the C parameters 11 12 O Only on stand 1 StandBy Fluxing 13 14 15 16 CAUTION With POO3 1 StandBy Fluxing when a type C parameter has to be modified the 1 inverter is automatically disabled and it stops modulating and the motor is left idle Default 1 StandBy Fluxing Level ADVANCED e 509 The type C parameters with the factory settings may be only programmed when the motor is stopped by setting POO3 0 Only on stand by it is possible to modify them when the inverter is disabled 18 19 20 21 63 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 10 DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU 10 1 Overview It is important to read the Operating and Remoting the Keypad section in the Sinus Penta Installation Manual The Display Keypad Menu contains the parameters for the programming of e navigating in the inverter menus selecting the startup page selecting the measures of the root page and the keypad page the type of keypad page displayed in the local mode the customised PID unit of measures disabling the LOC REM or Fwd Rew keys in the keypad To follow is an outline of the Root Page the Keypad and the Local Mode page 10 2 The Root Page NV ER TER E 1500 00 r p 00 r p m M E A PAR
131. when the DCB At Start Function is active tor the Vector Torque control 244 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERN 31 1 2 DC BRAKING AT STOP 22 To activate this function set C215 to YES or in Power Down mode set C234 Power Down Stop Mode as DCB 2 3 DC Braking occurs after sending a stop with ramp command The speed level for DC Braking is set in C219 If the inverter is in Power Down mode and C234 is set as DCB the speed level is set in C235 Power Down Stop 2 Level 4 The figure below illustrates the output speed and DC Braking trends when the DC Braking at Stop function is active Parameters used to program this function are the following 2 D C215 function enabling C217 braking duration 2 6 C219 motor speed at the beginning of DC Braking C220 intensity of DC braking 2 In Power Down mode if C234 Power Down Stop Mode is set as DCB C235 motor speed at the beginning of DC Braking 20 f C220 29 30 DCB Speed Level 32 33 OFF 34 35 Motor speed and DC Braking trends when the DC BRAKING AT STOP function is active 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 Figure 41 DCB at Stop 245 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 31 1 3 DC BRAKING COMMAND SENT FROM TERMINAL BOARD Activate the digital input set as DCB C160 to send a DC Braking command DC Braking duration is determined by the following formula
132. 0 Default A51 Speed MEA Level ADVANCED Address 872 11 12 P272 MDO1 Selecting Variable 13 14 5 This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output MDO1 selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input 16 MDOI if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 30 1 18 19 20 159 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P273 MDOI Testing Variable oes eS fe Default ADVANCED 55 373 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P271 unction using P275 as a comparing value P274 MDOI Testing Variable B NI 0 gt gt IA IV to V N BAR ADVANCED NEES 874 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P272 Function using P276 as a comparing value P275 MDO1 Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 320 00 96 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table 30 Default 50 rpm Level ADVANCED Address 875 aa This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test A P276 MDO1 Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 320 00 96 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected varia
133. 0 Level ENGINEERING Address 816 This parameter determines T1 enabling time With P226 or P227 if timer 1 is assigned to a digital input having a particular function this parameter represents the delay occurring between the input closing and the function activation Use P228 to assign timer 1 to a digital output in this case the digital input energizing will be delayed according to the time set in P216 3 Function P217 TI Disabling delay Range O 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec 0 0 ENGINEERING Address 817 This parameter determines T1 disabling time 16 With P226 or P227 if timer 1 is assigned to a digital input having a particular function this parameter represents the delay occurring between Function m the input closing and the function deactivation 17 Use P228 to assign timer 1 to a digital output in that case the digital input de energizing will be delayed according to the time set in P217 P218 T2 Enabling delay 18 Range O 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec Deft E Level ENGINEERING Address 818 19 This parameter determines T2 enabling time Operation as per P216 2 1 133 317 Function SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P219 T2 Disabling delay Range 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec Default 0 0 Level ENGINEERING Address 819 This parameter determines T2 disabling time Operation as per P217 Function P220 T3 Ena
134. 0 EE Level BASIC C267 ADVANCED C270 C273 Address 1267 1270 1273 Function This parameter determines the thermal time constant of the motor With a constant load function for 5 times this constant the motor reaches a thermal constant 266 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ETIRONICASANTERN 36 PID CONFIGURATION MENU 22 36 1 Overview 23 The Sinus Penta is provided with a PID Proportional Integral Derivative regulator which makes it possible to 24 perform regulation loops such as pressure control delivery control etc without connecting to external auxiliary devices The PID Configuration Menu defines configuration parameters for the PID regulator 2 5 The configuration parameters for the PID regulator can be modified only when the inverter is on stand by and set the following variables reference sources feedback sources and type of PID output implementation The programming parameters for the PID regulator including coefficients of proportional integral and derivative 26 terms output saturation etc are covered in PID PARAMETERS MENU 36 2 Operation and Structure of the PID Regulator 27 Pid Ramps Reference Computing PID PID Reference reference ramps _ gt Regulator o o u 7 Disable inverter if PID Out P237 for a P255 time MDI for PID Disabled st Reference sources selection PID
135. 0025 3 16 0030 3 16 0035 3 16 0038 5 16 515 0040 5 16 0049 5 12 8 0060 5 12 8 0067 5 12 8 0072 5 12 8 0086 5 12 8 0113 3 10 0129 3 10 0150 3 5 0162 3 5 0179 2 4 540 0200 2 4 0216 2 4 540 565 0250 2 4 0312 2 4 550 565 0366 2 4 0399 2 4 0457 2 4 560 565 0524 2 4 0598 2 4 idi 0748 2 4 565 570 0831 2 4 176 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C001 Minimum Carrier Frequency A C NOTE NOTE Pulse Number Range Range ES Addr Control 1 Depending on the inverter model 800 16000 Hz Depending on the inverter model see Table 43 Table 43 800 16000 Depending on the inverter model ENGINEERING 1001 IFD It represents the min value of the modulation frequency being used The min value set in cannot exceed the max value set in 002 Increase the max value in C002 if you need to increase the min value and if C001 equals C002 002 Maximum Carrier Frequenc Range Default Level Addr Control Function BUD 1000 Depending on hel Depending on the inverter size Inverter size see Table 43 Depending on the inverter size Table 43 ENGINEERING 1002 IFD and FOC It represents the max value of the modulation frequency being used As per control the modulation frequency set in 002 is used only if it exceeds the modulation frequency resulting from the following formula Min 8kH
136. 00346 b Rig 1 LOCALE The full processing of the digital inputs also includes the selection of other remote virtual terminal boards see CONTROL METHOD MENU and the possibility of delaying input digital signal enabling disabling by 36 means of software timers see TIMERS MENU According to the above figure the digital input status is displayed in the measures M031 M032 M033 37 measure shows the current status of the 8 inputs on the local terminals hardware on the inverter board 39 On the display keypad the symbol displays the logic levels for terminals for inactive inputs and active inputs are displayed with symbol 39 measure 2 shows the current status of the virtual terminal board obtained by processing all active terminal boards It includes 10 signals with two additional signals with respect to the local hardware 4 terminal board 4l The ENABLE input is obtained with the logic AND of the input signals for terminal MDI2 in all active 4 2 terminal boards e Inputs MDI MDI8 are obtained with the logic OR of the input signals for all active terminals The ENABLE S input is obtained with the logic AND of the terminals selected for this function in all active terminal boards 213 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO e measure 1 is similar to M032 but it displays the status of the terminal board obtained after any eventual delay on t
137. 0x25 96 ASCII Ox5B gt 76 Ox015D255B Level ENGINEERING The 3 characters are coded with 8 bit ASCII 1801 bytes byte 0 1 2 Byte 3 is always 0x01 The P267a parameter is displayed only if P267 O Disabled and in this condition it is the unit of measure that is actually displayed in M023 M024 With this parameter it is possible to define a 3 character string that is used for displaying the units of measure for the PID measures MO23 24 The change is made on the individual character that are modified using the SAVE ENTER key the cursor will flash in front of the character on the left by pressing the keys A and it will be possible to scroll though all the characters that can be displayed Once a character has been selected the ESC key moves on to the next character Once the third character has been selected press the SAVE ENTER key to save the parameter Function AN NOTE See also the description of the P257 parameter in the PID PARAMETERS MENU P268 P268a measure n 1 n 2 Root Page MOOO M064 Default P268 M004 Motor Speed 268 Speed Ref Level ADVANCED RIESE Not accessible via serial link The two parameters make it possible to select the two measures displayed Function on the root page from the inverter measures P268b P268c P268d P268e measure n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 keypad page R MOOO M064 P268b
138. 1 Overview The Motor Thermal Protection function protects the motor against overloads Some Sinus Penta models offer the possibility to set the heatsink temperature for the activation of cooling fans relevant parameters are included in the Motor Thermal Protection submenu menu Each connected motor has its own thermal model NOTE If the inverter is used to control only one motor and its control mode is selected through the selection of the different motors the motor thermal protection is ensured by setting PTC protection for all motors For each programmable motor thermal protection can be configured in 5 modes which can be selected with parameter C265 motor 1 C268 motor 2 and C271 motor 3 0 NO NO The Motor Thermal Protection function is disabled factory setting 1 YES No The Motor Thermal Protection function is active with pick up current independent of operating Derated speed Forced The Motor Thermal Protection function is active with pick up current depending on operating in Cooled speed with fan cooled motor de rating 3 YES B Self The Motor Thermal Protection function is active pick up current depends on operating speed and Cooled de rating is suitable for motors having a fan keyed to the shaft 4 PTC Thermoswitch on analog input AIN2 for features see Sinus Penta Installation Instructions manual Heating of a motor where constant current l flows depends on current and time
139. 1 100s _______ 5 7 Reference __ _______ _____ ____ PO50 REF _3 ______ JPOSTHREFMN OVP 52 1OOV PO53 REFOFFS 0000V POS4 TauFiltREF Sms CS 5 _____2 42 ____ 56 ______ _______ __ POSS7 AINIMAX 200mA ____ P058 AINTOFFS 0 000mA 59 Sms o i PO60 AIN2 2 4201 PO I MN2MN OMA 62 2 200mA JPO 3 AN2OFFS PO64 TauFit AIN2 o S5ms PO65 SpdDisab rpm Sf P066 SpdDisabTime Os 67 0 Square o Z P068 U D jP068a U DI SopRs No Z o Z PO68b U D2 StopRs 0 No JPO 8 U DISwRs o O PO 68d U D25wSRes No PO69 U DRone V Uniple P070 JogRf 0 71 1 13 000Hz PO72 PulseMax 100000Hz PO73 ExMin 1500rpm P074 EncMax 1500mm ___ y O _ _ __ O O PO8x P10x Multispeeds _ _____ __ _____ O PresetSpeed S OO rpm 5 2 _________ S 85 ____ S P087 5pdd _________ PO88 pd OO rpm PO89 Spd _________ 9 0 OO rpm S 9 5 0O 00rm __________ 92 5 00 PO93
140. 1500rpm and that digital output MDO2 is used parameters are set as follows Table 36 Parameterization for Example 5 P270 Digital output mode PWM MODE P271 Variable A selection A52 Speed Ref P272 MDO1 Variable B selection P273 MDO1 Testing variable P274 1 Testing variable B P277 Function applied to the result ofthe Parameter P215 in the Analog Outputs Menu sets the frequency of the saw wave i e PWM frequency of the digital output In PWM mode parameter P275 sets the max value peak value of the saw wave while parameter P276 sets the 10 UB WN min value of the saw wave The test selected with P273 is performed between the analog variable selected in P271 and the saw wave Motor Speed rom 3000 1500 ll 1 13 l4 15 16 a _ 17 18 19 20 157 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 21 4 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO SINUS PENTA List of Parameters from P270 to P305 Table 37 List of Parameters P270 P305 P270 MDO I Digital output mode ADVANCED 870 3 ANALOG P271 Selecting variable A ADVANCED 871 A51 MEA Speed P272 Selecting variable B ADVANCED 872 A51 MEA Speed P273 MDOT Testing variable A ADVANCED 873 0 gt 274 Testing variable B ADVANCED 874 3 lt 275 MDO1 Comparing
141. 258 0 Disabled d Mains Loss alarms C255 Autoreset Attempt Number Range 0 100 Default o 0 Level ENGINEERING Dele 1205 If set different from Disable Disable 0 this parameter enables the Autoreset function and sets the max number of reset attempts for a time interval set in C256 If a time equal to the time set in C256 passes starting from the last alarm tripped the autoreset attempt count is reset Function C256 Attempt Counting Reset Time Menem O 1000 0 1000 sec Default 300 sec Level ENGINEERING 1250 Determines the time that passes from the last alarm tripped to reset the autoreset attempt number Function 262 317 SINUS PENTA 2 TRONICA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C257 Alarm Reset at Power On E Disabled 1 Yes SEO O Disabled Level ENGINEERING DE 1257 At power on this parameter enables the automatic reset of the alarms tripped at the inverter power off C258 Enabling Saving Undervoltage and Mains Loss Alarms 02 jO Disobled 1 Yes O Disbled T7399 ENGINEERING NE 1258 This parameter saves Undervoltage and Mains Loss alarms to the fault list 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 263 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 35 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU 35
142. 30 If a digital signal is selected Test B is not performed therefore the comparison value for Test B set with P276 P285 P294 P303 has no meaning 19 This parameter cannot be accessed if the operating mode of the digital output 2 concerned is equal to 3 or 9 Example 1 270 3 270 9 145 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO Table 30 List of the Selectable Digital Signals and Analog Variables Selectable digital signals BOOLEAN D5 FwdRun measured or estimated higher than 0 5 rpm 06 measured or estimated lower than 0 5 rpm D10 Prec Ok Capacitor Precharge relay closing 019 MDI7 digital input MDI7 remote OR physical D22 MDI ENABLE S Selected digital input ENABLE S remote AND physical D23 MDI 1 DL Digital input remote OR physical DELAYED by timers D24 MDI 2 DL Digital input MDI2 remote OR physical DELAYED by timers MDI D26 MDI 4 DL Digital input MDIA remote OR physical DELAYED by timers MDI Digital input MDI7 remote OR physical DELAYED by timers MDI Digital input ENABLE remote AND physical DELAYED by timers MDI D41 Reseved 042 D43 Reseved D44 Reseved S D45 Reseved D4 Reseved ___ eee lt D47 Reserved D48 Reserved D49 Reserved 146 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INST
143. 33 and 039 is to download relative software for the inverter flash memory Before resetting an alarm deactivate the ENABLE signal on terminal MDI2 to disable the inverter and prevent the connected motor from running at uncontrolled speed unless parameter C181 1 the Safety Start function is active after resetting an alarm or after supplying the inverter this will start only if the ENABLE contact is open and closed NOTE A CAUTION 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 291 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 41 2 What To Do When an Alarm Trips If a protection trips or the inverter is in emergency condition the inverter is locked and the motor starts idling T CAUTION Before resetting an alarm disable the ENABLE signal on terminal MDI2 to disable the CAUTION inverter and to prevent the connected motor from running at uncontrolled speed Proceed as follows 1 Disable the ENABLE signal on terminal MDI2 to disable the inverter and to lock the motor unless parameter C181 1 the Safety Start function is active after resetting an alarm or after supplying the inverter this will start only if the ENABLE contact is open and closed 2 Ifthe motor is idling wait until it stops Check the TRIP LOG carefully for any information about the alarm tripped in order to determine the cause for the alarm and
144. 35 56 3 38 39 40 4l 42 297 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A053 Not PWONA Description A055 PTC Alarm 298 317 Event Possible cause Solution Description Possible cause Solution Description Possible cause Solution Description Possible cause Solution SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO Hardware failure IGBT A power on failure IGBT A power on controlled by Motorola microcontroller has failed Control board failure 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET signal 2 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service External PTC resistor tripped Detected the opening of the PTC connected to the AIN2 input R gt 3600 ohm Opening of the PTC due to overheating of the motor e PTC incorrectly connected e Incorrect setting of the SW1 hardware switch on the control board see Installation Manual 1 Allow the motor to cool then reset the alarm 2 Make sure that the PTC is correctly connected to the AIN2 analog input see Installation Manual 3 Make sure the SW1 hardware switch the is correctly set External PTC resistor short circuit Detected the short circuit of the PTC connected to the AIN2 input R lt 10 ohm e Short circuit on the PTC e PTC incorrectly connected e Incorrect setting of the SW1 hardware switch on the control board see Installation Manual 1 Make sure that the PTC is correctly connected to the AIN2
145. 5 2 4 20 mA 0 100 if P055 3 0 0 V 10 0V if 55 3 0 0 200 if 55 4 0 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO55 4 0 20 mA Default 20 0 Level ADVANCED Address O57 This parameter selects the value for input AINT signal for maximum reference or better the reference set in C029 Master mode or in C048 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and C048 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used P058 Value of Offset over input AINT 10 00 V 10 00 V if P055 0 or 3 ome BUM 20 00 mA 420 00 mA if 55 1 2 4 Defoult Level ADVANCED 058 This parameter selects the offset correction value of the analog signal AINT Function that has been measured The value set is added to the signal measured before saturation conversion see Figure 9 P059 Filter time constant over anlaog input AINT SHE O 65000 0 65000ms P059 S Default 5 ms EAR ADVANCED ILES 659 This parameter selects the value of the filter time constant of the first command applied to the input AINT signal when the signal saturation and conversion is over 94 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS PO60 Type of signal over analog input AIN2 0 10 1 20mA Mele MM O 4 2 4 20 3 0 4 0 20 mA ECTE S 2 ADVANCED 660 This par
146. 6 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 C24x Speed Searching C246 tssd 248 15 C245 Enab SpdSch 1 Yes C247 Roate 10 96 C249 SpsSpd 0 Last Speed C25x AutoReset C256 T ResCyc C258 UvMIStore C255 nPulsRes Disable C257 PowOnRes 0 No C26x C27x Thermal Protection C264 FanTemp 50 C C266 ThermCurr M 120 C30x Crane C300 StartTrq 0 0 96 ROOx RO1x Serial Link C265 ThermProt 0 No C267 ThermConstMl 600s C269 ThermCurr 2 120 96 C271 ThermProt 0 No C273 ThermConstM3 600 5 C286 Sel InPID 2 0 Disabled C288 Sel Fdbk 1 3 AIN2 PTC C290 Sel Fdbk 3 PID 0 Disable C292 Der Mode 0 Measure C294 PID Act 1 Reference C301 t StartTrq ROO2 com_answdelay 5 ms ROOT com slaveaddr ROOS3 scO baudrate 38400 bps ROOA 2 ms 4time delay ROO6 parity scO 1 No 2 Stop Bit ROO9 cm1_answdelay 5 ms RO11 2 ms delay RO13 parity scl 1 No 2 Stop Bit RO1O scl baudrate 38400 bps 1 ROO5 ser wdg time 0 0s 1 RO12 sr1_wdg time 0 0s ROO8 cm1_slaveaddr RO1x Field Bus Configuration RO16 fbs_ time O ms RO17b AO2 fb sel 0 No Key parameter depending on the current size parameter depending on the voltage class RO17a AO fb sel 0 No RO17c AO3 fb sel 0 No 315 317 PROGRAMMING 9 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANTERNO 43 INDEX A F LEVEL 62
147. 7 0 limitation active Reference present BRAKE LED Yellow RUN LED Green Motor not powered Normal run Active in alternative DC current brake IGBT braking Ramp extension NM Motor powered but no torque idle Motor powered and running REF ALARM LIMIT BRAKE L CMD LED Commands from sources other than ALARM LED Red Inverter OK Commands from both keypad and another Inverter in alarm TX and RX LEDs Green 7 TX RX ENTER No transfer of parameters in progress 17 n MENLI REM L REF LED Green Download waiting en ee NN Reference from for confirmation sources other ML than keypad Reference from both keypad and another __ source Commands from keypad only Upload waiting INS for confirmation Download of parameters Co from keypad to inverter in progress Upload of parameters from inverter to keypad in progress FWD and REV LEDs FWD REV Total reference 0 Reference from keypad only LED off LED flashing LED on fixed Total reference for speed frequency or torque present _and positive Total reference for speed frequency or torque present ____ and negative
148. 81 PID Operating Made R 5 C292 Quantity Selection to Compute Derivative Term R 5 293 Used as Multiplier for Integral and Derivative Terms R w S C234 PID Operation n Disabled n Disabled 3 n Disable n Disable 2 Compl Cut n Measure Y Reference The PID regulator parameters are defined in the PID Parameters menu below This configuration limits the PID output between and 100 for a proper rotation of the connected pump Set P255 1000 ts if the PID output is equal to the min value for 5 seconds the inverter is put on stand by 5 P236 PID Maximum Output Stic R W 5 P238 Maximum Value of PID Integral Term R 5 239 Value of PID Derivative Term R W 5 P240 Proportional Coefficient Value R W 5 P241 Proportional Term Multiplicative Factor R w 5 P242 Integral Time Multiples of Ts R w S P243 Derivative Time Multiples of mTs R w 5 P244 Cycle Time Ts R 5 P245 FID Reference Min Value R W 5 P245 PID Reference Max value R w 5 P247 FID Feedback Minimum R W 5 P248 PID Feedback Maximum Value R W 5 P248 Reference Ramp UP Acceleration Time R W 5 P250 Reference Ramp DOWN Deceleration Time R S P251 Unit of Measure of Reference Ramp UP OTY R w 5 P252 Start S Curve for PID ramps R w 5
149. 84 Table 85 Table 86 8 317 ELETTRONICASANTERNO List or Parameters 6187 Rose GHO Pi esi Selected Speed eee ee hee hse hee set ese eee eset tee eene Multiramp selection RTT Selected Ramp Motor Soleco ENTIRE RR TT Selection of the Speed Reference Variation Variation of selected Speed Reference List of Parameters C189 199 Codification of C189 Codification of C199 List of Parameters C210 212 5 es esee esee esee esse ee estes es senio List of Parameters C215 C221 Listot Parameters C225 28 255 TT List of Parameters C245 248 eene ene ee ense eese sse esse esse sse es esee esee esse es esee ess e petens etie List Parameters C239 C298 ORE Motor thermal time constant suggested values sssssssessssessssssseeeee eene enn enn enn ee rennen nnns List of Parameters C264 gt C273 EEREN List of Parameters C285 29
150. 9 out oO V out F bl min P2 4 7 11 Wde 12 61 Figure 50 Reference Source and Feedback Source Selection The signals selected in the Sources Vector are to be considered as percentage values therefore analog signals are expressed as a percentage of the preset maximum values and minimum values For example in selecting as a reference source if P052 Ref max 8V and P051 Ref min 3V 100 will be considered when Ref 8V and 100 will be considered when Ref 3V Among the allowable variables for PID feedback it is also possible to select electrical variables lout output current Vout output voltage Pout output power DC bus voltage Their NOTE percentage values relate respectively to rated current values and rated voltage values of the selected motor and to 1500VDC In Local mode if the PID regulator is set as C294 Reference Sum otherwise the voltage sum will be NOTE disabled Reference Source and Feedback selection NOTE Selections 9 11 are available for feedback only 268 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTEONIC ASANTERN A ramp block 3 may be applied to the PID setpoint output of block 1 The processed reference is the one actually 2 2 used by the PID regulator The parameters of the PID reference ramp are illustrated in the figure below The initial rounding off is applied to the reference whenever a new
151. 90 using P294 as a comparing value 164 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P293 MDO3 Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 9 320 00 96 96 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table 30 32000 32000 ADVANCED 393 aUis This parameter defines the comparing value with the variable selected for test A P294 MDO3 Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 96 320 00 96 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable B see Table 30 Default Level ADVANCED e 394 aei This parameter defines the comparing value with the variable selected for test B P295 MDOS3 Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests 00 O Ul 4 UJ NJ Default A Level ADVANCED 395 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests to calculate the output value 13 P296 MDO3 Output Logic Level FALSE l4 Default 1 TRUE Level ADVANCED Address 896 16 Digital output logic function MDO3 to apply a logic reversal negation to aaa the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 17 TRUE no negation is applied 0 OR 8 1 A SET B RESET 2 A AND B 3 A XOR B 10 4 NOR B 5 A ME Function 165 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P297 MDOA Digital
152. A PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETIRONICASANTERN Table 53 Parameters Depending on the Inverter Size and Voltage Class 2 3 C017 24 Parameter ID C060 C103 805 0005 3 22 so 37 55 sio 006 55 96 So 007 55 96 sio 0020 75 1 __55__ 000 15 26 50 000 22 3 820 0067 25 45 820 0086 32 55 so 013 45 75 50 010 55 90 so 0162 65 10 40 0200 80 132 3 5 36 3 39 40 4l 42 199 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 26 LIMITS MENU 26 1 Overview The Limits Menu defines the current torque limits applied to the control functions IFD VTC or FOC controls selected for the three connected motors For IFD control current limits are used Three limit current levels are available which are expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current 1 Current limit while accelerating 2 Current limit at constant rpm 3 Current limit while decelerating Two special parameters are also available one sets the decrease of the limit current value when the motor runs at constant power flux weakening the other disables the frequency decrease in case of acceleration current limit this is useful for inertial loads
153. ASANTERNO 7 2 Motor Measures Menu This menu contains speed values torque values and the electrical variables measured by the inverter on the mains side DC bus and output MOOO Speed Reference at Constant rpm 32000 99 rpm Note The actual range depends on the selected motor because it is defined by the value set in the parameters for the motor max speed and min speed 28 29 Motor 1 71 72 Motor 2 C114 C115 Motor 3 Active only when a speed reference is used for the selected motor Mf 1650 integer part 1651 decimal part 32000 integer part 99 decimal part Value of the speed reference obtained when the motor rotates at constant speed Function n once the preset ramp time is over M002 Speed Ramp Output 32000 99 rpm 32000 Note The actual range depends on the selected motor because it is defined by the value set in the parameters for the motor max integer part speed and min speed ra decimal 6658 C029 Motor 1 pa C071 C072 Motor 2 C114 C115 Motor 3 Active only when a speed reference is used for the selected motor Address 1652 integer part 1653 decimal part This is the measure of the speed value processed with respect to the ramp time 32000 integer part 99 decimal part 32000 99 rom Always active E 1654 integer part 1653 decimal part Motor speed value M006 Inverter
154. C ONLY 15000 100 9 Nm 1420 21 60 The starting torque is rated torque 12096 121 1 Nm 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 185 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 25 2 List of Parameters from C008 to C128 Table 50 List of Parameters C128 C009 Number of configured motors ENGINEERING C010 MI C053 Type of control algorithm C096 cont ADVANCED 0 Speed MASTER mode C054 M2 Type of reference ADVANCED 0 Speed MASTER mode 1054 C097 ADVANCED 0 Speed MASTER mode 0 NO C098 Speed feedback from encoder BASIC 0 Constant Torque 103 Type of V f curve 0 Constant Torque Motor rated frequency 1420 rpm Motor rated rpm 1420 rpm 1420 rpm See Table 53 Motor rated power See Table 53 See Table 53 See Table 52 Motor rated current See Table 52 See Table 52 Motor rated voltage Motor no load power Motor no load current ENGINEERING Motor stator resistance ENGINEERIN ENGINEERIN 186 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 22 C071 Motor min speed C114 2 3 C029 1500 rpm C072 Motor max speed 1500 rpm 2 4 115 1500 rpm C030 Flux weakening speed ENGIN Ej UNI C073 ENGINEERING 2 D C116 ENGINEERING ADVANCED 0 Disabled Mox spee
155. D Torque compensation at minimum frequency produced by the inverter Determines the increase of the output voltage at OHZ 100 100 100 100 o ADVANCED 1035 1078 1121 IFD Torque compensation at low rpm Determines how output voltage varies at 596 of the motor rated frequency with respect to the voltage obtained with a constant V f pattern constant voltage frequency 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 195 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C036 C079 C122 Voltage Boost at Programmable Frequenc 100 400 Level ADVANCED 1036 1079 1122 Control IFD Torque compensation at preset frequency parameter C037 for motor 1 C080 for motor 2 and C123 for motor 3 Determines how output voltage varies at preset frequency with respect to voltage obtained with a constant V f pattern constant voltage frequency 100 400 Function C037 C080 C123 Frequency for Application of Voltage Boost at Programmable Frequenc Default 50 50 Level ADVANCED Address 1037 1080 1123 Control IFD Frequency for application of voltage Boost with parameter C036 for motor 1 parameter C079 for motor 2 and parameter C122 for motor This is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated frequency Default 1 Level BASIC Address 1038 1081 1124 Control IFD Variable torque compensation expressed as
156. D Regulator Structure ELE FAV ERR TERANURATS Fab YER NA MEN VERE S VER VA EN 270 Figure 53 Keeping fluid level constant Example HERR ERU ua ebbe Un OR Sure eu Ra vel ener 274 6 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERN 0 3 Tables Table 1 Codification of Measures 2 en ese tb ce Fee PE pesa EE Dex LY rea kerte e ETE E Oca 49 Table 2 Codification of Measures M033 MO35 heme ee eese se i e eese se ee eese ee eres 50 Table 3 Codification of Measure thai Ubi e Vea npe aded qu lantur dens 54 Table 4 Codification of the Functions Assigned to the Digital Inputs ccccceccnsccnecceeecseceeeeeeceaeceaeceueeaeceseeeeeeaeeeneees 56 Table 5 List of Parameter P263 Fire Mode enable Password nemen eene 59 Table 6 List of Parameters POOO 62 Table 7 List of Parameters P264 P269 iss 66 Table 8 Preconfigured PID units of 69 Table 9 Example of a Speed hun acai sXcasdullsseuicelencalnoeshiag aies
157. D Regulator Structure The PID regulator output may be used as an external output a speed torque reference of the inverter speed torque reference increase if the control is used the PID regulator input may be used for correcting the output voltage If the PID regulator output is the speed reference of the inverter the selected speed torque ramp is applied 36 3 Table 79 List of Parameters C285 C294 List of Parameters from C285 to C294 PID reference selection no 1 ENGINEERING 1285 2 AINT PID reference selection no 2 ENGINEERING 1286 O Disable PID Feedback selection no 1 ENGINEERING 1288 3 AIN2 PTC PID Feedback selection no 2 ENGINEERING 1289 O Disable PID Feedback selection no 3 ENGINEERING 0 Disable PID functioning mode ENGINEERING 0 Disable PID reference selection no 3 ENGINEERING 1287 O Disable Quantity selection to compute Derivative term ENGINEERINC 1292 Proportional Multiplier of derivative and integral terms ENGINEERING 1293 C294 PID implementation ENGINEERING 1294 270 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 C285 286 287 PID Reference selection no 1 2 3 Disable REF AINT AIN2 PTC Pulse Input Serial Link Fieldbus Keypad Encoder C285 2 AINI Default C286 0 C287 0 Level ENGINEERING 1295 1286 1287 C285 selects the first PID reference source from the PID regulator Up to three reference
158. E 1 hoo 00M O Function 163 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P289 Selecting Variable P289 __ Range Default Level Address Function P290 MDOS3 Selecting Variable B P290 __ Range Default Level Address Function P291 Testing Variable A Default Level Address Function P292 MDO3 Testing Variable B Default Level Address Function 0 99 See Table 30 D2 Inverter Ok On ADVANCED 889 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output MDO3 It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input MDO3 if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 30 0 99 Table 30 D2 Inverter Ok On ADVANCED 890 This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output MDO3 It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input MDO3 if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 30 LU ADVANCED 891 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P289 using P293 as a comparing value Ed b o P o gt ADVANCED 892 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P2
159. ENABLE and START commands are enabled the connected motor 26 attains a speed of rotation of approx 150 rpm its speed of rotation is detected by the encoder then the inverter is disabled The following messages can be displayed on the display keypad A059 Encoder Fault 2 W031 Encoder Then the following message is always displayed 2 a W032 OPEN ENABLE If alarm A059 Encoder Fault trips on the encoder input the value measured by the inverter does not match with 2 O the real speed of rotation of the motor Check that the encoder is properly set up Encoder Frequency Input Menu and connected if the Encoder B input is used check the Configuration of the dip switches located on optional board ES836 see Sinus Penta Installation Instructions manual 30 If W031 Encoder OK appears speed feedback from encoder is correct In addition the autotune sets the encoder signal as feedback with the parameter C199 3 1 23 2 _ List of Parameters from 1073 to 1074 _ ___ 32 Table 40 List of Parameters 1073 1074 3 3 073 BASIC 1460 34 074 BASIC 1461 1073 Type of AutoTune 3 5 0 Disable 0 2 1 Motor Tune 36 2 Encoder Tune This is not a programming parameter the input is set to zero whenever 37 the inverter is powered on and whenever the command is executed Level BASIC 5 1460 39 1073 selects the type of tune to perform Default If you select 1 Motor Tune 1074 sets different types of tune for c
160. ENGINEERING 759 766 motor n 2 773 motor n 3 FOC Integral time Ti of flux regulator for motor n 1 13 ONO Ul 4 UJ NJ P163 and P170 relate to parameters 2 and 3 The regulator s structure is as follows error Set Point Measure integral status integral status error Ki Ts Output integral status where Kp is the proportional coefficient Ki is the integral coefficient 1 Ti where Ti is the integral time Ts is the regulator operating time ranging from 200 to 400 microseconds based on carrier frequency 16 Function NOTE This parameter is automatically recomputed and saved whenever the Rotor Time Constant parameter C025 is altered 1 18 19 20 21 113 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 18 ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU 18 1 Overview Please refer to the Sinus Penta Installation Manual for the hardware description of the NOTE analog output and the frequency output or for the configuration of the dip switches for voltage current outputs NOTE By enabling the frequency output P200 other than Disabled the digital output MDO1 is used Any configuration set in the Digital Output menu will have no effect The Sinus Penta inverter allows for the configuration of three programmable analog outputs as voltage outputs or current outputs as well as one frequency output 18 1 1 FACTORY SETTING OF THE ANA
161. ERING 840 1 000 P241 Multiplicative factor of P240 ENGINEERING P242 PID Integral time multiples of P244 ENGINEERING 500 ms P243 PID Derivative time multiples of P244 ENGINEERING mA 0 001 65 000 Ts ms Cycle time of PID regulator Tc ENGINEERING P245 Min value of PID reference P248 Max value of PID feedback P250 PID reference ramp down time P251 Unit of measure of PID ramp ENGINEERING a 1 0 15 P252 PID ramp start rounding off ENGINEERING 82 50 253 PID ramp end rounding off ENGINEERING 10 254 Integral term activation threshold Delay disable START with PID em x PH P255 Out P237 ENGINEERING 0 Disabled P256 PID output gradient limit ENGINEERING _ 856 ___ ims X P257 Gain for PID measure scaling ENGINEERING 1 000 P236 Max Value of PID Output Xola Ga 10000 10000 100 00 4100 00 10000 100 00 EA Address Function ENGINEERING 836 This is the max allowable value of PID regulator output This value is expressed as a percentage its meaning depends on the programming in parameter C294 defining PID action Example if C294 External Out PID regulator delivers a reference obtained based on the controlled variable and its setpoint In this case the PID output can be brought outside through an analog output The matching between P236 and the output value see Analog Outputs menu is user defined If C294 Reference the PID regulator outpu
162. ERNO 21 3 Examples This section illustrates some examples A table stating the set up of the parameters used is given for each example Parameters highlighted in grey have no effect due to the preselected setting Example 1 Digital Output for Inverter OK Digital Command Default Digital Output MDO3 Table 32 Parameterization for Example 1 P288 MDOS3 Digital output mode DIGITAL P289 MDO Variable A selection D2 Inverter Ok On P296 MDO3 Output logic level T TRUE The digital output status depends on the Boolean variable Inverter Ok which is FALSE only when an alarm trips Example 2 Digital Output for Digital Command Inverter Run OK Default Digital Output MDOA Table 33 Parameterization for Example 2 P297 Digital output mode DIGITAL P298 MDOA Variable A selection 01 Inverter Run Ok P305 MDOdA4 Output logic level TRUE The digital output status depends on the Boolean variable Inverter Run Ok which is TRUE only when the inverter is modulating IGBTs on 154 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN Example 3 Digital Output for Soeed Thresholds Suppose that a digital output energizes if the motor speed exceeds 100rpm as an absolute value and de energizes when the motor speed is lower than or equal to 20rpm as an absolute value Parameter P270 sets ABS mode so that the selected variables are considered as absolute va
163. ESET key is used to reset the inverter after an alarm has tripped and the cause that generated the alarm has been removed Press the RESET key for at least 8 seconds to reset the control board and reinitiate it This procedure may be useful when it is necessary to make modifications made to programming immediately operative the Rxxx type parameters active only after a reset without necessarily having to switch off the inverter 1 9 TX RX Key Download Upload from to the keypad Using the keypad it is possible to perform the UPLOAD parameters stored in the drive are copied to the keypad and DOWNLOAD parameters stored in the keypad are copied to the drive functions Press the TX RX key to go to the UPLOAD page press the TX RX key again to toggle between the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD pages classes different from the drive the parameters were previously UPLOADED from causes a Trying to DOWNLOAD parameters to a drive with SW Version IDP PIN or current or voltage WARNING from W41 to W46 and the operation is inhibited The functioning of the TX RX key is disabled in the following conditions e when the POOO password has not been inserted e when navigation with the MENU key is in OPERATOR P264b OPERATOR e when the inverter is running UPLOAD works only In the example below starting from any page we move to the UPLOAD page of the parameters of the inverter upper LED flashing by subsequently pressing the TX RX key it i
164. G 1224 See Table 52 C215 Enabling DCB at Stop Function 2 O Range 0 No 1 Yes ME n 30 ESTE ADVANCED Dee 1215 7 IFD and VTC ye Enables the DC Braking during deceleration when the speed set in C219 is reached or the speed set in C235 if in Power Down mode and C234 DCB 32 C216 Enabling DCB Start Function 3 3 Ronge D 5 j0ONo 34 ADVANCED Ae 1210 3 5 and VIC Enables the DC Braking at Start function C217 DCB at Stop Duration 36 600 0 1 60 0 sec 37 Default 0 5 ADVANCED 3 8 1217 and VIC Determines the duration of the DCB at Stop function 39 40 4l 42 249 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO C218 DCB at Start Duration 1 600 0 1 60 0 sec Default 0 5 73 ADVANCED Address 1218 Control IFD and VIC Function Determines the duration of the DCB at Start function C219 Speed at the Beginning of DCB at Stop Range 0 1000 0 1000 rpm Default 50rpm 73 ADVANCED Address 1219 Control IFD and VTC Function Determines the speed at the beginning of DCB at stop while decelerating C220 DCB Current Level Range O MIN 120 inverter Imax motor 100 Default 10096 Level ADVANCED Address 1220 IFD and Determines the level of direct current injected to brake the motor Fun
165. INA can be used as a frequency input if MDI8 is programmed as a frequency input 23 FINB with C189 if the optional board is installed alarm A101 MDI8 Illegal Configuration trips No additional function must be assigned to MDI6 otherwise alarm A100 MDI Illegal Configuration will trip when ENABLE closes e Reading a Frequency Input and an Encoder 24 Digital input MDI6 FINA is used as a frequency input and Encoder B is used because reading frequency input FINB with MDI8 is not possible due to the installation of optional board ES836 If additional functions are programmed for digital input alarm A100 MDI Illegal Configuration will trip 2 5 when ENABLE closes If alarm A082 Illegal Encoder Configuration trips this means that the inverter did not detect optional board ES836 check the board wiring 2 6 Parameter C189 defines whether quick acquisition digital inputs are used to read a frequency input or an encoder and if the encoder is a reference source or a feedback source 2 In the Encoder Menu you can also do the following e define the number of pls rev for the encoder being used e enable or disable the speed alarm 2 a e define a time constant applied to reading filtering e define whether encoders are read by means of squaring channels or by channel A only letting channel B define the direction of rotation ChB low level negative rotation ChB high level positive rotation 29 1 3 UsiNG Two ENC
166. INSTRUCTIONS Z RONICA P250 PID Reference Ramp Down Time 32700 _____ Function of P251 1L BAR ENGINEERING Address 850 This parameter defines the ramp down time of the PID regulator reference from max allowable value max 245 246 1 to 0 P251 Unit of measure of PID Ramp Default Level ENGINEERING Address OO This parameter defines the unit of measure for the PID reference ramp times It defines the unit of measure for the time of the third ramp of the PID reference P249 and P250 so that the allowable range becomes Os 327000s Example a 3 95 9 37005 _ _ 3790s _ Factory setting the PID reference ramp is zero if a given ramp time is set up the ramp will be rounded off 50 at the beginning and at the end of the ramp See parameters P252 and P253 P252 Ramp Start Rounding Off Range O 100 96 100 Default 50 Level ENGINEERING Address 852 This parameter sets the time period of the rounding off applied to the first stage of the ramps It is expressed as a percentage of the ramp up down time Example ramp up of 5sec P252 50 means that the speed reference is limited in acceleration for the first 2 5 sec of the ramp up AN NOTE When P252 is used the preset ramp time is increased by P252 2 lO ONO Ul 4 UJ 10 ll 1 13
167. IONS SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO M042 Speed Reference from Field Bus 32000 99 rpm Note The actual range depends on the selected motor because it is defined by the value set in the parameters for the motor max speed and min speed C028 C029 Motor 1 C072 CO073 Motor 2 C114 C115 Motor 3 HE 32000 integer part Range 99 decimal part Always active EE 1692 integer part 1693 decimal This is the measure of the speed reference set by the field bus M044 Torque Reference from Serial Link 500 0 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit value set for the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C134 Motor 3 5000 Always active AI E 1094 This is the measure of the torque reference set via serial link and expressed as a percentage of the Function pd rated torque of the selected motor M045 Torque Reference from Field Bus 500 0 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 C090 CO091 Motor 2 C133 C134 Motor 3 Always active Nee 1095 This is the measure of the torque reference set by the field bus and expressed as a percentage of Function the rated torque of the selected motor M046 PID Reference from Serial Link Range 5000 100 00 10000 Note The actual range depends on the min value an
168. ITAL INPUTS MENU 208 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERN 27 1 4 TORQUE LIMIT SOURCE The source of the Torque Limit can be selected with parameter C147 2 3 The Torque limit function is a limit of the absolute value of the torque required from the inverter Torque limit lt torque lt Torque limit 24 The torque limit references may be selected from the following Source disabled 2 5 0 1 single ended analog input from terminal board 2 AINI differential analog input from terminal board 2 6 3 AIN2 differential analog input from terminal board see also ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 4 FIN frequency input from terminal board 5 Serial link with MODBUS protocol 6 Field Bus field bus on optional board 7 Keypad remotable display keypad 8 Encoder in terminal board MDI6 ECHA MDI7 ECHB or optional board 2 a 9 Up Down from MDI Up down from digital inputs see C161 and C162 If the reference source is disabled the torque limit results from the max absolute 2 9 torque determined by the inverter size and the motor size AN NOTE The max absolute torque is the max value ranging between the absolute values 30 of C047 and C048 motor 1 and relevant parameters for motor 2 and motor 3 Max absolute torque C047 C048 3 1 With the factory setting C147 0 the reference source is disabled and the torque limit is given by the max abso
169. If power supply is restored during the deceleration ramp in Power Down the connected motor accelerates following the selected acceleration ramp A speed value for the end of Power Down can be set in C235 the desired operating mode at stop can be set in C234 When the motor speed aDC Bus end level of Power Down the following functions can be selected in parameter C234 Stop Regardless of Voltage set in C235 the inverter will control the motor until it stops down when the motor stops and power supply is restored the RUN command must be disabled and enabled again to accelerate the motor DCB When the speed of the Power Down end set in C235 is attained DC braking occurs If power supply is restored during DC braking the RUN command must be disabled and enabled again to accelerate the motor Stand By When the speed of the Power Down end set in C235 is attained the inverter is placed on stand by if power supply is restored when the inverter is on stand by the RUN command must be disabled and enabled again to accelerate the motor Mains Detection Extradeceleration 252 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICA 32 2 List of Parameters from C225 to C235 Table 74 List of Parameters C225 C235 C225 Procedure in case of Power Down ENGINEERING 1225 0 Disabled C226 Power Down enabling delay ENGINEERING 1226 227 Stop ramp lime in Power Dow ENGINEERING 1227 C228 Start incremen
170. LOG OUTPUTS With the factory setting the analog outputs have a voltage ranging from 10V and the following variables are selected Speed motor speed Speed Ref constant speed reference 18 1 2 OUTPUTS OVERVIEW By means of the parameters of this menu it is possible to select the variable to be represented its range its acquisition mode or as an absolute value the type of analog output voltage current and the output values corresponding to the min value and the max value of the selected variable An offset value and a filter may also be applied to the analog outputs For the frequency output this menu contains the parameters for the selection of the represented variable its acquisition mode or as an absolute value its min value and max value and the corresponding output frequency value and a filter The figure below shows the general structure of the analog outputs in particular the AO Tanalog output and its parameter set are illustrated 114 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN P176 Mode Disable Voliage Current Val Max Out Max P180 P179 P183 Offset P177 selection DAC gt Vector Selection Val Min Out Min P178 P182 P000338 b Figure 16 General structure of the Analog Outputs lt lt UB Vector Selection Selects the variable to be represented
171. Level Address Function Analog output 1 Reference 2 Reference sum 3 Voltage sum 1 Reference ENGINEERING 1294 This parameter sets the type of implementation carried out by the PID regulator C294 Analog Output The PID regulator is independent of the inverter operation unless a digital input is configured for PID disabling if the digital input closes the PID regulator is disabled and the output is reset to zero In order to use the PID regulator output outside the drive configure one of the analog outputs as PID Out C294 Reference The PID regulator output is the speed torque reference of the connected motor depending upon the type of reference configured when the motor is running any other reference source which is selected will be ignored If the output is a speed reference 100 corresponds to the max absolute value between min speed and max speed set for the motor being used Motl lt 1 C028 C029 Mot2 lt C071 C072 Mot3 lt 1 C114 C115 0 3 Whereas if 100 relates to a torque value this is the max absolute value between the min limit and the max limit of the torque of the active motor Motl lt max C047 C048 Mot2 lt max C090 C091 Mot3 lt max C133 C134 C294 Reference Sum The PID regulator output is a correction of the speed torque reference of the active motor depending upon th
172. M006 Mot Freq P268c M026 Motor Current P268d M004 Motor Spd P268e MOOO Speed Ref Level ADVANCED ERESI Not accessible via serial link The four parameters make it possible to select the four measures to be displayed on the keypad page Default Function NOTE yhe fourth measure it is visible only in the keypad measure page on the other keypad page it is replaced by the reference 70 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 RONICA i NOTE The fourth measure is displayed only on the Keypad page on the other keypad pages it is replaced by the reference P269 Disabling of Keys LOC REM FWD REV Range 0 No No 3 YES YES O 0 No No Level ENGINEERING 869 This parameter is useful for blocking either the LOC REM key the FWD REV key or both The parameter is managed by bit the O bit is relative to LOC REM whilst the 1 bit is relative to the FWD REV key if the value is 1575 assigned to the relative bit it means NO whilst 1 means Yes P269 0 gt both keys enabled P269 1 the LOC REM key is disabled P269 2 the FWD REV key is disabled P269 3 both keys disabled 71 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 11 RAMPS MENU 11 1 Overview An acceleration deceleration ramp is a function allowing a linear variation of the motor speed The ramp time is the t
173. NU 207 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO UP DOWN from digital inputs To enable the UP DOWN from digital inputs also set the respective Up and Down inputs see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Figure 35 Selecting the Reference Sources C143 C144 C145 C146 Ref Saturation Reference Sources Reference vector C143 Max Reference 2 Sources Reference vector C 1 44 Reference Reference 3 Sources Reference vector C145 Min Reference 4 Sources Reference vector C146 P000345 b 27 1 3 ALTERNATIVE COMMAND AND REFERENCE SOURCES It is possible to set a digital input as a selector between 2 alternative command and reference sources For example C179 MDI to select sources MDI6 C140 To select command source number 1 Keypad C141 To select command source number 2 Field Bus C143 To select reference source number 1 144 To select reference source number 2 Field Bus If MD16 on the inverter s terminal board set as the selector between the sources is open the inverter will consider number 1 as reference and command sources that is C140 Keypad and C143 AINT whilst if it is closed number 2 will be considered C141 Field Bus and C144 Field Bus If the references sources 3 and 4 C145 and C146 are not set as disable the reference given for these latter two sources shall be a sum of the source selected by the vector MD16 See C179 in DIG
174. NU and P266 in the paragraph Keypad and Local Mode Page R 0 2 0 Switch ange 1 Pushbutton 2 Pushbutton Storage Default 1 ADVANCED Level 2 Pushbutton Storage 1303 Function With the factory setting the digital contact set as LOC REM C180 is Pushbutton based When the main reference is the PID output and the P266 Local Keypad type page Ref active Speed mode is desired that at the first LOC REM contact sends to the LOCAL mode by setting the PID reference and at the second command makes it possible to remain in the LOCAL mode overriding the PID and making it possible to set the Speed reference directly to do this the LOC REM digital input must by a C180a Pushbutton Selecting C180a 2 the logical status of LOC REM will be stored at power off and used at the next power on of the inverter 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 231 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C181 Safety Start Range Inactive Active Ince INE ADVANCED 1181 This function enables the Safety START mode When this function is enabled and the inverter is to be restarted after resetting an alarm open and close the ENABLE terminal This mode avoids the inverter to RUN when not desired when the inverter is turned off and on again for example after a mains loss and the START an
175. O MASTER 22 32000 x 25 Third measure that may be TE E ERR See the selected See the selected configured with P330 usn i Measure Measure p e 26 be configured with P331 Measure Measure 7 DOU Ditdoupus 4 NOTE __ 16380 Analog input REF 16380 NOTE J 5 16380 Analog input AINT 16380 NOTE J 16380 2 O Analog input AIN2 16380 NOTE J 30 Within the word Status and Alarms bytes are mapped as follows The Status codes may be found in Table 82 Status List 3 2 The Alarm codes be found in Table 80 Alarm Codes List NOTE H 3 3 Digital input status in the word 34 inputs Bitmap 3 5 0 MDI1 START 1 MDI2 ENABLE 2 MDI3 RESET 3 6 3 MDIA 4 gt MDI5 3 7 5 MDI6 6 MDI7 MDI8 38 The high byte is reserved for future applications optional boards Digital output status in the word 4 verter digital outputs _____ Bitmap 4 1 0 MDO1 FOUT gt MDO2 2 MDO3 4 2 3 gt MDO4 precharge contactor status The high byte is reserved for future applications optional boards 287 317 PROGRAMMING 9 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANTERNG NOTE J Full scale value 16380 is a rated value corresponding to an input range of 10V This value can be altered due to automatic compensation of the input status tolerance 39 4 ALARM A070
176. ODERS 30 1 2 wl 02 2 001 31 Push Pull NPN Encoder Encoder pi 32 4 33 Encoder 2 signal Feedback optional board 35 Encoder 1 signal Heference MDI6 and MDI7 3 6 Power supply for Motor 2 3 Figure 38 Using Two Encoders Example 39 Suppose that motor 2 is to be controlled in closed chain and that its speed value is twice the speed value of motor UV P000139 B 1 To do so use speed of motor 1 provided with an encoder as the reference for Penta Drive and use the speed measure of encoder B coaxial to the motor controlled by the inverter as a speed feedback Suppose that motor 1 speed ranges from to 750rpm and that motor 1 is provided with a Push Pull encoder with 4 1 Single Ended outputs and that its resolution is 2048 pls rev 235 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO Motor 2 is provided with an NPN encoder with Single Ended outputs its resolution is 1024 pls rev Only one Push Pull encoder can be connected to digital inputs MDI6 MDI7 so encoder NPN of motor 2 representing the speed feedback of the drive must be connected to optional board ES836 inverter Encoder B whereas the encoder of motor 1 Push Pull used as a reference shall be connected to terminals MDI6 and MDI7 inverter Encoder Encoder Configuration is as follows Encoder Frequency Inputs Menu operating modes and encoder features setti
177. ON MENU Keypad gt e eo eo e ooo e Oo di yoo auawnre Keypad Help 5 O ONO 5 5 oom oo 0m w s e 3 t R u t S d 0 0 U Access to the keypad pages can be gained only by pressing the MENU key from the Root Page or by The measures displayed on the keypad page can be set by means of the P268b P268e parameters navigation is blocked once the keypad page is displayed this can be unblocked only by holding down the ESC key for a few seconds Only measures four lines dedicated to measures 10 Speed the fourth line displays the speed reference that may be modified with A and V LM the fourth line displays the torque reference that may be modified with A and V 11 T Limit the fourth line displays the torque limit reference that may be modified with A and V ae the fourth line displays the PID reference that may be modified with A and keys 1 BG LOCAL MODE 15 The LOCAL mode is an inverter command mode indicated by the L CMD L REF led light where only the command and references from the keypad are enabled excluding all the other command or reference sources see 16 the CONTROL METHOD MENU the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU and the INPUT REFERENCES MENU Depending upon the setting of the P266 parameter local keypad page type the following keypad page will appear if the
178. ONS ELETTROMICASANTERNO Display The last field of line 3 shows a code relating to the type of fan operation e Fans are not controlled by control board ES821 S Control board ES821 detects the correct operation of the cooling fans in cause of fan fault the relevant alarm trips e P Fan activation depends on the thermoswitch condition detected by the control board e N The temperature sensor controlling the fan operation is an NTC Temperature is measured by control board ES821 64 the threshold for switching off the fans when the inverter is disabled set in parameter C264 In this case only fan activation depends on parameter C264 C265 C268 C271 Thermal Protection Activation DEM Default Level BASIC C265 ADVANCED C268 C271 Address 1265 1268 1271 This parameter enables the Motor Thermal Protection function Function It also selects the type of thermal protection among 3 different patterns and PTC mode analog input AIN2 Disabled No Derating Fan Cooled Fan Keyed to Shaft RON Disabled C266 C269 C272 Pick up Current 1 min 12096 Imax Imot 100 96 Default Level ADVANCED Address 1266 1269 1272 This parameter determines the thermal protection pick up current expressed as a Function percentage of the rated current of motor 1 2 3 C267 C270 C273 Thermal Time Constant 1 10 800 s Defoult 0
179. Ok MDO4 Testing variable ADVANCED O gt MDOA Testing variable B ADVANCED gt MDO4 Comparing value for Test A ADVANCED 0 MDOA Comparing value for Test B ADVANCED 0 MDOA Function applied to the result of the 2 tests ADVANCED 0 A OR B 158 317 MDOA Output logic level ADVANCED SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P270 MDOI Digital Output Mode DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT PWM MODE ANALOG o0 Default Level ADVANCED INelelic This parameter defines the operating mode of digital output 1 aie The different operating modes are described in the section at the beginning of the chapter NOTE Digital output MDO1 can be programmed only if the frequency output is not set up P200 Disable see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU P271 MDOT Selecting Variable A 99 see Table 30 Default 51 Speed MEA Level ADVANCED 10 Address 871 UI 45 UJ This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output MDO1 It selects an analog variable used to the value of digital input MDO1 if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 30 77088 0 9 see Table 3
180. Output Mode DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT PWM MODE DIGITAL Default Level ADVANCED Address 897 This parameter defines the operating mode of digital output 4 The different operating modes are described in the section at the beginning of the chapter P298 MDOA Selecting Variable 77708 99 See Table 30 Default D1 Inverter Run Ok Level ADVANCED Address 898 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output MDO4 It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input MDOA if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 30 P299 MDOA Selecting Variable B 0 99 See Table 30 Default D1 Inverter Run Ok Level ADVANCED O99 This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output MDOA It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input MDOA if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 30 ADVANCED ele 700 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P298 using P302 as a comparing value P300 MDOA Testing Variable A ce E a dio
181. P244 777 O 65000 0 Disabled 65000 Tc ms Default 500 Tc ms TENE ENGINEERING ES 842 Constant Ti dividing the integral term of PID regulator Ki 1 Ti 1 P242 Ts It is expressed in sampling time units Ts see P244 If this parameter is set to zero the integral action is annulled Function J Ul 4 UJ NJ P243 PID Derivative Time multiples of P244 10 Range 0 65000 0 65 000 Tc ms ee OFT rs Level ENGINEERING 343 Constant multiplying the derivative term of PID regulator If this parameter Function Is set to zero the derivative action is disabled P244 Cycle Time of PID Regulator Tc 7709 5 65000 5 65000 ms Default 5 ms TENE ENGINEERING VS 844 This parameter determines the cycle time of PID regulator 16 It is expressed in ms multiples of 5 only Example if P244 1000 ms the PID regulator cycle will be executed every second and the output will be refreshed every second as well 1 19 Function 21 139 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P245 Min Value of PID Reference P245 Default Level Address Function P246 Max Value of PID Reference P246 Range Default Level Address Function P247 Min Value of PID Feedback Range Default Level Address Function 10000 10000 100 00 0 00 ENGINEERING 845 This parameter def
182. PID 1015 P256 Trate Lim ms P257 GainScale 1 000 _____ 27 0 Digital Outputs 1 P270 Outl Mode 3 Analog P272 Out1Sel2 A51 Speed 0 P281 Out2Sel2 A51 Speed 0 P284 DO2 ValTst1 20 000 P286 Out2Func 1 A Set B Rese gt p SS _______ P283 Ou2Tes2 3 P285 DO2 ValTst2 ___ 50000rmm 287 P289 Ouf9Sell D2 lweterOkOn P293 DO3 ValTst 0 000 P295 OufgFunc O AJOR B P297 Ou4Mode ____ 1 Digital P299 OuMSe2 01 Inverter Run Ok SS _ NENNEN MEM SS P301 Out4 Test2 0 P303 DOA ValTst2 1 P298 Out4Sell D1 Inverter Run Ok P300 Out4 Test 0 P302 DOA ValTst1 0 000 P304 Out4Func 0 A OR P33x Field Bus Parameters P330 fbs meas3 M012 Torg Out COOx Carrier Frequencies Fcarr Min C003 Npulse 1 24 P331 fbs meas4 M022 Out C002 Fcarr Max C004 SilentMode 1 Yes p 0 _ gt p pM B p ZI NNI EM HEN P291 Oui3 Test gt OR 2 ______ igi pM NENNEN ES p 312 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN LC ee 020 1 0 0 96 C022 Rstat M1 C024 Lm 1 250 00 mH C028 nmin 1 0 rpm C030 spddeflux M1 90 96 2 1 30 0 90
183. PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA A ELETTEONIC AS ANTERN e 15 010281 e SINUS PENTA MULTIFUNCTION AC DRIVE USER MANUAL Programming Instructions Upd 08 02 06 R 03 VER SW 1 6xx English Elettronica Santerno reserves the right to make any technical changes to this manual and to the device without prior notice If printing errors or similar are detected the corrections will be included in the new releases of the manual Elettronica Santerno is responsible for the information contained in the original version of the Italian manual The information contained herein is the property of Elettronica Santerno and cannot be reproduced Elettronica Santerno enforces its rights on the drawings and catalogues according to the law ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Elettronica Santerno S p A Via G Di Vittorio 3 40020 Casalfiumanese BO Italy Tel 39 0542 668611 Fax 39 0542 668622 www elettronicasanterno it sales Qelettronicasanterno it 1 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANTERNO 0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 1 Chapters TABLE OF CONTENT 2 0 1 2 0 2 We cT 6 0 3 PRENNENT 7 0 4 How to Use this ______ __ __ 9
184. REFERENCES MENU 12 1 Processing Speed Torque References The main reference is the value at constant rpm for the controlled physical variable speed or torque MOOO M007 required for the inverter This reference is acquired by the inverter only if the START command is active and the inverter is RUNNING otherwise it is ignored The main reference is the reference at constant rpm when the inverter is RUNNING it will increment the speed or torque set point which will reach the main reference with a timed ramp see RAMPS MENU The factory setting for the inverter operating mode is MASTER with a speed reference In the SLAVE mode the reference is a torque reference this operating mode may be configured only for VTC control Vector Torque Control and FOC control Field Oriented Control The control algorithm and the MASTER SLAVE mode can be set for each of the 3 programmable motors depending on which motor is active at that moment motor 1 motor 2 or motor 3 To enable the SLAVE mode set the following parameters to 1 C011 motor 1 054 motor 2 C097 motor 3 The SLAVE mode may also be selected through a digital input see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU When the main reference is acquired by the inverter RUNNING it becomes the reference for the time ramps generating the current speed torque set point for the connected motor The set up of the main reference is based on a number of parameters included in several menus
185. RUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN Selectable analog variables Selectable Value Full scale Value A50 GROUND Analog Volt A51 Speed 10000 rpm A56 OutVolt 1000 0 V 10 Output voltage RMS A57 Out Pow 1000 0 kW UB WN i Estimation of the torque output A65 PID Err 100 00 96 100 Error between PID reference and PID feedback A66 Fbk 100 00 96 100 PID feedback 100 A68 REF 100 00 96 100 Analog input REF A70 AIN2 Pt 100 00 96 100 Analog input AIN2 PTC 72 Pulseln 100 00 kHz 100 Frequency input A73 Flux REF 1 0000 Wb 1 Flux reference at constant speed 10 11 A78 Id 1000 0A 10 Current measure over axis d 12 13 A85 10 V Volt Analog ee 15 16 AQI AZerol J JjOVotAndog A93 AZero3 1 jOVotAndog A95 AZero5 JjOVotAndog A96 AZeo JjOVotAndog A98 AZero8 JjOVotAndog 147 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO Digit 2 3 4 Testing Variable A P273 P282 P291 P300 If an analog variable is selected a logic TEST is performed to obtain a Boolean signal TRUE FALSE Seven different tests are available that can be performed for selected variable A and its comparing value A Table 31 Test Functions GREATER THAN Selected variable gt comparing value GREATER THAN EQUAL TO Selected variable 2 comparing value LOWER Selected var
186. Reading of the encoder set as a reference source see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU and the CONTROL METHOD MENU ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 21 10000 100000 Hz Note The actual range depends on the frequency min value and max value set in 71 72 Always active 1701 Frequency reference see the the digital ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU and the CONTROL METHOD MENU read in input set as source 53 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO 7 6 Digital Outputs Menu In this menu it is possible check the state of the digital outputs the analog outputs and the frequency outputs available in the terminal board M056 Digital Outputs Bit controlled measure See Table 3 Active Always active ele 706 State of digital inputs MDO1 4 Table 3 Codification of Measure M056 0 _ MDOVFOU M057 Frequency Output 10000 100000 Hz Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max value of digital output set as a frequency reference Values are set in P204 and P205 see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU 10000 100000 MON Always active 1707 This is the frequency measure produced by digital output MDOT used as a frequency output M058 Analog Output AO 100 Active Always active Address 1708 Value percent of analog output AO referr
187. Run and Direction when STOP Input is programmed sse 221 Figure 38 Using Two Encoders Example essssssssssssssseesseeeneee nennen enne menn enne 235 Figure 39 DGB Holdand DCB 243 Figure 40 DCB at Stan wil VIC ___ ______ _ ______ _ _ ___ 244 ms I Or o o TE TO T omm 245 Figure 42 Manual DCB Example T ssessesnesesetesevabesaeenestomientiotidne iwdlbeiss ttl stat utt tati um ub ESei 246 Figure 43 Manual DCB Example 2 _ _____ Ya MER Fe Eu 247 Figure 44 gt Nah DCB Example S euius toss Mu dex pa ______ _______ dM 248 Figure 45 Power Down Example ___________ _ _________ _ 252 Figure 46 Speed Searching Example 1 ccccccccccesccseccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceecseeeaeeeaeeeaeceeeceeeeeeesaeeeaeceaeceaeeeeeseeeaeeeaees 258 Figure 47 Speed Searching Example 2 eene nne nene rris rese res nnne ines 259 PIOUS 264 Sirmetureor the PID REGU ON Nd MuR _ _ ____________ 267 Figure 50 Reference Source and Feedback Source 268 Figure 51 PID Ramp Ret Vii CO ia 269 Figure 52 Details of the PI
188. S PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO NOTE The display keypad connected through connector 5 dialogues correctly with the inverter using the default values preset in the parameter set of serial link RJ45 ROO9 Response Delay for Serial Link 0 45 Range 1 1000 1 1000 msec Default 5 msec Level ENGINEERING Address 596 This parameter determines the inverter response delay after a master query sent Function through serial link O RJ45 connector RO10 Baud Rate for Serial Link O RJA5 8011 Time Added to 4 Byte Time for Serial Link O RJA5 Range 1 10000 1 10000 msec Default 2 msec Level ENGINEERING Address 598 This parameter determines the time limit when no character is received from serial Function link O RJ45 connector and the message sent from the master to the inverter is considered as ended 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 38400bps fot 0 0 Level ENGINEERING Address 597 This parameter determines the baud rate expressed in bits per second for serial link Function O RJ45 connector RO12 Watchdog Time for Serial Link O RJ45 Range O 60000 O 6000 0 sec E Level ENGINEERING Address 599 If this parameter is not set at zero it determines the time limit after which alarm A62 Function WDG Serial Link O Alarm trips if the inverter does not
189. STRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO FLOWCHART B Setting POOO Writing Enabling Selecting the Reference Feedback Sources POO1 Eng Access Level The PID Configuration menu includes the parameters selecting the reference feedback source You can set up to three sources which are summed up to each other Forcing the Reference Feedback Sources Sources Sources REF Analog Input Ref Serial Link Reference from serial link AINT Analog Input AIN1 Field Bus Reference from field bus AIN2 Analog Input AIN2 Keypad Ref from display keypad Pulse Input Frequency Input MDI8 Feedback reference only Encoder Encoder Input lout Output current Vout Output voltage Vdc DC bus voltage The reference scaling is obtained through the parameters included in the Reference menu Each source is assigned to a parameter setting its min value and max value for the min max PID Reference Feedback value See PID Parameters menu P245 Min P246 Mox P247 Min P248 Max Reference Feedback 28 317 No reference scaling is required References are expressed as a percentage As a feedback reference output current lout output voltage Vout DC bus voltage Vdc are available which respectively refer to the following as FULL SCALE VALUE Rated current of the selected motor Mot 1 C018 Rated voltage of the selected motor Mot 1 C019 DC 1500 V SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN
190. Serial Link Watchdog D of A061 Serial Link Watchdog tripped A062 Serial Link Watchdog 1 tripped The serial link watchdog has tripped Communication failure no reading writing query to serial link for a time longer than the time set in the parameters relating to serial link watchdog see SERIAL LINKS MENU e Serial link is disconnected Communication failure on remote master side e Watchdog operating times too short 1 Check serial link 2 Make sure that the remote master constantly sends reading writing queries with max intervals between two queries lower than the preset watchdog operating time 3 Set longer watchdog operating times see 005 for serial link O and RO12 for serial link 1 Event Possible cause Solution A064 Mains Loss Description Moins loss Event Mains loss e One supply cable is disconnected e Mains supply too weak e Mains gap 1 Check voltage in terminals S T Check mains voltage value Also check the value of sampled in the TRIP LOG when the alarm tripped 2 This protection may be disabled or delayed see POWER DOWN MENU Possible cause Solution 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 299 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO A065 Autotune KO Autotune failed Event Au
191. SpdiO 0 00 094 5 11 OO0rm S 95 5 12 0 00rm PO096 Spd13 OO0rm o P097 Spdid 0 00rm j PO98 pdi OO0rmm S PO99 FireM Spd 750 00 00 0 0 01 rpm 310 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 22 0 93 PlOxProhibtSpeeds P107 Velbp3 0 rpm P108 Bwbps 0 rpm P115 VarPercl 0 0 96 P116 VarPerc2 0 0 96 P117 VarPerc3 0 0 P118 VarPerc4 0 0 P119 VarPerc5 0 0 P120 VarPerc 0 0 P12x P15x Speed Loop 25 NENNEN _ 25 26 1 27 RN meh em 28 masmenwa oo 29 1 _ 05008 hme mem 3 S RM __ CO es e mene 37 _ Pieraozno _ _ Men 005 _ mexoro amp ws __ maoan 38 MwAO Mode meos meson eene woa risens ote Pieres onmin 00v _ a Werke
192. Speed Searching Example 1 Output Frequency and motor RPM for the Speed Searching Function C245 YES activated by the ENABLE command to lt C246 or C246 0 Three stages The inverter output frequency corresponds to the last value which was active before disabling the inverter output Time t current matches with the value set in C248 Time t Output frequency is decremented following the ramp set in C247 for rotation speed searching Time t The connected motor accelerates following the acceleration ramp 258 317 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ITRONICASANTERN 25 Motor 2 6 Speed 29 Inverter disabled 30 t ON 34 OFF 36 Enable 38 39 OFF 4 P000359 b i Figure 47 Speed Searching Example 2 4 1 Frequency Motor Rom Inverter Lock RESET and ENABLE during Speed Searching C245 YES due to an Alarm Trip lt t C246 or C246 0 4 2 If the Safety at Start function is disabled C181 Inactive it is not AY NOTE necessary to open and close the ENABLE contact Speed searching matches with the RESET command 259 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO 33 2 List of Parameters from C245 to C248 Table 75 List of Parameters C245 C248 C245 Speed Searching enabling C246 Speed Searching disabling if ENABLE is open _ C247 Speed searching time as 96 deceleration ramp C248 Speed searchin
193. State of the virtual control terminal board used by the inverter This is the terminal board resulting from the combination of the preset command sources local terminal board serial link and field bus where the ENABLE command is given by the AND of all the ENABLE commands for the other inputs the OR command between the different command sources is applicable See also the CONTROL METHOD MENU and the TIMERS MENU Function M032 Instant Digital Inputs 1 Codification of measures MO31 2 measure Always active 1682 State of virtual control terminal board before application of the timers to the digital 10 inputs if no timer is applied it matches with M031 This is the terminal board resulting from the combination of the preset command sources local terminal board serial link and field bus where the ENABLE command is given by the AND of all the ENABLE commands for the other inputs the OR command between the different command sources is applicable See also the CONTROL METHOD MENU Function START MDI6 ECHA FINA MDI2 ENABLE 6 MDI7 ECHB MDI8 FINB MDI4 8 5 MDI5 9 Table 1 Codification of Measures M031 2 3 16 1 18 19 20 21 49 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO M033 Local Control Term
194. TAL INPUTS MENU PO19 Speed Ramp 4 Deceleration Time 0 327 00 5 if PO20 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if P02020 0 1 5 0 32700 s if 20 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 s if 20 0 gt 10 5 Default 10 sec Level ADVANCED Address 619 0 32700 Function Same as ramp 1 see P010 NOTE In order to be able to apply ramp 4 to the reference the multiramp digital inputs must be programmed and ramp 4 selected see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU PO20 Speed Ramps and 4 Time Unit of Measure 0 0 01 5 1 5 1 5 25 15 3 5 10 5 Default 120 15 Range 0 3 Level ADVANCED Address 620 Defines the unit of measure for the times for speed ramp 3 P015 and 16 and Function speed ramp 4 P020 and P018 so that range for the programmable ramps may be extended from O s to 327000s 78 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ROHI P021 Selection for Ramp Rounding Off 0000b 1111b binary 0x0000 0000b no ramp is rounded off hexadecimal 1111b all ramps are rounded off 0 15 Default Level ADVANCED Address 621 In this parameter you can select the bit corresponding to the ramp to be rounded off Example KWa 21 00116 3 decimal gt ramps 1 and 2 are rounded off The ramp rounding off allows reaching the reference end value with a zero tangent both while accelerating and while decelerating thus suppressing torque peaks that could damage mechanical couplin
195. TERN Table 63 Selected Speed reference MULTISPEEDT X MULTISPEED2 1 20 27 P ee ef If one of these functions is not set its relative bit value is zero For example if C156 and C157 are Inactive 0 while C155 and C158 are programmed on two different 28 terminals only Multispeed 0 1 8 9 can be selected relating to the following references 2 O P081 P091 __ PO92 30 With the factory setting POBO Preset Speed if no Multispeed function is selected the active reference is the 3 1 reference set according to the parameters in the References Menu It PO80 Speed Sum the selected Multispeed function adds up to the active the reference set according to the 32 parameters of the References Menu IF POBO Preset Speed Esc the selected Multispeed replaces the active reference which will be ignored If 33 Multispeed function is selected the resulting reference is equal to zero See also the INPUT REFERENCES MENU for the reference processing sequence the Speed Decrease function and 34 the Reference Reversal function become active downstream of the Multispeed function In Table 63 3 5 gt input Inactive NOTE 1 gt input Active 36 X gt input having no effect C159 Cw CCw Input 3 0 8 Inactive MDIT
196. Table 30 _____________ 60 Torque Demand ADVANCED 880 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output MDO2 It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input MDO2 if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 30 161 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P281 MDO2 Selecting Variable B 7788 99 5 See Table 30 Default A51 Speed MEA Level ADVANCED Address 881 This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output MDO2 It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input MDO2 if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 30 P282 MDO2 Testing Variable A E F gt Co X Default ADVANCED VS 882 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P280 using P284 as a comparing value 0 Level ADVANCED 383 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P281 using P285 as a comparing value Function P283 MDO2 Testing Variable B QE eS Function P284 MDO2 Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 96 320 00 96 32000 32000 of the full sca
197. a StartB 0 None C150a StopB 0 None C15a1 RevB 0 None C153 Disable 0 None C155 Mltsp 0 4 MDIA 157 2 0 None C159 Cw CCw 8 MDI8 C161 Up 0 None C163 U D Reset 0 None C164a ExtAlr1Delay ms C165a ExtAlr2Delay ms C166a ExtAlr3Delay Oms C168 MltRmp 1 0 None C170 Master Slave 0 None C172 Keypad lock 0 None C174 3rd Mot 0 None C176 PercSpd 1 0 None C178 PlDud res 0 None C180 Loc Rem 7 MDI7 C181 Sate Start 0 Disabled C183 Tflux dis AlwaysON C185 StartFrWheel 0 Dec Ramp C187 DisabExtTlim 0 None C18x C19x Encoder Frequency Input C190 pulsEncA 1024 C192 SpdAlrTime 5 00 s C194 TrackAlrEn 1 Enable C196 tauFiltRef 5 0 ms C198 nCH ENCB 0 2Ch Quad C197 nCH ENCA 0 2Ch Quad C199 EncSign 0 Fdbk NO Ref NO __ __ 21 Braking Unit C210 Enab Vel 0 20 BrakeO C212 BrkDutyCycle Cn O O 21 22 DC Braking 0 C215 Enab dcb stop 0 No C217 Tdcb stop s 0 5 0 1 C211 BrakeTon C216 Enab dcb start 0 No C218 Tdcb start 0 5 5 220 1 dcb 100 96 C222 Tdefl M1 50 ms C224 Tdefl M3 50 ms C219 dcb speed 50 rpm C221 I dcb hold C223 Tdefl M2 50 ms __________ O C22x C23x Power Down C231 Kpvdclc 0 050 C234 stopmode 0 Stop C226 Tpdd 10 ms C228 Pddecboost 0 10 96 C230 Vpddel C232 Kivdclc 0 500s C235 stoplev 0 rpm 314 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 22 23 24 25 2
198. a percentage of the motor rated speed C016 C059 C102 C031 74 117 Max Speed Alarm 0 32000 0 Disabled 32000 rpm Defoult O Disabled Level ADVANCED 1031 Dee 1074 1117 If it is not set to zero this parameter determines the speed value to be entered for the maximum speed alarm A076 Function 194 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 3l 32 33 34 C032 C075 C118 Reduction in quadratic torque curve 0 1000 0 100 0 Default 30 0 Level ADVANCED 1032 1075 1118 _ F D If the V f curve pattern C013 C056 C099 Quadratic this parameter defines the maximum voltage reduction in terms of the theoretical V f pattern actuated to the programmed frequency with C033 C076 C119 Range Function C033 C076 C119 Rated speed referring to reduction in quadratic torque control Range 1 100 Default 20 Level ADVANCED OES 1033 1076 1119 Control IFD If the V f curve pattern C013 C056 C099 Quadratic this parameter defines the frequency on which to actuate maximum reduction in terms of the theoretical V f pattern programmed with C032 C075 C120 C034 077 120 Voltage Preboost 1 100 Function 50 0 0 5 0 9 Default See Table 52 Level Address Control Function Range Default Level Address Control Function ADVANCED 1034 1077 1120 IF
199. a percentage of the motor rated voltage The preset value expresses the voltage increase when the motor is running at its rated torque C039 C082 C125 Slip Compensation 0 200 0 Disabled 200 96 o 0 Disabled ADVANCED 1039 1082 1125 F D This parameter represents the motor rated slip expressed as a value percent If set to this function is disabled Function 196 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 22 23 O 500 0 50 0 2 4 26 Defines the increase in voltage in terms of the corresponding produced frequency when the current produced by the motor is greater than or C040 C083 C126 Decrease in voltage at rated current Default 0 Disabled Level ADVANCED 1040 1083 1126 equal to the rated current 2 For example C040 10 Decrease in voltage at rated current C013 Constant Torque type of V f pattern 2 a Function C015 50 Hz rated frequency C019 380 V rated voltage If the inverter produces an output frequency of 25 Hz it must produce a 29 voltage of 190V When the output current is equal to the rated current of the motor C018 the voltage actually produced is Vout 190 1 CO40 100 209V 30 C041 C084 C127 Fluxing Ramp Time 3 1 Range 40 4000 40 4000 msec 3 2 See Table 52 3 3 EA ENGINEERING 1041 3 4 Address 1084 1127 VIC and FOC 3 D
200. able is considered as an absolute value 6 ABS 0 20mA Like the output mode 0 20mA except that the selected variable is considered as an absolute value 7 5 4 20mA Like the output mode 4 20mA except that the selected variable is considered as an absolute value NOTE Always check the min and max values of the outputs programmed the relative parameters For the Frequency Output three operating modes can be selected 0 Disable The output frequency is disabled 1 Pulse Out The Digital output is programmed as a frequency output The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 2 ABS Pulse Out Like the Pulse Out except that the selected variable has a positive or negative sign NOTE When P200 is not set to DISABLE the MDO digital output is used as a frequency output and any eventual MDO1 settings in the Digital Outputs Menu are ignored 118 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 18 2 2 ANALOG OUTPUT PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES This section contains a description of operating examples of the analog outputs obtained with different programming modes Example 1 Table 20 Programming 1 0 10V UB WN eB 500 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 500 10 Figure 18 Curve voltage speed carried out by AO1 Example 1 Example 2 P176 ABS 0 10V Analog output AO P177 Selected variable analog output 1 P178 Min value of t
201. abled 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 227 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C171 PID DISABLE Input Inactive 7880 Inactive Level ADVANCED Address 117 1 This function is used for managing the PID regulator see PID CONFIGURATION MENU By activating the relative set terminal this function makes it possible to disable the PID regulator its output and its external variable are set to zero More precisely if the PID regulator is in External Out mode C294 0 when the DISABLE function is enabled the PID output is set to zero and the external variable regulated by the PID regulator feedback is no longer regulated by the PID regulator itself In the Reference mode therefore the PID DISABLE function disables the PID regulator as described above and commutates the reference thus becoming the main active reference again C172 KEYPAD LOCK Input 6072 line Level ADVANCED 55 1172 This function avoids accessing parameter modification through the remotable display keypad and avoids accessing the LOCAL mode by pressing the LOC REM key or by enabling the LOCAL input function C181 If the LOCAL mode is already active the LOCK command will have no effect on the LOCAL func
202. acceleration deceleration ramp is started whilst the end 2 3 reference is applied at the end of each ramp P250 Ramp DOWN for PID reference OS e le e nce Re te srnence P25 PID Ram p unit of measure P25 Start Curve for PID ramps 2 P253 Curve for PID ramps 2 PO00362 b Figure 51 PID Ramp Reference 30 Block 4 is the real PID regulator The output may be disabled by an external digital command if properly 31 programmed If the PID regulator is used as a reference source and P255 not set at zero the PID output value control is enabled If the PID output equals the preset minimum value for a time longer than P255 the inverter is automatically put on stand by In block 5 the PID output is applied to the function defined by the Regulator 32 Implementation parameter C294 The PID regulator structure is detailed in the diagram below block 4 3 3 34 35 3 38 39 40 4l 42 269 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO SINUS PENTA nos P gt 240 241 Ti P242 td P243 Integ Max P238 re P238 PID Out Max P236 P256 Rate Limiter Reference PID P237 PID Out Min 239 a Feedback P239 P236 PID Out Max Normal PID Out Disable D P000341 b Figure 52 Details of the PI
203. ace on the display keypad in PID mode C179 Source Selection Input 1qEMESCOEO S Level ADVANCED Address 1179 The digital input set as a source selector is considered only in the inverter s terminal board By setting a digital input as a source selector when this is not active MDI corresponding to open terminal board only the first command sources and set references are taken into consideration C140 command source 1 and C143 reference source 1 respectively With the set in C179 closed the first command and reference sources are ignored C140 and C143 whilst only the second command source and the second reference source C141 command source no 2 and C144 reference source no 2 respectively are considered respectively are always considered as the sum of the one selected by the selector MDI open If set different to O Disabled the reference sources 3 and 4 C145 and C146 CAUTION C143 MDI closed C144 230 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C180 LOC REM Input Level Function C180a Type of LOC REM contact 0 8 Inactive Default MDI7 ADVANCED ee E 1190 The LOCAL mode can be enabled from the relative digital input it ignores the enabling disabling delays set by the software timers or also by the LOC REM key on the keypad display With the fac
204. against overloads This protection can be carried out using the PTC acquired at the AIN2 analog input or using software with an algorithm that reconstructs the thermal image of the motor In case of termal protection with it is possible to connect up to in series See the MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU for information regarding programming parameters and a description of this function For detailed description about the use of AIN input see the INSTALLATION MANUAL 4 8 Prohibit Speeds It is possible to program speed ranges corresponding to the frequencies of mechanical resonance to be avoided for the inverter to function See the PROHIBIT SPEED MENU for information regarding programming parameters and a description of this function 4 9 Digital PID Regulator The inverter has a digital PID regulator proportional integral derivative that can be used to generate e Analog output e Main reference of the inverter Speed Torque reference e Correction of main reference e Correction of output voltage only for IFD Volt Freq control See the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU for information regarding programming parameters and a description of this function 4 10 Bridge Crane Application For lifting applications such as a bridge crane it may be useful to consider the effective time required for the release of the electromechanical safety brake the delay between the electrical command and the actual opening of th
205. age so the motor starts idling the motor idles and stops due to friction or the mechanical load If the DISABLE function is set C1530 to activate the inverter deactivate the input signal on the terminal selected with C153 to enable the inverter then activate the ENABLE function and the ENABLE S function if programmed Function C154 RESET alarms on MDI3 disabled 0 1 0 NO 1 Yes eo NO Level ADVANCED 154 With C154 1 Yes it is possible to disactivate the reset alarms function from MDI3 C155 C156 C157 C158 MULTISPEED Inputs Inactive MDI8 Default C155 4 1596 5 C155 MDIA C156 MDI5 C157 0 158 157 Inactive C158 Inactive Level ADVANCED Address 1155 1156 1157 1158 This function generates up to 15 speed references that can be programmed with parameters P081 P098 according to the programming mode set in 8 The 4 Multispeed functions determine which of the 15 the active speed references are active active value 1 or inactive value 0 of each preset input signal determines a bit logic binary number MULTISPEED is the less significant bit bit and MULTISPEED 3 is the most significant bit bit 3 as stated in Tables 5 and 6 If one of these functions is not set its relative bit is zero Table 62 Multispeed Selection 222 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASAN
206. agram of the START REV Cw CCw functions and of the START STOP REV keys on the display keypad if the STOP function is set up Inverter Enabled keySTART Start Ok keySTOP STOP START REVERSE Edge Flip Flop Edge Flip Flop Flip Flop the Reset signal Reset gt overreading the Set Flip Flop Reset keyREV kor gt Reverse Reference Cw CCw Flip Flog Reset PO00348 b Figure 37 Controlling Run and Direction when STOP Input is programmed C152 ENABLE S Input 8 lnadive MDI1 MDI8 Level ADVANCED Address 1152 This is a safety ENABLE if this function is enabled the inverter activates only if Function both ENABLE and ENABLE S inputs are active The ENABLE S signal cannot be delayed by software timers if a timer is programmed for the terminal relating to ENABLE S it will have no effect on the ENABLE S function whereas it will normally delay other functions programmed for the same terminal A bets 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 221 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO C153 DISABLE Input Range 0 8 Inactive MDI8 Inactive Level ADVANCED 55 153 The DISABLE function disables the inverter and overrides any eventual ENABLE signals The DISABLE command sets to zero the inverter output volt
207. ameter selects the type of differential analog signal over terminals AIN2 and AIN2 in the terminal board The signal can be a voltage signal a current signal a unipolar signal or a bipolar signal 0 10 V Bipolar voltage input between 10V and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 1 20 mA Bipolar current input between 20mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values Function 2 4 20 mA Unipolar current input with min threshold between 4 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values Before being saturated if the detected signal is lower than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA alarms A068 or A104 trip 1 2 3 4 5 9 Q 3 0 Unipolar voltage input between OV and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 4 0 20 mA Unipolar current input between 0 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values The value set in parameter PO60 must match with the status of switches SW1 C and NOTE SW1 E allowing to select the proper electric circuit for the analog signal processing voltage signal or current signal PO61 Value of input AIN2 for generating min reference 10 0V 10 0 V if P0602 0 10 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO60 1 20 4 0 20 0 mA if PO60 2 4 20 mA 100 100 if PO60 O 200 200 if PO60 1 40 200 if PO60 2 190
208. an Function absolute value the output value resulting from the integral term ranges from P238 to P238 P239 Max Value of Derivative Term Range O 10000 100 00 100 00 9 Default 10000 100 00 ES ENGINEERING Address 839 This is the max allowable value of the derivative term it is to be considered as an Function absolute value the output value resulting from the derivative term ranges from P239 to P239 P240 PID Proportional Constant 0 65000 0 65 000 Default 1000 1 000 Level ENGINEERING e O40 This is the value of the proportional coefficient The PID regulator will use Kp resulting pria from the product of P240 multiplied by P241 multiplicative factor 138 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P241 Multiplicative Factor of P240 E 2 TENE ENGINEERING Address 841 Multiplicative factor of the proportional coefficient This is used to obtain a wider range for the proportional coefficient used in PID regulator and ranging from 0 000 to 6500 0 Funch Supposing that the default values are used for P240 and P241 the unction a proportional coefficient used in the PID regulator is unitary in case error of 196 occurs between the reference and the controlled variable the proportional term representing one of the three values of the regulator output will be 196 P242 PID Integral Time multiples of
209. ance is used for a time C211 without being activated the braking resistance command is automatically disabled for a time of inactivity set in C212 Address C212 Maximum Time of Continuous Supply 0 100 100 Default 10 10 Level ENGINEERING De EE 1212 C212 Ton Ton Toff 100 This parameter determines the operating duty cycle allowed for the braking resistance is expressed as a percentage and defines the time of inactivity of the braking resistance when it continuously operates for the max time set in C211 Function 242 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ETIRONICASANTERN 22 31 DC BRAKING MENU 31 1 Overview 23 Using the IFD or VTC control algorithm DC current is injected to the motor to stop it DC current may be 24 automatically injected at stop and or at start DC current injection may also be controlled by the terminal board All relevant parameters are included in the DC BRAKING MENU The intensity of the DC current injected is expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the active motor 2 5 31 1 1 DC BRAKING AT START AND NON CONDENSING 26 FUNCTION To activate DC braking at start set C216 to YES Braking occurs after sending a START command with a speed 2 reference other than zero before the acceleration ramp A START command may be one of the following RUN command or REV command sent via terminal board START command from keypad etc dep
210. anumeric parameters have a delayed effect NOTE Vice versa when you modify a parameter using RemoteDrive the inverter will immediately use the new parameter value 16 j When a parameter is modified from the display keypad you may activate its NOTE 0 4 3 ALARMS AND WARNINGS The last part of this User Manual covers alarms Axxx and warnings Wxxx displayed by the inverter 1 Description 18 Event Possible cause 19 Solution 2 O 21 11 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 1 USING THE DISPLAY KEYPAD UNIT 1 1 Overview This section contains several examples for navigation in the display keypad unit and the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD functions of the programming settings of the inverter using the keypad For details regarding the particular settings of the keypad contrast backlight etc please refer to the section concerning the display keypad in the Installation Manual whilst for details regarding customising navigation of the root page the measures in the Keypad page and the Root page and the PID customised unit of measure refer to the DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU of this manual When using the menu navigation mode P264 MENU the structure of the menu tree where it is possible to navigate with the Display Keypad is that described in the paragraph Menu Tree The structure shown is complete the effective structure depends on the program level set in POO1 and on the programming set For exa
211. arameters for the digital PID regulator integrated in the inverter The PID regulator may be used to control a physical variable external to the inverter the variable measure shall be available in the system and must be connected to the feedback input The PID regulator is used to keep the reference and the control variable constant feedback to do so the PID regulator controls three internal variables which are described below V Proportional term this the variable detecting the instant difference between the reference and the measured value of the physical variable to be controlled error Integral term this is the variable keeping track of the history of the detected errors summation of all errors SINUS PENTA Y Derivative term this is the variable keeping track of the evolution of the error or the controlled variable difference between two consecutive errors or between two consecutive values of the feedbacked variable The weighed summation of these terms represents the output signal of PID regulator The weight of these three terms may be defined by the user with the parameters below 236 240 241 PID Out Max Ti P242 P243 291 293
212. at may be modified with theA and V keys Press the LOC REM key once more with the inverter disabled and the Keypad page will come up and the PID reference may be modified with the A and keys P267 Preconfigured PID Units of measure 77380 3 Table O Disabled Level ENGINEERING 867 The PID reference and feedback are expressed in the measures 20 M021 With the P257 parameter it is possible to set a gain level for scaling the reference and to feedback to obtain the measures M023 P257 M020 M024 P257 M021 these are to be suitably scaled and it is possible to select the unit of measure with the P267 parameter see code P267 or to key it in with the P267a parameter displayed only if P267 O Disabled For example with 10096 of the PID reference M020 100 setting P257 0 04 and P267 1 bar in correspondence with the abovementioned values the scaled measure of the PID reference shall be gt M023 4 00 bar 68 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN Table 8 Preconfigured PID units of measure 10 5 19 20 21 69 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P267a Units of measure of the customised PID 0x20 each byte jen cm blank ASCII Ox5D ASCII
213. ation frequency is dampened 178 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 25 MOTOR CONTROL MENU 22 25 1 Overview 23 The Sinus Penta allows to configure three different types of motors and three different types of control algorithms at 2 4 the same time The three types of control algorithms are identified with the acronyms 2 FD Voltage Frequency Control v Vector Torque Control v FOC Field Oriented Control 2 6 Voltage Frequency control allows to control the motor by producing voltage depending on frequency Vector Torque Control sensorless processing the machine equations depending on the equivalent parameters of 2 the asynchronous machine allows to separate torque control from flux control with no need to use a transducer Field Oriented Control is a closed chain control requiring a speed transducer to detect the position of the motor shaft instant by instant 2 a The parameter set for the selected motor is included in the Motor Control menu v Motor Control 1 Menu concerns motor 1 2 O v Motor Control 2 Menu concerns motor 2 v Motor Control Menu concerns motor 30 Factory setting allows to configure one motor only To gain access to the Configuration menus of the other connected motors simply enter the number of the selected motor in 9 Number of Configured Motors in the Motor Control 1 Menu 3 1 To select the connected motor use digital
214. ble Function according to selection of P177 See Table 19 1500 15 00 di 10000 rpm 1500 rpm Level ADVANCED 779 Maximum value of the motor speed corresponding to the AO1 Output Function min value with reference to P183 P180 AOT1Offset on analog output 9 999 49 999 R Function according to selection T oe c 0 Default Level ADVANCED 730 Offset value applied to the AO analog output P181 AOI filter on analog output 00 UI i UJ NJ BESTE 65000 0 000 65 000 sec 3 h 0 000 sec 10 ADVANCED Address 78 Time constant value of the filter applied to the AO1 analog output P182 1 Output min value with reference to P178 e Gee eee of P176 20 0 420 0 mA 13 Dect 100 T7389 ADVANCED 782 14 Minimum output value obtained in correspondence with the minimum Function value of the variable P178 P183 AOI Output max value with reference to P179 16 R Function according to selection 10 0 10 0 V EE of P176 20 0 20 0 mA 17 Default 10 0 V EA ADVANCED 783 Maximum output value obtained in correspondence with the maximum Function value of the variable P179 9 20 21 125 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNG P184 AO2 analog output Disabled 1 10V 2 0 10V 3 0 20mA 0 7 4 4 20
215. ble B see Table 30 Default 10 rpm Level ADVANCED Address 370 aU This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test 160 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 P277 MDO1 Function Default Level Address Function P278 MDO1 Output Logic Level NE M Default Level Address Function P279 MDO2 Digital Output Mode Default EK Address Function P280 MDO2 Selecting Variable A Range Default Level Address Function lied to the Result of the 2 Tests ADVANCED 877 This parameter determines logic function applied to the result of the two tests to calculate the output value FALSE 1 TRUE ADVANCED 878 Digital output logic function MDOI to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied O UI 4 UJ NJ 10 DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT PWM MODE BRAKE ADVANCED 879 This parameter defines the operating mode of digital output 2 The different operating modes are described in the section at the beginning of this chapter ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 9 2 See
216. bling delay 0 0 6000 0 sec 0 60000 Level ENGINEERING Address 820 This parameter determines T3 enabling time Operation as per P216 Function P221 T3 Disabling delay rp 0 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec 0 0 Level ENGINEERING Address 821 This parameter determines T3 disabling time Function Operation as per P217 P222 TA Enabling delay Range 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec MENO Level ENGINEERING Address 822 This parameter determines T4 enabling time Function Operation as per P216 P223 T4 Disabling delay 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec Level ENGINEERING Address 823 This parameter determines T4 disabling time Function Operation as per P217 P224 5 Enabling delay Range 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec 00 Level ENGINEERING Address 824 This parameter determines T5 enabling time Operation as per P216 Function 134 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 R P225 T5 Disabling delay 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec Default Level ENGINEERING Address 825 This parameter determines T5 disabling time Function Operation as per P217 P226 Timer assigned to inputs MDI 1 4 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 BIA EM O 0 0 Level ENGINEERING 920 The first group of four digital inputs may be assig
217. ce of the Ramps menu is assigned to the limit torque reference 30 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 5 4 Configuring a Feedback from Encoder Setting Writing Enabling 1 Eng Access Level Setting the Speed Feedback In the Motor Control menu set C012 as a speed feedback from Encoder Selecting the Encoder ENCODER A Push Pull single ended 24V encoder connected to digital inputs MDI6 and MDI7 NOTE In the Digital Inputs menu do not set any function for and MDI7 ENCODER B Encoder acquired with optional board ES836 see Installation Instructions for the Configuration of the jumper and the dip switches for the encoder type and supply 10 In the Encoder Frequency Input menu set the source for Encoder speed feedback set C189 A FBK BzNO if also encoder B or frequency input FIN B are used see programming options for C189 in the Encoder Frequency Input section Set the number of pulse rev for the encoder being used parameter C190 A059 Encoder Fault see C199 Checking the Encoder Check to see if the encoder is properly connected CAUTION the motor must start running In the Autotune menu set 1073 Tune and close the enabling contact of the inverter MDI2 When autotune is over one of the following messages is displayed W31 Encoder Ok encoder d
218. celeration Time Range 0 6500 0 6500 sec Default Isec Level ADVANCED VS The preset time corresponds to the time the ramped speed torque Function reference takes to go from zero to JOG speed torque value P070 J UI 4 UJ NJ P030 Jog Ramp Deceleration Time Range 0 6500 sec 10 Default 1 Level ADVANCED Address 630 The preset time corresponds to the time the ramped speed torque reference takes to go from JOG speed torque value P070 to zero PO31 Gradient Variation Acceleration Reset 14 Default 1 Yes Level ADVANCED 15 Address 631 Defines whether to reset acceleration or not when switching from Function acceleration to deceleration and vice versa reference gradient For more 16 details see description of speed ramps at the beginning of this section P032 Fire Mode Acceleration Ramp 1 SCRI O 32700 0 3270 0 s 18 Default 10 sec Level ENGINEERING 19 63 Function This ramp is used to accelerate the motor when in Fire Mode 2 21 81 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P033 Fire Mode Deceleration Ramp Range 0 32700 0 3270 0 s Default 100 10 sec Level ENGINEERING Address 633 This ramp is used to decelerate the motor when in Fire Mode Function 82 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 12 INPUT
219. coder is correctly connected W32 OPEN ENABLE Open and close the ENABLE MDI2 signal to enable the drive W33 WRITE IMPOSSIBLE Writing procedure impossible W34 ILLEGAL DATA Illegal value entered operation failed W35 NO WRITE CONTROL Writing procedure impossible because Control is active and the drive is running W36 ILLEGAL ADDRESS Illegal address entered operation failed The drive is disabled and does not acknowledge the ENABLE command because it Is writing a C parameter W37 ENABLE LOCKED CAUTION The drive will start up as soon as writing is over Editing mode cannot be accessed because parameter modification is disabled mee eee POOO is different from P002 W39 KEYPAD DISABLED Editing mode cannot be accessed because the keypad is disabled WAO FAN FAULT Fan locked or disconnected or faulty WA SW VERSION KO Download impossible because of different SW Versions W42 IDP KO Download impossible because of different IDPs IDentification Products W43 PIN KO Download impossible because of different PINs Part Identification Numbers WAA CURRENT CLASS KO Download impossible because of different current classes WA5 VOLTAGE CLASS KO Download impossible because of different voltage classes W46 DOWNLOAD KO Download impossible generic cause 308 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 41 6 Status List Table 86 Status List ALARMI START UP 2 MAINS LOSS Mains
220. ct setting of the digital input parameters enabling the selection functions for motor 2 C173 and or motor 3 C174 1 Check and enter the correct value for C009 2 Check and enter the correct value for C173 C174 3 Check the status of the digital commands for terminals C173 and C174 If remote command sources are selected check the status of the commands that have been sent Second Sensor fault Power heatsink overheated with cooling fan off see also A094 and A095 Failure in temperature control device and or cooling system Contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service Function programmed to MDI6 together with frequency input A Terminal MDI6 is programmed with both a digital function command and as frequency input A Incorrect programming of a command function for MDI6 because frequency input A is already set in parameter C189 FinA see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU and ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU Check and adjust programming of the digital input functions and of parameter C189 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 305 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO A101 MDI8 Illegal Configuration Description Function programmed to MDI8 together with frequency input B Terminal MDI8 is programmed with both a digital function command and as frequency input B Incorrect programming of a command functi
221. cted variable Function according selection of P1 See Table 19 Default o o Level ADVANCED 71 4 EIE Minimum motor current value obtained in correspondence with the minimum value of the variable P198 P195 Max value of selected variable Function according to See Table 1 Range selection of P193 Se Tomei DAC Imax Inverter Inverter maximum current function of size EA ADVANCED SEE 725 Maximum motor speed value obtained in correspondence with the Function minimum value of the variable P199 P196 Offset on analog output Function according to Range selection of P192 pee Defoult Level ADVANCED Address 796 Offset value applied to the analog output P197 filter on analog output 65000 sec 0 000 65 000 sec Peco 0000s Level ADVANCED Pelei 797 Time constant value of the filter applied to the AO3 analog output 128 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ROHI P198 AO3 Output min value with reference to P194 Function according to selection of P192 See Table 19 Defaul 10 0 V Level ADVANCED 728 Minimum output value obtained in correspondence with the maximum Function value of the variable P194 Function according to selection of P192 See Table 19 Default 10 0V Level ADVANCED 799
222. ction It is expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the controlled motor C221 DC current in holding Range 0 100 0 100 Level ADVANCED Address 1221 Control IFD Determines the level of direct current injected during the holding function To activate this function set a value other than zero in parameter C221 DC level is expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the controlled motor Function C222 C223 C224 Ramp braking time for DCB Range 2 32000 2 32000 msec Default See Table 52 Level ENGINEERING 1222 Address 1223 1224 Control IFD and VIC Function This parameter represents the time required for flux weakening before DCB 250 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 22 23 In the case of power failure the inverter can be kept powered on by exploiting the kinetic energy of the motor and 24 the load energy recovered due to motor slowing down is used to power the inverter thus avoiding loosing the inverter control when a black out occurs 2 5 All parameters relating to the Power Down function are included in the Power Down submenu in the Configuration menu The following options are available parameter C225 2 6 the Power Down function is inhibited factory setting In this case only it is possible to enable alarm A064 mains loss by setting C233 to Yes YES after the time set in C226 Powe
223. ctive value 1 or inactive value of each preset input signal determines a bit logic binary number where SPEED VAR O is 3 1 the less significant bit bit while SPEED VAR 2 is the most significant bit bit 3 as shown in Tables 64 and 65 3 2 Function If one of these functions is not set the relative bit is zero Table 67 Selection of the Speed Reference Variation 3 3 i Variation of the Selected Speed Reference SPEED VARIATION 2 SPEED VARIATION SPEED VARIATION 0 34 Table 68 Variation of selected Speed Reference 3 5 MULTISPEEDT 1 1 1 1 _ 5 e ta m P115 P116 117 118 119 120 121 39 If one of the functions above is not set its relative bit is zero 4 O For example if C175 and C177 are INACTIVE 0 and C176 is programmed for one terminal only variation 2 corresponding to parameter P116 can be selected In any case the output speed must never exceed the max allowable speed even when a higher speed is required 4 1 Table NOTE Inactive Input 4 2 1 gt Active Input 229 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C178 PID Up Down Reset Input A lnactive MDI8 inactive Level ADVANCED Address 1178 This function resets the variation of the PID reference obtained with the A and V keys on the KEYPAD page of the user interf
224. cy Input menu set the source for Encoder A speed reference set C189 A REF B NO if also encoder B or frequency input FIN B are used see programming options for C189 in the Encoder Frequency Input section Set the number of pulse rev for the encoder being used parameter C190 In the Encoder Frequency Input menu set the source for Encoder B speed reference set C189 B REF if also encoder A or frequency input FIN A are used see programming options for C189 in the Encoder Frequency Input section Set the number of pulse rev for the encoder being used parameter C191 Checking the Reference Sign 32 317 If the sign for the reference from encoder is not correct reverse it by setting C199 FBK XX REF YES SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTEONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 6 FIRST STARTUP For the wiring of signals and the power of the inverter please refer to the Hardware manual 6 1 IFD Type Motor Control SINUS PENTA inverters are factory set with the IFD application software making it possible to perform the first startup of the drive The terminal default functions are given in this section For more details please check the present Programming Manual 1 Wiring 2 Power on 3 Parameter alteration A Supply voltage 5 Motor parameters 6 Autotune 7 Overload 8 Startup Follow the instructions stated in sections Caution Statements and In
225. d Error P130 For speed errors lower than or equal to 296 of the motor rated speed the speed regulator adopts the min coefficients i e parameters P126 determining the lesser integral coefficient 1 P126 and P128 Error P131 If the speed error exceeds the second error threshold the speed regulator shall quickly make up for the greater error so it uses the highest coefficients i e P125 determining the greater integral coefficient 1 P125 and P129 P130 Error P131 When the speed error is included between the two error thresholds the speed regulator will use coefficients that are dynamically linked with the speed error see figure below Integral coefficient 1 P126 err P130 1 125 1 126 P131 P130 Proportional coefficient P128 130 P129 JP128 P131 P130 Integral Proportional P000264 B coefficient coefficient P125 P129 P128 1 126 error rpm rpm P130 P130 Figure 15 Dual Parameterization Function Example 108 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICA 16 2 List of Parameters from P125 to P152 Table 17 List of Parameters P125 P152 Mot3 Min prop coefficient 10 00 P152 Symmetry regulation of ENGINEERING 0 752 three phase current we Bonn P125 P135 P145 Min Integral Time 10 1 32000 0 001 32 000 Disable ms Default 500 ms EA BASIC 725 De EM 35
226. d ENABLE inputs are on Function NOTE If multiple terminal boards are selected with parameters C140 C141 C142 simply open and close the ENABLE terminal MDI2 in one of the active terminal boards to restart the inverter C182 Multiproaramming enablin Range Inactive Active Default Inactive Level ENGINEERING 182 With this function 2 programs may be set for the same terminal not all combinations are possible For each function to be enabled the software will refuse illegal configurations by displaying ILLEGAL DATA when attempting to enter a new illegal value Function C183 Fluxing max time before inverter disabling 65000 0 65000 ms Disable Level ADVANCED 1183 and FOC This function disables the inverter if the fluxing time period is longer than the time set if ENABLE is closed but not START To restore motor fluxing disable and enable the ENABLE command or send a START command when ENABLE is closed Function AN NOTE This time is added to Fluxing ramp time C041 C084 C127 C184 Fluxing at activation only with START closed 8 Default Level ADVANCED ele EM 1194 VIC and FOC Fluxing may be carried out only when the START command is closed 232 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING Z INSTRUCTIONS RONICA C185 STOP Mode 2 2 as 0 1 0 D
227. d Ramp 3 Acceleration Time Range Default Level Address Function 0 327 00 s if P020 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if P020 0 gt 0 1 5 0 32700 s if P020 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 s if 20 0 10s 10 sec ADVANCED 615 0 32700 Same as ramp 1 see P009 to be able to apply ramp 3 to the reference the multiramp digital NOTE In order inputs must be programmed and ramp 3 selected see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 1 Speed Ramp 3 Deceleration Time 0 327 00 s if 20 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if 02020 gt 0 1 s 0 32700 s if 20 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 s if 20 0 gt 10 5 0 32700 Default 10 sec Level Address Function ADVANCED 616 Same as ramp 1 see In order to be able to apply ramp 3 to the reference the multiramp digital inputs must be programmed and ramp 3 selected see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 77 317 1 2 3 4 5 9 Q 10 20 21 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P018 Speed Ramp 4 Acceleration Time 0 327 00 5 if 20 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if P02020 gt 0 1 5 0 32700 s if 20 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 s if 20 0 gt 10 5 Default 10 sec 0 32700 Level ADVANCED Address 618 Function Same as ramp 1 see P009 NOTE In order to be able to apply ramp 4 to the reference the multiramp digital inputs must be programmed and ramp 4 selected see DIGI
228. d alarm ADVANCED 0 IDisabledi 2 6 ADVANCED 0 Disabled ADVANCED 1032 Reduction in quadratic torque curve 1075 27 ADVANCED 1118 ADVANCED 1033 ateq revs re ming O In ADVANCED 1076 2 quadratic torque curve ADVANCED 1119 ADVANCED See Table 52 2 O C077 M2 Voltage Preboost ADVANCED See Table 52 C120 ADVANCED See Table 52 C035 Voltage Boost at 5 of the motor rated 3 AE ADVANCED C036 ADVANCED Voltage Boost at programmable 3 1 a AE ADVANCED C037 E ADVANCED 3 2 Frequency for application of voltage Boost at programmable frequency NEED ADVANCED C038 3 3 C081 Autoboost 34 35 36 3 7 39 40 41 42 187 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 008 Mains Rated Voltage 200 240 V 21 Regen 380 480 V 481 500 V AT Regen 500 575 9I Regen 575 690 V 6T Regen 380 480 V MN Default Level BASIC Address 1008 This parameter defines the rated voltage of the mains powering the inverter thus allowing to obtain voltage ranges to be used for the inverter operation The setting of this parameter depends on the Function Inverter voltage class To supply the inverter with a not stabilized DC source it is necessary to use the equivalent AC voltage range see table 50 below DO NOT USE xT Regen settings in this case Table 51 Equival
229. d and scaled with respect to the min rom and max rpm set in P073 74 Because the max speed of the motor controlled by the inverter is 1500 rpm C029 the speed reference is 1500 rpm 236 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 RONICAS 29 2 List of Parameters from C189 to C199 22 Table 69 List of Parameters C189 C199 2 3 C189 Encoder Frequency input operating BASIC 1189 Not used mode Not used 2 5 C192 Speed searching error timeout ENGINEERING 1192 5 005 CI93 Error between reference and speed ENGINEERING 1193 300rpm 26 C195 Filter time constant over value of ENGINEERING 1195 5 0 ms 2 7 feedback from encoder C194 Tracking error alarm enabling ENGINEE C196 Filter time constant over value of ENGINEERING 1196 5 0 ms reference from encoder 2 a C197 Number of channels of Encoder A ENGINEERING 1197 channels C198 Number of channels of Encoder B ENGINEERING 1198 ee dcus channels ENICSINIEEDINICS O Fdbk NO C199 Encoder sign reversal ENGINEERING 1199 3 C189 Encoder Frequency Input Operating Mode 3 1 Range See Table 70 Default OY Not used Not used 32 Level BASIC 1199 This parameter determines the operating mode of quick acquisition 33 digital inputs If MDI8 is used as a frequency input the optional board for encoder B is not required Digital input MDI6 may be used as a freq
230. d is executed Default 1012 Is set to zero Level BASIC ele EE 1399 This parameter saves and restores the entire set of parameters that can be accessed by the user 0 2 4 5 11 2 Restore Backup the parameters stored in the Backup zone are copied and stored in the WORK zone They represent the new RAM parameterisation the previous RAM parameters are cleared Backup Work 4 Save Backup the parameters in the WORK zone are saved in a copy of the Backup zone Work Backup 5 Save Work the current values of the parameters stored in RAM are saved in the non volatile memory in the Work zone All the parameters are saved with this one command RAM Work 11 Restore Default factory setting values are restored for all parameters each factory setting value is stored in the non volatile memory in the Work zone Default Work 290 317 SINUS PENTA 2 INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING 41 ALARMS AND WARNINGS If a protection trips or the inverter enters the emergency mode the inverter is locked CAUTION and the motor starts idling 41 1 A s The inverter alarms are detailed in the sections below What Happens When a Protection Trips Before operating the inverter in emergency conditions read this and the following section What To Do When an Alarm Trips carefully When a protection or an alarm trips the ALARM LED on the keypad com
231. d the max value of the PID reference set in parameters P245 P246 Address 1696 This is the measure of the PID reference set via serial link and expressed as a percentage E Always active 52 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS M047 PID Reference from Field Bus Address Function Range Active Address Function Range Active Address Function MO50 Encoder Reference Range Active Address Function M051 Frequency Input Reference Range Active Address Function 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max value of the PID reference set in parameters 245 246 10000 Always active 1697 This is the measure of the PID reference set by the field bus and expressed as a percentage 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max value of the PID feedback set in parameters 247 248 10000 Always active 1698 This is the measure of the PID feedback set via serial link and expressed as a percentage 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max value of the PID feedback set in parameters P247 P248 10 10000 Always active 1699 This is the measure of the PID feedback set via field bus and expressed as a percentage 32000 32000 rpm Always active 1700
232. description of the serial links and connections For a greater immunity against communication interference an optional Lines RS232 and RS485 can interface with board ES822 optoisolated serial board ES822 may be used instead of serial link RS485 Please refer to the Sinus Penta Installation Manual for the description of the optional optoisolated board The parameters described in this menu are R parameters Once changed and stored they become active only once the inverter is switched again or when the control board is reset by holding down the RESET key for more than 5 secs Inverters of the SINUS PENTA series may be connected to peripheral devices through a serial link This enables both reading and writing of all parameters normally accessed through the display keypad Two wire RS485 is used which ensures better immunity against disturbance even on long cable paths thus reducing the possibility for communication errors Two serial links are available Serial Link O is provided with a 9 pole male D connector Serial Link 1 is provided with an RJA5 connector or a threephone connector connected to the display keypad The display keypad connected through connector 45 dialogues correctly with the inverter using the default values preset in the parameter set of serial link 1 The inverter will typically behave as a slave device i e it only answers to queries sent by another device
233. e Sexe vxo oe 30 5 4 Configuring a Feedback from 31 5 5 Configuring a Reference from es certe o ea pte REPREHENDERE HESS ees 32 EE Sub ub erem _________ ____ __ ___ 6 33 6 1 IFD Type M tor nie M Rm 33 6 2 E e I MO 35 6 3 zc MM deed Mente Me 37 Zs MEA URE MENU __ __ ___ _ ________ ____ _6___ 41 Tel Uc e E E 4 72 Mator Measures 42 7 3 PID Regulator AG _ ____________________ 47 7 4 Digtal 49 0 e cig ks 1 51 7 6 Digital CRM _ ________ __ 54 7 7 PTO CNG AC S11 CS PYG _ _ 55 7 8 Digital Inputs eins _______ __ __ ___ 56 SINUS PENTA 9 PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS ELETIRONICASANTERN 7 9 Trip Log Menu Fault LISI RR Era 57 7 10 PowerOff Log Menu Power List ne Hee nennen enn nenne en eee 58 8 PRODUCI MENU E _____ _ _ ____ _ _6_ 6_8 _ 59 8 1 59 8 2 P263 Paramet
234. e Where Rs Stator resistance wires included Rr Rotor resistance l Full leakage inductance Mutual inductance not required for motor activation 5 Slip t rot M Rr rotor time constant 180 317 SINUS PENTA G INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING Because the motor characteristics are generally unknown the Sinus Penta is capable of automatically determining the motor characteristics see FIRST STARTUP and AUTOTUNE MENU In any case some parameters may be manually adjusted to meet the requirements of special applications The parameters used for the different control algorithms are stated in the table below Table 47 Motor Parameters Used by Control Algorithms Stator resistance Mutual inductance Rotor time constant leakage inductance W Used Not used A 25 1 4 Because the value of the stator resistance is used for any type of control always perform the autotune procedure with 1073 Motor Tune and 1074 0 no rotation NOTE V F PATTERN IFD ONLY This group of parameters which is included in the Motor Control Menu defines the V f pattern trend of the inverter when it is used as an IFD control algorithm By programming the parameter type of the V curve on f e g C013 for motor 1 it is possible to adopt the following curves e Constant torque e Quadratic e Free setting The diagram below i
235. e alarm send a RESET command A041 IGBT Fault Side A Generic IGBT Hardware alarm side Event Power converter A generated a generic alarm 31919330 e Electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference cause e Overcurrent IGBT overtemperature IGBT fault 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET command 2 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service Solution A044 SW Overcurrent SW Overcurrent Event Immediate current limit tripped e Abrupt variations of the connected load e Output short circuit or ground short circuit e Considerable electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference Possible cause If alarm A044 tripped while accelerating the acceleration ramp is too short If alarm A044 tripped while decelerating the deceleration ramp is too short 1 Check that the inverter and the motor are properly dimensioned with respect to the connected load 2 Make sure that no short circuit is to be found between two phases or between one phase and the grounding outgoing from the inverter terminals U V W Remove voltage from the motor set IFD control and operate the inverter in no load conditions 3 Check that the command signals are sent to the inverter using Colson screened cables where required see the Installation Instructions manual Look for any eventual external sources for electromagnetic disturbance check wiring and make sure that antidis
236. e brake and the closing of the electromechanical brake For a description of the advantages of programming specific parameters for the lifting application see the BRIDGE CRANE MENU 4 11 Setting of two command sources and an alternative reference It is possible to program a digital input as the vector between 2 command sources and an alternative reference For example for a desired vector for the preselection of a command B mode with reference and commands of the inverter from Field Bus and a mode A with keypad commands and AINT analog input reference The following parameters must be programmed C179 for source selection MDI C140 Source selection of command number 1 Keypad C141 Source selection of command number 2 Field Bus C143 Reference selection 1 AINT C144 Reference selection 2 Field Bus 24 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN With MDI6 digital input from open terminal terminal 19 the reference sources and command n 1 are opened Keypad and AIN1 analog input command A mode By closing MDI the source references and command n 2 are selected Field Bus command B mode If in this example C179 Disable the two command sources Keypad and Field Bus WARNING are considered in OR and the two reference sources Field Bus and AINT are considered in sum See parameter C179 of the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 4 12 Fire Mode By activating the digital input pr
237. e for Serial Link 0 D9 pole Function Range 1 10000 1 10000 msec Default 2 msec Level ENGINEERING Address 591 This parameter determines the limit time when no character is received from serial link O 9 pole male D connector and the message sent from the master to the inverter is considered as ended ROO5 Watchdog Time for Serial Link 0 D9 pole Range O 60000 O 6000 0 sec Level ENGINEERING Address 592 If not set at zero this parameter determines the time limit after which alarm A61 WDG Serial O Alarm trips if the inverter does not receive any legal message through serial link O 9 pole male D connector ROO6 Parity Bit for Serial Link D9 pole Function Function 0 Disabled 1 Stop bit 1 Disabled 2 Stop bit 2 Even 1 Stop bit 3 Odd 1 Stop bit Default 1 Disabled 2 Stop bit Level ENGINEERING Address 593 This parameter determines whether the parity bit is used or not when creating the MODBUS message through serial link 9 pole male D connector ROO8 Inverter MODBUS Address for Serial Link O RJ45 1 247 1 247 Default Level ENGINEERING 0 3 Function Address 595 This parameter determines the address assigned to the inverter connected Function to the network through RS485 of serial link 1 RJ45 connector 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 40 4l 42 281 317 SINU
238. e of the reference signals from 9 different sources 2 O the source of the torque limit reference through parameter C147 With this parameter it is possible to select the reference source from 9 different sources 30 Therefore it is possible to select and enable different command sources hardware or virtual sources different speed or torque references hardware or virtual sources and enable an external torque limit The inverter commands may be sent from 3 1 E the hardware terminal board terminal board on board ES821 logically separated between terminal A and terminal B a keypad 3 2 e remote virtual terminal board through serial link with MODBUS communication protocol e remote virtual terminal board through Field bus optional board 3 3 Multiple terminal boards may also be enabled up to 3 terminal boards with parameters C140 C141 C142 in this case the inverter will apply logic functions OR or AND to the different terminals to obtain the activated terminal 4 board see section 27 1 1 The following references and torque limit signals may be sent 3 D E three analog inputs acquired on the hardware terminal board REF AINT AIN2 frequency input FIN e encoder input 3 6 e keypad serial link with MODBUS communication protocol e Field bus optional board 3 Up Down from MDI Up and Down digital inputs Multiple reference sources may be enabled at the same time up to 4 reference sources with param
239. e type of reference configured when the motor is running The percentage value of the PID output relates to the instant value of the speed torque reference For example if the speed reference of the active motor is 800 and the PID output is ignored if this drops to 50 the overall speed setpoint will be 800 800 50 100 1200rpm therefore the reference sign can never be reversed by the PID regulator C294 Voltage Output Sum This configuration is active only when the control algorithm of the active motor is the Voltage Frequency In this case the PID regulator output is a correction of the output voltage The percentage value of the PID output relates to the instant voltage value For example if a motor is in the Voltage Frequency mode and at 25 Hz the inverter output voltage is 200V rms with a PID implementation O if the PID implementation drops to 10 the implemented voltage will be 200 200 10 100 180V 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 3 38 39 40 4l 42 2 3 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 36 4 Keeping Fluid Level Constant Example Mains Counts time P d T Si level O n 4 20mA Figure 53 Keeping fluid level constant Example Suppose that the maximum level in the tank is to be kept at 5096 and that a 4 20 level probe is used w
240. eceleration Ramp 1 2 3 Default 0 Deceleration Ramp ADVANCED 2 4 ee 1185 This function makes it possible to select whether the inverter is to be 25 deactivated with a controlled deceleration ramp or idling when the START command is open C186 Fire Mode enabling Input 2 7 o s Inactive MDI8 Inactive ENGINEERING 5 1186 It is possible to set a digital input to activate the Fire Mode see section 2 O Function 4 12 C187 Digital Input for disabling torque limit source ref MA os _______ 32 ADVANCED 55 1187 This function sets a digital input for disabling the limit of the external 33 eerte torque When the digital input set for C187 is active the torque limit will be based upon the parameters of the LIMITS MENU when the motor is 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 233 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS INSTRUCTIONS A 29 ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 29 1 Overview Three quick acquisition digital inputs are available in the Sinus Penta control board e MDI6 ECHA FINA e MDI7 ECHB MDI8 FINB which can be used as encoder reading encoder A or as frequency inputs In addition by using optional board ES836 see the Sinus Penta Installation Instructions manual an additional encoder can be connected encoder B
241. ect on the enabling disabling mode of the RUN command it can be enabled disabled using the START and STOP keys or the START STOP and REVERSE keys instead of the START key as an ON OFF switch factory setting If the inverter is enabled Press START to enable the inverter RUN Press STOP to disable the inverter RUN reference is set to zero so the speed or torque setpoint decreases to zero based on the preset deceleration ramp Function In case of preset STOP the keypad and or more terminal boards may be enabled at a time In this case the START key and the STOP key in the display keypad are active and can enable or disable the inverter RUN The STOP is a normally closed input signal With the factory setting only the hardware terminal board selected with command source 1 C140 1 is active with the switch operated mode 150 0 To switch to the key operated mode set the STOP input C150 z0 The keypad and other NOTE terminal boards may be selected in key operated mode only If the STOP input is not programmed and the switch operated mode is active the keypad may be selected as the only command source 140 5 C141 0 C142 0 NOTE The STOP function has priority over the START function if both inputs are active the STOP input prevails Therefore the STOP input acts as a key and as a switch NOTE When the inverter is disabled the STOP button the START button and the START key and the STOP key in the display k
242. ed in the Keypad page may be customised see parameters P268b P268e in DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU By using the SAVE ENTER key it is possible to have access to the help page of the Keypad which shows the measures displayed in the Keypad page 1 11 _ SAVE ENTER Key The SAVE ENTER key makes it possible to scroll down within the menus during navigation and when in a general page of parameters makes it possible for alterations See Figure 2 Example of navigation From the Keypad pages the SAVE ENTER key gives access to the help page of the Keypad which shows the measures displayed in the keypad page 10 ll 1 13 l4 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 19 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO 1 12 Signal LEDs in the display keypad There are 11 LEDs on the display keypad module the four line liquid crystal display of sixteen characters a buzzer and 12 keys The display shows the values of the parameters the diagnostic measures and the value of the variables elaborated by the inverter The explanations of the signal LEDs are summarised in the figure below which also makes it possible to identify their position on the front of the display keypad module REF LED Green Reference for speed frequency or torque NU Motor accelerating Voltage or current LIMIT LED Yellow No active limitations deceleratina P00030
243. ed to the preset max output value maximum absolute value between P182 and P183 see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU Function M059 Analog Output AO2 100 Active Always active Address 1709 Value percent of analog output AO2 referred to the preset max output value maximum absolute value between P190 and P191 see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU Function MO60 Analog Output Range 100 Always active Address 1710 Value percent of analog output AO3 referred to the preset max output value maximum absolute value between P198 and P199 see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU Function 54 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z LETTRONICA 7 7 Autodiagnostics Menu In this menu it is possible to check the reading of the analog channels used for temperature sensors and the relevant temperature values M062 Ambient temperature Measure 32000 320 0 C Active Always active Address 1711 ailes Ambient temperature measured on the surface of the control board M064 IGBT Temperature Measure 32000 320 0 Always active Address 1714 Measure of the temperature in IGBTs Note Not all inverter sizes are provided with this sensor Function MO89 Inverter State Range See Table 86 Active Always active 10 Address 1739 Function Describes the curr
244. eed Searching Function is disabled 38 39 40 4l 42 ON ON Figure 43 Manual DCB Example 2 247 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO IFD Control when the Speed Searching function is enabled C245 Prematurely disable the manual braking command to activate the Speed Searching function When the motor speed searching occurs the motor speed is increased depending on the preset acceleration ramp see Figure 43 Inc f C720 Command ON OFF Start Command ON e d 56 Figure 44 Manual DCB Example 3 Motor Speed DC Braking and Manual DCB Command and START Command if t1 t the control algorithm is IFD and the Speed Searching Function is enabled 248 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 31 2 List of Parameters from C215 to C224 22 List of Parameters C215 C221 2 3 Table 73 List of Parameters C215 C221 24 C215 Enabling DCB at Stop function ADVANCED 1215 0 NO 2 5 C216 Enabling DCB at Start function ADVANCED 1216 0 NO ADVANCED 0 5 C218 DCB at Start duration ADVANCED 1218 05 2 6 ADVANCED 1219 50 ADVANCED 1220 100 2 7 C221 DC current in holding ADVANCED 1221 096 C222 Ramp braking time for Motor 1 DCB ENGINEERING 1222 See Table 52 C223 Ramp braking time for Motor 2 DCB ENGINEERING 1223 See Table 52 2 a C224 Ramp braking time for Motor 3 DCB ENGINEERIN
245. eeps decelerating motor idling If power supply is restored the same conditions as described in the step above occur see Stop instead of stopping the motor the inverter is put in stand by DCB When decelerating once the speed value set in C235 is attained DC braking occurs Its duration depends on the speed value set in C235 and on DC braking parameters see DC BRAKING MENU t C217 C235 C219 with C235 C219 equal to max 10 If power supply is restored the same conditions as described in the step above occur see Stop instead of stopping the motor the inverter performs DC braking C235 Motor speed at the end of Power Down 5000 0 5000 rpm Default 0 Level ENGINEERING Motor Speed at the Address 1235 End of Power Down Motor speed at the end of Power Down If C234 is set as Stand by the inverter is put on stand by if C234 is set as DCB it determines DC braking Both conditions occur during the deceleration ramp due to Power Down and when the speed value set in C235 is attained Function 256 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 33 SPEED SEARCHING MENU 33 1 Overview When a command is sent to disable the inverter the motor idles When the inverter activates again the Speed Searching function allows the inverter to reach the motor speed All parameters relating to this function are included in the Speed Searchi
246. el ADVANCED 1020 Address 1063 1106 This parameter defines the power absorbed by the motor at rated voltage and rated rpm when no load is connected to the motor Function 191 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO C021 C064 C107 Motor No Load Current 1 100 1 100 Default 0 Level BASIC 1021 Address 1064 1107 This parameter defines the current absorbed by the motor at rated voltage and rated rpm when no load is connected to the motor is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current C018 CO61 C104 For a proper tuning of the current loops required for FOC control enter a value Function other than zero If the stator resistance is tuned 1073 1 Motor Tune 1074 no rotation and the no load current parameter is zero a value for a first attempt is assigned to this parameter depending on power and pole torques of the connected motor C022 C065 C108 Motor Stator Resistance 0 32000 0 000 32 0000 BITES See Table 52 ADVANCED 1022 Address 1065 1108 This parameter defines stator resistance Rs With a star connection it matches with the value of the resistance of one phase half the Function resistance measured between two terminals with a delta connection it matches with 1 3 of the resistance of one phase Autotune is always recommended 0 32000 0 00 320 00mH Default See Tab
247. en OV and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 4 O 20 mA Unipolar current input between 0 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values to select the proper electric circuit for the analog signal processing voltage signal or current signal The value set in parameter P055 must match with the status of switch SW1 B allowing 56 Value of input AINT for generating min reference 100 100 if P055 0 10 0V 10 0V ifPO55 0 10V 200 200 if P055 1 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO55 1 20 mA 40 200 if P055 2 4 0mA 20 0 mA if PO55 2 4 20 mA 100 if P055 0 0 V 10 0V if P055 3 0 10V O 200 if PO55 4 0 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO55 4 0 20 mA Default 4 0 Level ADVANCED e 650 This parameter selects the value for input AINT signal for minimum reference or better the reference set in C028 Master mode or in CO47 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor 3 is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used 20 21 93 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P057 Value of input AINI for generating max reference 100 100 if P055 0 10 0V 10 0V if P0552 0 10 200 200 if P055 1 20 0 mA 20 0 mA ifP055 1 20 mA 40 200 if P055 2 4 0 20 0 mA if P05
248. en the reference sign is reversed the direction of rotation of the connected motor is not immediately reversed the setpoint decreases to zero following the preset deceleration ramp and it increases up to the reference value having the opposite sign following the preset acceleration ramp NOTE NOTE CAUTION gt gt gt C151a REVERSE B Input T o 8 lacive Mey Level ADVANCED 1279 The REVERSE B Input acts as the REVERSE Input see C151 when Terminal Board B is active Function 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 219 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO Figure 36 illustrates the logic diagram for processing the START REV Cw CCw functions and the START STOP REV keys on the display keypad if the STOP function is not programmed STOP Not PROGRAM C150 0 Keypad Disabled Keypad Enabled Inverter Enabled keySTART lt gt Start Ok START Start Ok REVERSE keySTOP Flip Flop with Set Cw CCw on ise signal Reference Flip Flop level Reverse Reset key REV Reverse Reference Flip Flop Reset P000347 b Figure 36 Controlling Run and Direction when STOP Input is not programmed 220 317 SINUS PENTA 2 TRONICA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Figure 37 illustrates the processing logic di
249. ence between AC mains range and DC range for stabilizing the DC bus select xT Regen where x relates to the inverter voltage class If the inverter is DC powered through a regenerative Sinus Penta or other drive 009 Number of Configured Motors Range 1 3 Default 1 Level ENGINEERING Address 1009 This parameter determines the number of motors to be configured The active motor is selected through digital inputs programmed with C173 and C174 see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU The programming parameters of the Motor Control 2 Menu can be accessed only if C009 2 or 3 the programming parameters of the Motor Control 3 Menu can be accessed only if C009 3 Function 188 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C010 53 96 Type of Control Algorithm Range Default Level Address Function This parameter sets the type of control algorithm to be used Type of controls 0 IFD V f control 1 VTC Sensorless Vector Torque control 2 FOC Field Oriented Control V f_control allows to control the motor by producing voltage depending on frequency is possible to configure several types of V f patterns see V f Pattern IFD Only Sensorless vector control processing the machine equations depending on the equivalent parameters of the asynchronous machine as stator resistance and leakage inductance C022 C023 for motor 1 C065 066 for motor 2 C108 C109 f
250. ence is a speed reference 3 2 Torque Limit references If the type of control used is a speed control e g for Motor 1 011 Speed and the algorithm 15 or FOC itis possible to program a source as torque limit see parameter C147 in CONTROL METHOD MENU 3 3 PID References If the internal PID regulator is enabled C291 different from disabled its reference is given by the sum of the three sources programmed as references see parameters C285 C287 in PID CONFIGURATION MENU 3 4 PID Feedback References The PID teedback is the sum of the three sources programmed as feedback see parameters C288 C290 in PID CONFIGURATION MENU 22 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 4 PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS Q 4 1 Multimotor 1 The Penta inverter has the special feature of being able to set up 3 independent sets of parameters so as to allow for the configuration of three different control algorithms on three types of different motors For example by 2 programming e C009 Number of motors configured 2 e C173 Digital input per motor 2 MDI 3 With the MDI6 digital input open the parameters are used for the motor control and are those relative to motor 1 whilst with MDI6 closed the parameters are relative to motor 2 see MOTOR CONTROL MENU and LIMITS MENU 4 2 Voltage Frequency Pattern If using an IFD Volt Freq control algorithm e g motor 1 C010 IFD Tens Freq it is po
251. ending on the preset control mode DC braking level and duration are set in parameters 2 a C220 Expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the controlled motor 2 C218 Expressed in seconds loc f C220 32 33 34 Enable ON 35 36 37 38 39 40 Output speed holding and DC braking current when DCB Hold DCB at Start functions are active 4 1 42 Figure 39 DCB Hold and DCB at Start 243 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO The non condensing function consists in injecting DC to the motor DC current brakes the motor and heats the motor windings thus avoiding condensation This function is active only for the IFD control if C221 is other than zero and ENABLE ON For the other control algorithms the non condensing function is performed by injecting current during motor fluxing Parameter C221 expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the controlled motor determines the level of direct current injected to the braking resistance Parameters used to program this function are the following C216 enabling DCB at Start C218 setting the duration of DCB at Start C220 the intensity of the DC braking C221 the intensity of the holding current this function is active for the IFD control only loc f C220 Enable ON OFF Start Command ON OFF Figure 40 DCB at Start with VTC Control Output Speed and DC Braking
252. ent condition of the inverter MO90 Active Alarm Yet Always active 1740 ases Alarm tripped 11 12 M090 999 See Table 84 13 14 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 55 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 7 8 Digital Inputs Settings Menu In this submenu it is possible to check the functions assigned to the digital inputs Table 4 Codification of the Functions Assigned to the Digital Inputs Stop function Startup with negative speed ENABLE in safety condition Multispeed O DC Braking More than one function programmed on the same input Reference Variation 1 56 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 7 9 Trip Log Menu Fault List Scroll the Trip Log Menu to display the codes of the last eight alarms tripped Press the SAVE ENTER key to access the alarm submenu and navigate to each value measured by the inverter when the alarm tripped The next page shows a navigation example for the Trip Log Menu relating to alarm n 1 in particular Note that 1 is the last alarm tripped and n 8 is the first alarm tripped The measures marked with are the same measures used in this section Example of navigation in the Trip Log Menu SAVE ENTER E H gt ESC 10 UE Ev wer NN E m O 57 317
253. erminals 1 2 5 6 7 8 Henne enn 86 12 3 List or Parameters from POSO to POZA ___ 90 13 MULTISPEED MENU 22a rU ___ 101 1 3 1 KM 101 13 2 List of Parameters from 8 to he hehehe ee eese see esee isse eese se ee eese nene 101 14 PROHIBIT SPEED MENU 6 SEIS PUN PPS 104 14 1 UNT 104 14 2 List of Parameters from P105 to P108 me hehehe ee ee e eese se eese ee ese ee esee ene 105 15 PERCENT VARIATION OF REFERENCE MENU ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccceccs 106 15 1 QU se aneeee 106 15 2 BsrotPardmelters rom PTS to P 12 _ UR PSU 107 16 SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccees 108 16 1 108 16 2 List of Parameters from P125 to 152 109 17 REGULATORS aaao aeaa aaa Du PON 111 17 1 Tm 111 17 2 Parameters ronm P199 t0 111 18 ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU 114 18 1 GI MMC I
254. ers and Fire Mode enable 59 9 PASSWORD AND ACCESS LEVEL MENU cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccccccccescccccs 62 9 1 eU NU PM 62 9 2 List of Parameters from POOO to se e e eese see ee eese eene 62 10 DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU peev ee 64 10 1 PINE T ________ eas 64 jG Moe go 48 _______ 64 10 3 Keypad and Local Mode Page II I IRI 65 10 4 List of Parameters from P264 to P269 e meee ente eese see e se eese see este eese ee ee eese eene 66 11 RAMPS LEER 72 11 1 SU RU ___ _____ __4 _6 6 ___ 72 11 1 1 Description of the Speed RAMPS ccccccsscceeccsecceeceeceeeceaeceaeceaeceecseeseceaeceaeceeecaeceeeceeeeseeseesaeeneeeeee 72 11 1 2 Description of the Torque Ramps sssssssssssseseeeeeee e Ie Ie n en mene nennen ree ee ree ree nee renes ene 75 11 2 List or Parameters from POO to POSI 75 12 INPUT REFERENCES MENU cccceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccccccccesccesccescees 83 12 1 Processing Speed Torque References eene hee hee en hee nennen ese es ree ee nennen es 83 12 2 Scaling Analog Inputs REF AINT AIN2 T
255. es bred red set O Ocy so eez 00052 oro 2000 9976 v orri OOZL 045 Osr so eez 00052 ers v c 0061 0001 87z0 0 5 osy 50 eez 00082 ozo 9000 v989 v z COLL 006 8650 095 osy 50 eez 00052 ozo 2000 sees 096 008 vzco 095 osy 00 eez 00082 0920 8000 806 v z 088 ozz 2570 095 osy 50 eez 000852 oco OZ o 6620 095 osy 50 ore 000852 070 oioo lZr 099 oss 9950 095 osy 50 916 00082 0960 2100 Lose z 009 2120 oss osy 990 6 01 00052 090 2100 0520 OFS osy 00 6911 00082 080 z oser sze 9120 OFS osy 650 00052 060 8100 6602 sre 0020 OFS 650 1951 00052 OL S9i0O tlZ z oe ooe 6 10 OFS ooe 50 79 1 00052 01 276 s orz 2910 OES ooe 00 9v l oo osz 001 oeoo 929 s osz Siz 0510 OES ooe 7951 oo osz 001 oroo ger Ol siz s i 6210 05 ooe 650 011 00082 001 OvOO ewei 081 Ello OES ooe 01 ess 00082 001 0900 5 sei 9800 ozs ooe 01 829 00082 021
256. es on and the page displayed is the first page of the TRIP LOG With the factory setting and the inverter is switched on after an alarm has tripped and was not reset it remains in the emergency condition If the inverter is in emergency mode when switched on this could be due to an alarm tripped before the inverter was reset To avoid storing the alarms tripped before the inverter is switched off set parameter C257 in the Autoreset Menu The inverter stores the moment when an alarm trips in the TRIP LOG supply time and operation time in addition to the inverter status when the alarm tripped some measures sampled when the alarm tripped are stored in the trip log The reading and registration of the fault list can be very useful to detect the cause for the alarm trip and its possible solution see also Trip Log Menu Fault List Alarms A001 A039 relate to the main microcontroller DSP Motorola of control board ES821 which detected a fault on the control board fault list is available for Alarms A001 A039 and no Reset command can be sent via serial link alarms can be reset through the RESET terminal on the terminal board or the RESET key on the keypad The software for the keypad interface is not available the inverter parameters and measures cannot be accessed via serial link It is useless to reset alarms A033 and A039 as they indicate that flash memory is not provided with relative software the only way to reset alarms A0
257. esponds to the time the speed reference takes to reach the max speed from O rpm as an absolute value between min speed and max speed of the selected motor C028 and C029 for the first motor and so on The time unit of measure may have the following values 0 0 015 1 0 15 2 15 310s The programmable range may be Os 327000s Example of a speed ramp Table 9 Example of a Speed Ramp 10 0 327005 0 327000s 72 317 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS The factory setting of the unit of measure is 0 1 s the ramp time is 10 sec Figure 4 S ramps Application Example It is also possible to select the rounding off and the rounding off percentage for the 4 stages of starting ramp up and the starting ramp down and for the end ramp up and the end ramp down S ramps 5 ramps rounding off makes it possible to reach the reference end value with a zero tangent both while accelerating and while decelerating thus suppressing torque peaks that could damage mechanical couplings The rounding off is expressed as a percentage of the ramp time it relates to if used it allows to increase the preset ramp time by half the sum value of the two rounding off values Its effect is shown in the figures below Example 9 10sec P021 1111 binary rounding off selected for all four ramps P022 5096 P023 50 T
258. eters C143 39 C144 C145 C146 in this case the inverter will consider the sum of all active reference as the main reference Finally it s also possible to select dynamically between two command sources and two reference sources using the 39 digital input configured as Source Selection see C179 4l 42 203 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 27 1 1 COMMAND SOURCES The inverter commands may be sent from the following sources Disabled Terminal board A Serial link with MODBUS protocol Field bus field bus on optional board Terminal board B Keypad remotable display keypad WN The factory setting enables the same command source Terminal A C140 1 and C141 1 see also DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Both Terminal board A and B refer to the same terminal board on 25821 but allow to switch between one set of START STOP REVERSE commands on three terminals to another set on other three different terminals Most commands may be delayed when enabled or disabled refer to the TIMERS MENU sw pss renew Ie _ e In Local Mode the Only command source is Keypad C141 1141 gt source2 4 71 11 11 ap o P000343 b Figure 34 Selecting the Command Sources If the keypad is not selected as a command source or if the STOP input function is enabled 150 0 more than one command source may be enabled at a time In this case
259. eypad are ignored gt gt 218 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA Z RONICA C150a STOP B Input 8 Inactive ADVANCED 1278 The STOP B Input acts as the STOP Input see C150 when Terminal Board Is active The STOP B is a normally closed input signal C151 REVERSE Input Inactive Inactive Level ADVANCED Address 1151 The REVERSE function carries out a START command but it reverses the motor direction of rotation If both the START and REVERSE inputs are active at the same time the inverter is sent a STOP command If the STOP input function is not programmed C150 0 the REVERSE signal and the START input act as switches otherwise they act as keys Function If the keypad is active pressing the FWD REV key on the display keypad will also reverse the direction of rotation of the connected motor The reference direction of rotation can be reversed with Cw CCw if this is set as well C159 0 Both functions bring about an inversion of the signal if both are active they are both cancelled reciprocally The contemporary enabling of the keypad and terminal is possible only if the STOP C150 0 function is activated In this case the inversion sources may be three REVERSE Cw CCw REV key if two are active they are cancelled reciprocally if three active there is an inversion Wh
260. ference 2 P108 zi 4 v Increasing 2 Reference p Speed P105 P106 P107 Reference P000132 B Figure 13 Prohibit Speed Ranges Figure 11 illustrates different trends of the speed reference when it matches with the max allowable value of a prohibit speed range when decreasing red or when it matches with the min allowable value of a prohibit speed range when increasing blue Example P105 500 rpmProhibit speed 1 P106 650 rpmProhibit speed 2 P107 700 rpmProhibit speed 3 P108 50 5 amplitude of prohibit speed ranges In this case the second and third prohibit ranges partially match because the max allowable value of the second range 700 rpm is higher than the min allowable value of the third range 650 rpm thus forming one prohibit speed range ranging from 600 rpm to 750 rpm 104 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICA 14 2 List of Parameters from P105 to P108 Table 15 List of Parameters P105 P108 P105 Prohibit speed 1 P106 Prohibit speed 2 ADVANCED P107 Prohibit speed 3 ADVANCED P108 Hysteresis band of prohibit speed ranges ADVANCED P105 P106 P107 Prohibit Speed 1 Range 0 32000 0 32000 rpm Defaut CE Level ADVANCED 705 700 707 Determines the intermediate value of the first prohibit speed range This aes value is to be considered as an absolute value i e independent of the speed reference s
261. g current used 249 Speed searching starting level C245 Speed Searching Enabling 1 0 No 1 Yes Default 1 Yes Level ENGINEERING NRI EM 1245 FD Enables speed searching The Speed Searching function is enabled in the following cases l when the ENABLE contact is open and closed before time tSSdis C246 when the DC Braking command is disabled before the preset time is over see DC BRAKING MENU when an alarm is reset with a reference other than 0 before time tssqis C246 Speed Searching disabling if ENABLE is open Wem 3000 0 Always ON 3000 sec Default 1 sec Level ENGINEERING 1 246 Determines the maximum allowable time passing between the inverter disabling and enabling when the Speed Searching function is activated When the inverter is restarted output frequency will depend on the preset acceleration ramp When C246 0 Always ON speed searching will always occur regardless of the time passing between the inverter disabling and enabling C247 Speed searching time as deceleration ramp 1 1000 1 100096 Default 1096 Level ENGINEERING DI N 1247 ere mM Determines the speed searching time expressed as a percentage of the Function deceleration ramp 260 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z RONICA C248 Speed Search
262. g parameter P024 the preset deceleration ramp time is increased 24 2 P025 Deceleration Ramp End Rounding Off Time O 100 0 100 s ME 50 5096 Level ADVANCED Address 625 See function for P023 The only difference is that this rounding off function is Functi applied to the last stage of a deceleration ramp AN NOTE When using parameter P025 the preset deceleration ramp time is increased by 25 2 P026 Torque Ramp Time Up 10 32700 Function of P028 Default 50 sec Level ADVANCED Address 626 Defines the time taken by the torque reference of the selected motor to go to Function zero from max value as an absolute value between Torque min and Torque max CO47 C048 for motor 1 and so on P027 Torque Ramp Time Down O 32700 Function of P028 Default 500 50 sec Level ADVANCED Address 627 Defines the time taken by the torque reference of the selected motor to go from Function max value to zero as an absolute value between Torque min and Torque max CO47 C048 for motor 1 and so on 80 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 P028 Unit of Measure for Torque Ramp Time 0 0 01 5 1 5 0 15 Range 0 3 231s 105 Default 1 gt 50 1s Level ADVANCED Address 628 Defines the unit of measure for the torque ramp times See unit of Punia measure for ramp 1 par P014 P029 Jog Ramp Ac
263. g to the current reference a quantity which will be increased or decreased with a time ramp aei Parameter PO67 indicates the ramp time to increase the reference from zero to the preset speed or torque maximum absolute value i e the max value between absolute values Vel Min and Vel Max or Min and If motor 1 is active Vel Min2 C028 Vel lt 029 Trq Min C047 048 O P068 Storage of UP DOWN at power off 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default 1 Enabled Level ADVANCED 668 If PO68 1 the Speed Torque or PID references added through input digital signals UP and DOWN or with the INC and DEC keys local mode stored at the inverter power off and added to the start reference when the inverter is restarted This function allows storing the reference value obtained with UP and DOWN signals Function 20 21 97 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO 8 Reset UP DOWN Speed Torque at stop Range 0 NO 1 YES 180 h JoNO ADVANCED 740 If PO 8a 1 Yes the Speed Torque reference given by UP DOWN from digital signals UP and DOWN or with the A and keys on the keypad returns to zero each time the START is removed from the inverter and terminates the deceleration ramp PO68b Reset UP DOWN PID at stop ___ __ 053 0
264. gital output energizes only if no alarm trips The torque demand is greater than P302 20 00 Set The digital output de energizes if an alarm trips or if the decelerating speed is lower than the speed value set in P303 50 reset Motor Speed rom A 1500 50 Torque Out 76 100 50 20 Figure 30 Electromechanical Brake Command Example CAUTION Always use the NO contact of the digital output for the electromechanical brake command NOTE For details on using the electromechanical brake for lifting applications see also the BRIDGE CRANE MENU 156 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTEONIC ASANTERN Example 5 Using PWM Function Suppose that the motor of a machine tool is controlled by an inverter The tool must be lubricated based on the cutting speed At max cutting speed the electrovalve controlling lubrication must work for 0 5 sec with a frequency of 1Hz time period of 1 sec at max speed a duty cycle of 5096 Ton T is required with a time period of 1 second the time when the electrovalve opens is inversely proportional to the cutting speed Spdl is the max cutting speed and dicl is the duty cycle required the saw carrier frequency required for PWM must be 1 Hz P213 min value Orpm when speed Orpm the electrovalve is disabled and max value 5 1 100 2 Spdl Supposing that the tool can rotate in both directions that Sod
265. gs Range 1111b all ramps are rounded off P022 Acceleration Ramp Start Rounding Off Time Range 0 100 Default 50 Level ADVANCED O22 Sets the rounding off time period for the first stage of the acceleration ramp This parameter is expressed as a percentage of the acceleration ramp time of the active ramp Example the second ramp is active with an acceleration ramp time of 10 5sec P022 50 Therefore reference acceleration is limited for the first 2 5 sec of the ramp time J Ul 4 UJ NJ Function NOTE When using parameter P022 the preset acceleration ramp time is increased by PO22 2 23 Acceleration Ramp End Rounding Off Time 0 100 0 100 9 Default 50 Level ADVANCED Address 623 Sets the rounding off time period for the end stage of the acceleration Function ramp This parameter is expressed as a percentage of the acceleration ramp time of the active ramp NOTE When using parameter 2 the preset acceleration ramp time is increased by PO23 2 20 21 79 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P024 Deceleration Ramp Start Rounding Off Time O 100 0 100 Default 50 Level ADVANCED Address 624 See function for P022 The only difference is that this rounding off function is applied to the first stage of a deceleration ramp AY NOTE When usin
266. he ENABLE command and wait until encoder tune is complete Once encoder tune is complete the display will show one of the following messages 1 W31 Encoder Ok the speed feedback is correct If the speed detected by the encoder has the opposite signal to that desired by the control the inverter will automatically invert the feedback signal parameter C199 Encoder frequency Input Menu 2 A59 Encoder Fault the speed detected through the encoder is not consistent with the control speed Possible causes e Wrong number of pulse rev of the encoder e Wrong power supply of the Encoder e g 5V instead of 24V check the encoder ratings and the position of jumpers and dip switches for the encoder supply in the optional encoder board e Wrong configuration of the dip switches for the encoder selection push pull or line driver encoder in the optional encoder board No connection to the encoder channel check wiring At least one Encoder channel is faulty replace the encoder First remove the ENABLE command then access the Autotune Menu and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 0 All Auto no rotation Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and until autotune is complete warning W32 Open Enable is displayed The inverter has computed and saved the values for C022 and C023 If alarm A097 Motor wires trips check the motor wiring If alarm A065 Autotune KO trips this means that the ENABLE com
267. he active ramp up to zero rpm when the motor speed is equal to zero the inverter will automatically deactivate The inverter will automatically reactivate if the reference exceeds the value set in parameter 65 as an absolute value Function 96 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LETTRONICA AY NOTE Parameter PO 5 is active in Master mode only i e with a speed reference NOTE Parameter PO 5 is active only when the Speed searching and Power Down functions are disabled 245 0 and 225 0 PO66 Delay disable START at PO65 threshold Range 0 250 sec SERO 10 Disabled Level ADVANCED e 666 If this parameter is other than zero and if also parameter 65 is other than zero the inverter disabling function is enabled if the absolute value of the current speed reference is kept in the prohibit range for a time longer than ades the time set in PO66 reference is set to zero and the motor speed decreases following the active ramp up to zero rpm when the motor speed is equal to zero the inverter will automatically deactivate See also the description of parameter 65 P067 UP DOWN Ramp from keypad and terminal ensem O 6501 sec 6500s Quadratic Default Quadratic Level ADVANCED Dee ME 007 Reference may be increased or decreased with input digital signals UP and DOWN or with INC and DEC keys in the keypad local mode Reference increment or decrement is obtained by addin
268. he control board did not detect any optional encoder board e Incorrect setting of the use of the encoders in parameter C189 e Incorrect programming of digital input functions Optional board for Encoder B is not fitted has been improperly mounted or is faulty Possible connector failure 1 Check and adjust the value set in C189 see ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU Possible cause Solution 2 Check and adjust control function programming for digital inputs MDI6 and MDI7 see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 3 Check if optional encoder board is fitted and if it is properly mounted A083 A084 A085 External Alarm A083 External alarm 1 A084 External alarm 2 A085 External alarm 3 The External Alarm 1 2 3 functioning has been programmed but the relevant digital input is disabled see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU If multiple digital Event command sources are programmed alarms A083 AO085 trip if one of the terminals in the active sources is disabled see CONTROL METHOD MENU The cause for the alarm does not depend on the inverter check for the reason why the contact connected to terminal where the External Alarm function 15 programmed opens Check external signal Possible cause Solution 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 303 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO A091 Braking Res
269. he part of the timers of the MO32digital inputs The inverter uses this terminal board to acquire digital commands Some functions cannot be programmed but they are assigned to special terminals Table 58 Functions that cannot be programmed RESET MDI3 can be disabled with C154 Yes Some terminals in the local hardware terminal board can also be used for other functions Table 59 Terminals used for other inputs MDI6 ECHA channel A of encoder A on the terminal board MDI7 ECHB channel B of encoder A on the terminal board MDI8 FIN frequency input 28 1 1 START TERMINAL 14 MDI1 To activate this input function set the control mode from the terminal control factory setting The START command can also be sent from the keypad display The enabling disabling of the MDI1 input can be delayed by means of timers The START input function is assigned to terminal MDI1 and cannot be set on other terminals the same terminal may be assigned to other functions in addition to START It is possible to set the stalling mode C185 which at the START up command be with the deceleration ramp or idling and also if there is the need to flux the engine VTC FOC only when the START command is shut down and not with ENABLE inactive C184 When START is active also when ENABLE is active RUN is enabled the speed or torque setpoint increases proportionally to the preset ramp until it reaches the active reference IFD control
270. he reference speed the supply voltage to the control section the DC link voltage M029 and the condition of control terminals MO33 Check to see if these readings match with the measured values 10 Additional parameter Note that with parameter standby only condition for altering parameters C it is possible to alter the Cxxx parameters in the CONFIGURATION menu only when the inverter is DISABLED alterations or STOPPED whilst if POO3 Standby Fluxing it is possible to alter these parameters also with the inverter enabled and the motor stopped Before altering any of the parameters remember that the correct code for parameter POOO must be set It may be a good idea to write down any customised parameter in the table on the last pages of the present Programming Manual 11 Reset If an alarm trips find the cause responsible for the alarm and reset the drive Enable input MDI3 terminal 16 for some time or press the RESET on the display keypad 34 317 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTEONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 6 2 VTC Type Motor Control 1 Wiring 2 Power on 3 Parameter alteration A Supply voltage 5 Motor parameters 6 Autotune 7 Overload 8 Startup 9 Speed regulator adjustment 10 Possible failures Follow the instructions stated in sections Caution Statements and Installation Link to terminal ENABLE terminal 15
271. he resulting ramp up time is 009 POO9 PO22 PO23 2 100 10 10 50 50 2 100 15 sec The effect of this rounding off can be seen in the figures below 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 16 1 18 19 20 21 73 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO The figure shows two trends for the ramp reference The first trend has different ramp up and ramp down times and is not rounded off the second trend has the same ramp times but different rounding off values are applied for the start end ramp up down time THIR TNT EN Figure 5 Speed Profile without Rounding Off and with Rounding Off 2 Example In the above figures the run command is represented by the high level of the second signal Note that the time the reference takes to reach constant rpm depends not only on the ramp times but also on the rounding off values you have defined Acceleration RESET function This parameter has effect only if S ramps are used Parameter P031 enables to reset acceleration when reference trends change Whenever a speed reference trend changes the motor acceleration is instantly set to zero and the ramp output reference will be computed considering the preset rounding off see Figure The figure shows the passage from the acceleration stage to the deceleration stage the rounding off value assigned to the speed reference
272. he selected variable AO 1 Table 21 Programming AO ABS 0 10V 3 P179 Max value of the selected variable AO P180 0 000 V Analog output offset AO 1 P181 Filter on analog output AO 1 16 1 P182 Min output value AO with reference to P178 Min output value AOT with reference to P179 19 20 21 119 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 100 200 300 400 500 rpm Figure 19 Curve voltage speed carried out by AO1 Example 2 Example 3 Table 22 Programming ABS 0 10V P176 ABS 0 10V Analog output AO P177 Selected variable analog output 1 P178 Min value of the selected variable AOT P179 Max value of the selected variable AO 500 400 300 200 100 100 200 300 400 500 rpm Figure 20 Curve voltage speed carried out AO1 Example NOTE 10V but based on the selected mode considering the variable as an absolute value the y This programming implies a straight line passing through 500rpm OV and 500rpm min point for output AOT will be 0 rpm 5 V 120 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN Example 4 Table 23 Programming ABS 0 10V P176 ABS 0 10V Analog output AO Selected variable analog output 1 P181 ms Filter on analog output AO N w gt Oo N 5
273. his is the measure of the reference being used for the PID regulator as 19 but multiplied by the gain level set in P257 see also the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU For the display keypad the unit of measure can be programmed with the parameters P267 P267a in the Display Keypad Menu Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min value of the PID feedback set in parameters P247 P248 and on the gain level set in P257 Always on Address 1674 This is the measure of the feedback being used for the PID regulator as MO20 but Function M024 PID Feedback multiplied by the gain level set in P257 see also the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the CONFIGURATION MENU For the display keypad the unit of measure can programmed with the parameters P267 P267a in the Display Keypad Menu 48 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 RONICAS 7 4 Digital Inputs Menu In this submenu it is possible to check the state of the command sources for the digital inputs local terminals serial link and field bus the terminal board resulting from their combination and the terminals which are actually used for the inverter control The terminals which are actually used to control the inverter also consider any timers applied to the digital inputs M031 Delayed Digital inputs Range eee Table 1 Codification of measures M031 M032 Active Always active Address 1681
274. iable comparing value LOWER THAN EQUAL TO Selected variable comparing value ABS GREATER THAN Absolute value selected variable gt comparing value ABS GREATER THAN EQUAL TO Absolute value selected variable gt comparing value ABS LOWER Absolute value selected variable lt comparing value ABS LOWER THAN EQUAL TO Absolute value selected variable lt comparing value This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is NOTE gt 2 Example MDO1 P270 gt 2 Digit 2 3 4 Testing Variable B P274 P283 P292 P301 If an analog variable is selected a logic TEST is performed to obtain a Boolean signal TRUE FALSE Seven different tests are available that can be performed for selected variable B and its comparing value B see Table 31 This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 and lt 9 Example MDO1 2 P270 9 gt Reference threshold for P271 P280 P289 P298 Digit MDOT P275 P284 P293 P302 This defines the comparing value of Test with the first selected variable This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is NOE gt 2 Example MDO1 P270 gt 2 gt Reference threshold for P272 P281 P290 P299 Digit MDO2 3 4 P276 P285 P294 P303 This defines the comparing value of Test B with the first selected variable
275. ier fout Hz 24 24 1 3 VTC CONTROL 25 The only parameter of the Carrier Frequency menu used for VTC control algorithm is C004 allowing to enable silent modulation The modulation frequency to be used is defined by the inverter 2 6 24 1 4 CONTROL 27 FOC control algorithm selects the silent modulation mode C004 and allows to increase carrier frequency when possible FOC algorithm uses a carrier frequency corresponding to 2 a Min 8kHz carrier freq allowed for the inverter size In C002 if you set a higher value than the value resulting from the formula above FOC control will use C002 as 2 9 the modulation frequency 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 175 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 24 2 List of Parameters from C001 to Table 42 List of Parameters C001 C004 C001 ENGINEERING 1001 Table 43 C002 ENGINEERING Table 43 C003 Number of pulses ENGINEERING 1 24 C004 _ Silent modulation ENGINEERING The default values of carrier frequency 1 and C002 and their max values depend on the inverter size Table 43 Default Values and Max Values of the Carrier Frequency Depending on the Inverter Size 0007 5 16 505 0009 5 16 0011 5 16 0014 5 16 0016 5 16 0017 5 16 0020 5 16 i
276. igital Inputs Menu This menu contains the state of the inverter digital inputs and indications of the functions programmed on the digital inputs of the inverter e References Menu This menu contains the values of analog references the encoder input and the frequency input references the speed torque or reference feedback values of the PID coming from serial link or field bus Outputs Menu 10 This menu contains the state of the inverter digital outputs analog outputs and frequency outputs e Autodiagnostics Menu This menu contains temperature values mains voltage values required for the functioning of Sinus Penta as a regenerative device and the inverter status alarm trip was stored It also contains the value of some measures being used when the inverter power was switched off together with any alarm present at the time Digital Inputs Settings Menu This menu contains the functions assigned to the digital inputs It also contains the trip log of the last eight alarms tripped and the values of some measures being used when the Trip Log Menu 16 This menu contains the trip log of the last eight alarms tripped and the values of some measures being used when the alarm trip was stored 1 E PowerOff Log Menu This menu contains the value of some measures being used at the inverter power off 18 19 20 21 41 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC
277. ign UB P108 Semi amplitude of Prohibit Speed Ranaes Range 0 5000 O 5000 rpm 000 CT Level ADVANCED O8 aUe Determines the semi amplitude of the prohibit speed ranges 20 105 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 15 PERCENT VARIATION OF REFERENCE MENU 15 1 Overview In the Percent Variation of Reference menu it is possible to define the variation values of the speed torque instant reference to be entered through digital inputs that have been properly programmed As per the selection of the variation percentage programmed to the reference and given by the combination of digital inputs configured with parameters C175 C177 please refer to the Digital Inputs Menu The parameters included in this menu represent seven speed torque variation possibilities to be applied to the speed reference Variation may range from 100 0 to 100 0 of the instant reference given by the addition of all selected sources measure MOO Example 115 0 0 Variation percentage of reference 1 116 50 0 percentage of reference 2 117 80 0 Variation percentage of reference 3 Based on the speed torque variation selected through digital inputs the speed reference at constant speed will be the following Variation 1 the current reference without modifications no effect Variation 2 the current reference increased by 50 096 Varia
278. igned to the preset speed which is active at that moment is summed up to the total amount of the speed references 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 The reference obtained is always saturated by the parameters relating to the min speed and the max speed of the selected motor 13 2 List of Parameters from P080 to P100 Table 14 List of Parameters PO8O P100 P090 Otutputspeed Mspd7 ADVANCED _ 690 ___ 096 Ovutputspeed Mspd 13 ADVANCED _ 696 PO99 Fire Mode Speed ENGINEERING 800rpm_ 69 2 101 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P080 Multispeed Function 0 Preset Speed Range 1 Sum Speed 2 Exclusive Preset Speed ____________ Preset Speed Level BASIC Address 680 Defines the functionality of the multispeed values for the global speed reference Three functions are available e 0 Preset Speed the selected multispeed is the actual rom value upon limit due to min and max speed parameters for the selected motor of the motor speed reference If no multispeed is selected no digital input programmed for multispeed selection is activated or all digital inputs programmed for multispeed selection are deactivated the speed reference is the reference for the sources set in the Control Method Menu e 1 Sum Speed 5 the reference relating to the selected multispeed is considered as the sum of the references for
279. ime the motor takes to reach its max speed when it starts from zero speed or the time the motor takes to reach O speed when decelerating Four pairs of programmable values are available Each pair defines the motor acceleration time and deceleration time The unit of measure of the basic time period is assigned to each pair of values In the Ramps menu it is possible to set the acceleration and deceleration times for the four speed ramps available for ordinary operation for the torque ramp and the speed torque ramp in JOG mode Using two special parameters it is also possible to set the start rounding off and the end rounding off for the acceleration ramps using other two parameters it is possible to set the start rounding off and the end rounding off for the deceleration ramps fifth parameter allows for the selection of the ramps for the preset rounding off 11 1 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE SPEED RAMPS For the four speed ramps that can be selected through a combination of the digital inputs set in C167 and C168 you can set the following acceleration time deceleration time and their unit of measure in order to increase the programmable time range POO9 Ramp Up Time 1 PO10 Ramp Down Time 1 PO12 Ramp Up Time 2 P013 Ramp Down Time 2 PO14 Unit of Measure for Ramp Times 1 and 2 PO15 Ramp Up Time 3 016 Ramp Down Time P018 Ramp Up Time 4 PO19 Ramp Down Time 4 P020 Unit of Measure for Ramp Times 3 and 4 The set ramp time corr
280. inal Board Range Bit coniroilea Table 2 Codification of measures M033 M034 M035 measure Active Always active Address 1683 Function State of the digital inputs in the inverter terminal board M034 Control Terminals from Serial Link Table 2 Codification of measures MO33 MO34 5 measure Always active Address 1684 Function State of the digital inputs in the terminal board controlled via serial link M035 Control Terminal Board from Field Bus Bit coniroilea Table 2 Codification of measures M033 M034 M035 measure Active Always active LV EHE 1685 Function State of the digital inputs in the terminal board controlled from field bus Table 2 Codification of Measures M033 M034 M035 0 _ 4 MDIS MDI6 ECHA FINA 1088 MDI7 ECHB MDI8 FINB MDI3 RESET MDI4 50 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ROHI 7 5 References Menu This menu contains the measures of the possible reference sources for speed torque or PID available in the terminal board analog inputs frequency inputs and encoder input and from serial link or field bus M037 External Analog Reference REF Function of the type of reference voltage current set in 50 The numerical value always includes two decimal figures the unit of measure is V or mA Function of the preset type of R ange reference voltage curren
281. inal REF in the terminal board The signal can be a voltage signal a current signal a unipolar signal or a bipolar signal 0 V Bipolar voltage input between 10V and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 1 20 mA Bipolar current input between 20 and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values 2 4 20 mA Unipolar current input with min threshold between 4 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values Before being saturated if the detected signal is lower than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA alarms A066 or A102 trip 3 0 10 Unipolar voltage input between OV and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 4 0 20 mA Unipolar current input between 0 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values The value set in parameter PO50 must match with the status of switch SW1 A allowing NOTE to select the proper electric circuit for the analog signal processing voltage signal current signal 51 Value of Input REF generating Min Reference Range Default Level Address Function 10 0V 10 0V ifPO050 0 10 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO50 1 20 mA 4 0mA 20 0 mA if 5 2 4 20 mA 100 100 if P050 0 200 200 if P050 1 40 200 if P050 2 0 0V 10 0V if P050 3 0 10 200 i 0 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO50 4 0 20 mA 1 ov
282. ines the min allowable value of the reference of the PID regulator The PID references are to be considered as percentage values if analog references are selected P245 relates to the max value of the selected analog input Example Select analog input AIN1 as the PID reference and suppose that its max and min values are 10V and 10V respectively If P245 is 5096 this means that the PID reference will be saturated at 5096 for voltage values lower than 5V If digital reference sources are selected the reference is already expressed as a percentage 100 0096 100 00 ENGINEERING 846 This parameter defines the max allowable value of the PID reference See description of P245 10000 10000 100 0096 000 ENGINEERING 847 This parameter defines the min allowable value of the PID feedback P248 Max Value of PID Feedback P248 o Range Default Level Address Function description of P245 10000 10000 100 00 10000 100 009 ENGINEERING 848 This parameter defines the max allowable value of the PID feedback P249 PID Reference Ramp Up Time Ss Range Default Level Address Function description of P245 0 32700 Function of P251 FF os ENGINEERING 849 This parameter defines the ramp up time of the PID regulator reference from 0 to the max allowable absolute value max 245 246 140 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING
283. ing Current Used 2 2 R 20 MIN 105 Imax 23 ange inverter Inom motor 100 96 Default 75 24 ENGINEERING Level 1248 eT 2 5 Pee Determines the max current level for speed searching it is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current 2 6 0 Last speed 2 R 1 VelMax Ult dir saisis 2 Dir pos 2 a 3 VelMax Dir neg 5 O Lostspeed 29 Level ENGINEERING 338 1249 erem 3 C249 Speed searching starting level The speed searching function begins its search according to C249 programming With the default setting the speed searching starting level is the last speed 3 1 produced before disabling By setting C249 1 Ult dir the Maximum speed programmed for the motor will be produced in the last 32 rotation direction produced By setting C249 2 Vel Max Dir pos regardless of the last frequency produced before disabling the search will start the maximum programmed motor speed in positive rotation direction if C249 3 VelMax Dir neg the direction will be negative 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 261 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 34 AUTORESET MENU 34 1 Overview The Autoreset function can be enabled in case an alarm trips You can enter the maximum number of autoreset attempts and the time required for resetting
284. ing is 2 Squaring channels Speed can be read through one channel only as for phonic wheel channel 2 can define the direction of rotation low level negative rotation high level positive rotation 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 239 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C198 Number of Channels of Encoder B 0 2 Squaring channels E en 1 Channel only Default 0 2 Squaring channels ENGINEERING Address 1198 This parameter defines the number of channels used for encoder B reading see parameter C197 Function C199 Encoder Sign Reversal _ Range See Table 71 Default 0 Fdbk NO Ref NO Level ENGINEERING Address 1199 Function This parameter permits to reverse the speed sign measured by encoder inputs direction of rotation of the motor By tuning the encoder the encoder sign used as feedback is automatically adapted to the Table 71 Codification of C199 Ref NO Ref NO Fdbk NO Ref YES 3 Fdbk YES Ref YES 240 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 30 BRAKING RESISTANCE MENU 22 30 1 Overview 23 The Braking Resistance Menu enables the clamp transistor command and sets its max duty cycle in the inverter 24 braking resistance If no braking resistance is installed it is possible to adjust promptness of the DC bus voltage control in order to av
285. inputs programmed with parameters C173 and C174 Digital Input for Motor 2 Activation and Digital Input for Motor 3 Activation respectively see also DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 3 2 The parameters included in the Motor Control Menus are detailed in the table below Table 44 Description of the Parameters Classified by Motor 3 3 3 5 Electric ratings of the motor Max speed and min speed required 36 speed at the beginning of flux weakening C028 C031 C071 C074 C114 C117 max speed alarm threshold and enabling C013 C032 056 075 099 118 3 C038 C081 C124 Slip compensation activation C039 C082 C125 C040 C083 C126 3 C041 C084 C127 The parameters that can be moditied depend on the type of control that has been selected 39 40 41 42 V f pattern parameters 179 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 25 1 1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE MOTOR This group of parameters can be divided into two subunits the first subunit includes the motor ratings the second subunit includes the parameters of the equivalent circuit of the asynchronous machine being used 25 1 2 MoroR RATINGS Table 45 Motor Ratings C015 C058 C101 Rated rom C017 C060 C103 25 1 3 PARAMETERS OF THE EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT OF THE ASYNCHRONOUS MACHINE Table 46 Parameters of the Equivalent Circuit of the Asynchronous Machine Figure 32 Equivalent Circuit of the Asynchronous Machin
286. ion characteristics based on the preset type of control 24 1 1 Overview IFD CONTROL The IFD control allows to gain access to all the parameters included in the Carrier Frequency menu The user can set the minimum value and the maximum value of the switching carrier frequency and the number of pulses per period used to produce the output frequency when switching from min carrier frequency to max carrier frequency synchronous modulation The preset max value of carrier frequency also limits the max allowable speed value for the selected motor which can be programmed according to the following rules Max allowable speed rated speed max output frequency rated frequency where the max output frequency is given by C002 gt 5000Hz fout max C002 16 C002 lt 5000Hz fout max C002 10 where C002 is the maximum carrier frequency and the divider is the minimum number of pulses guaranteed period Table 41 Max Output Frequency Depending on the Inverter Size Size Max Output Frequency Hz less than 0049 from 0049 to 0086 from 0113 to 0129 from 0150 to 0162 greater than 0162 The silent modulation function can also be enabled 22 23 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 173 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 24 1 2 EXAMPLE IFD Setting two levels of carrier frequency and the number of pul
287. ional board ES836 29 1 2 WITH OPTIONAL BOARD ES836 e Reading 1 or 2 Encoders To read one Encoder use optional board ES836 or digital inputs MDI6 and MDI7 if a push pull encoder is used It is possible to use both the optional board and digital inputs and MDI7 to read two encoders at a time Use parameter C189 to set the reading of the speed measure of the controlled motor or to read values as a reference You can use encoder or encoder B as a speed feedback or as a reference source speed reference torque reference or PID reference Example If you want to use encoder A as a speed reference source and encoder B as a speed feedback set C189 as 6 A Ref B Fbk use PO73 and 74 References Menu to define the min speed and the max speed read for scaling and saturation of encoder A selected as a reference source in one of parameters C144 C147 Control Method Menu set parameter C012 motor 1 to Yes to enable the Speed Feedback from Encoder function If encoder is selected it is not possible to program any function for MDI6 and MDI7 otherwise alarm 082 Illegal Encoder Configuration will trip when ENABLE closes If encoder B is selected and optional board ES836 is not detected by the inverter alarm A082 Illegal Encoder Configuration will trip when ENABLE closes 234 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN e Reading a Frequency Input 2 2 Only digital input MDI6 F
288. ip compensation C039 for motor 1 you can obtain the increase of the output frequency limiting the error between the desired speed value and the actual speed value of the motor 184 317 SINUS PENTA 2 INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING 25 1 8 VTC and FOC controls allow to control the inverter with a torque reference instead of a speed reference To do so select VTC or FOC and set 1 Torque in the relevant parameter C011 for motor 1 C054 for motor 2 and C097 for motor 3 In this way the main reference corresponds to the motor torque demand and may range trom C047 to C048 Limits Menu for motor 1 minimum and maximum torque expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque For motors 2 and the parameters relating to min and max torque C090 C091 and C133 C134 are included in Limits Menu 2 and Limits Menu 3 Using 0020 inverter connected to 15kW motor C048 is factory set to 120 of the motor rated torque If the max reference is applied C143 REF the torque reference will be equal to 12096 If a 7 5kW motor is connected C048 may exceed 200 torques exceeding 200 may be obtained based on the value set in C048 The motor rated torque results from the following formula where P is the rated power expressed in W and o is the rated speed of rotation expressed in radiants sec Example the rated torque of a 15kW motor at 1420rpm is equal to TORQUE CONTROL AND FO
289. irection matches with the motor direction of rotation wrong encoder reading check parameters in the Encoder Frequency Input menu and check wiring encoder B is used check the configuration of the dip switches in the encoder board and the configuration of the jumper selecting the encoder supply mode By using Autotune the encoder signal used as feedback is automatically corrected In the Encoder Frequency Input menu set the source for Encoder B speed feedback set C189 ANO B FBK if also encoder B frequency input FIN B used see programming options for C189 in the Encoder Frequency Input section Set the number of pulse rev for the encoder being used parameter C191 31 317 ll 1 13 l4 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 5 5 Configuring a Reference from Encoder Setting Writing Enabling 1 Eng Access Level See flowchart A for the reference selection and set the encoder as the reference source Selecting the Encoder ENCODER A Push Pull single ended 24V encoder connected to digital inputs MDI6 and MDI7 NOTE In the Digital Inputs menu do not set any function for MDI6 and MDI7 ENCODER B Encoder acquired with optional board 5836 see Installation Instructions for the configuration of the jumper and the dip switches for the encoder type and supply In the Encoder Frequen
290. is to be open when the inverter is started inverter disabled Access parameter POOO Key parameter and set its code default value 00001 and access level POO1 Eng Use the ESC A and SAVE ENTER keys to access the other parameters See the paragraph Menu Tree Set the real supply voltage for the inverter You can set either the mains voltage range or the DC supply stabilized by a Regenerative Penta inverter To set the type of power supply for the inverter access the Configuration Motor 1 menu and set configuration parameter C008 to the value corresponding to the installation concerned Access the Configuration motor 1 menu and set C010 Control Algorithm as VTC Vector Torque Set the motor ratings as follows C015 fmot1 rated frequency C016 1 rated rpm C017 Pmot1 rated power C018 rated current C019 Vmot1 rated voltage C029 Speedmax1 max speed desired Also set CO22 resistance of one stator phase for a star connection or one third of one phase resistance for a delta connection and C023 inductance of stator leakage of one phase for a star connection or one third of the leakage of one phase for delta connection The C022 value corresponds to half of the resistance value measured with an ohm meter between the two phases of the motor If values to be set for C022 and C023 are not known it is possible to perform parameter autotune see step 6 or go to step 7 Press SAVE ENTER
291. istance of one stator phase for a star connection or one third of one phase resistance for a delta connection and C023 inductance of stator leakage of one phase for a star connection or one third of the leakage of one phase for a delta connection The value for C022 corresponds to half a resistance value measured with an ohm meter between two of the motor phases If values for C022 and C023 are not known perform parameter autotune see step 7 or go to step Press SAVE ENTER each time a new parameter is set 1 2 3 4 ES 9 9 10 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 21 37 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 6 Encoder TEST 7 Autotune of the stator resistance and leakage inductance 8 Autotune of the current loop 9 Tuning the rotor time constant 38 317 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO The motor must be running when testing the encoder Access the Encoder Frequency Input menu set the source of the encoder signal used as a speed feedback Encoder A in terminal board Encoder B from optional board ES836 enter the number of pulse rev and the number of the encoder channels more details are given in the section relating to the Encoder Frequency Input menu in the present Programming Manual In the First Motor menu set the parameter relating to the speed feedback from encoder 012 Yes Access the Autotune menu and set parameter 1073 select autotune type as Encoder Tune close t
292. istor Overload Description Possible Solution Description Possible Solution Description Possible Solution Description Possible cause Solution Overvoltage due to the overload of the braking resistance that operated for time equal to the maximum due to the setting in C211 and C212 The braking resistance command was inhibited because the maximum ON time was expired and the energy caused by the regeneration no longer dissipated has led to overvoltage This application requires the intense use of the Braking Resistor for example lifting applications for which a long falling run is required with load applied to the motor 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET command 2 Ifthe power dissipated by the braking resistance allows for a heavier use set C211 with a greater ON time Bypass relay open The control board requested the closure of the bypass relay contactor for the short circuit of the DC link capacitor precharge resistors but no closing signal is sent auxiliary of the relay during functioning precharge already closed Failure in the relay control circuit or in the auxiliary signal circuit detecting relay closing 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET signal 2 IF the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service IGBT heatsink temperature too high IGBT power heatsink overheated even if the cooling fan is on see also A096 and A099 Ambient temperature exceeding 40 C Motor
293. ith an output of AmA with the min level and 20mA with the max level The PID reference is sent from keypad while the probe feedback is sent to analog input AIN2 PTC which is configured as follows of Reference for Input AINZ FTC 2 4 2 gt P061 Reference Minimum Value for Input AIN2 PTC 4 0 mA P062 Reference Maximum Value far Input AINZ PTC 20 0 mi F53 Offset far Input AIN2 FTC 0 000 m Vee F b4 Filter AIHA FTE Constant The reference shall be saved from keypad so as to avoid setting up again when the drive is shut off FUbo Storage of LIP DIN and KFO Reterence Yes gt of Speed Torque UP DOWN value at Stop 0 of PID UPON value at Stop 0 F bac Heset of Speed Tarque UP ON value at Source Selection 0 F bBd REieset af FID value at Source Selection 0 Ma w PO amp S Amplitude af UP DN and Reference ss 274 317 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO PROCRAMMINC INSTRUCTIONS The PID regulator implementation and the PID output calculating mode must also be set R 9 C2o5 Selection of Reference Type 1 R S C286 Selection of Reference Type 2 PID R S C287 Selection of Reference Type 3 FID R W 5 C288 Selection of Feedback Type 1 R W 5 C289 Gelection of Feedback Type 2 PID R 5 C280 Selectian of Feedback Type 3 FID R w 5 C2
294. its possible solutions Any relative information stored in the TRIP LOG is also required when contacting Elettronica Santerno Customer Service In the following sections find the relative alarm code and follow the instructions Solve any external problems that may have been responsible for the protection trip If the alarm tripped due to the entry of wrong parameter values set new correct values and save them Reset the alarm If the alarm condition persists please contact Elettronica Santerno Customer Service QUSS A RESET command must be sent to reset an alarm in one of the following ways e enable the signal on the terminal RESET MDIS of the hardware terminal board e press the RESET key on the keypad e enable the RESET MDIS signal on one of the virtual terminal boards enabled as remote control sources see CONTROL METHOD MENU To activate the Autoreset function enable parameter C255 see AUTORESET MENU and the inverter will automatically try to reset the alarms tripped 292 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 41 3 Alarms List Table 84 Alarms List A001 A032 Control board failure A033 TEXAS VER KO Incompatible Texas Software Version A039 FLASH KO Texas Flash not programmed A040 A040 User Fault Alarm caused by the user A041 A041 PWMA Fault Generic alarm IGBT Hardware side A A043 A043 False Interrupt Control board failure A044 A044 SW OverCurrent
295. l Number of the inverter which the Fire Mode activation mode is to be used on and type in the password given The name Elettronica Santerno corresponding website IS displayed together with the 10 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 21 61 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 9 PASSWORD AND ACCESS LEVEL MENU 9 1 Overview The Password and Access Level menu contains the parameters concerning the possibility to modify and view the parameters for enabling parameter modification 1 the user access level 2 allows the modification of the POOO password value parameter C modification conditions 9 2 List of Parameters from to P003 Table 6 List of Parameters POOO P003 Writing Enabling BASIC P002 Writing enabling password ENGINEERING P003 Parameter C modification condition ADVANCED StandBy Fluxing POOO Writing Enabling The writing of the parameters is enabled as default programming POOO 1 Access is gained to the POOO parameter that enables the writing of the parameters by entering in the Password Menu and in the Access Level in the Parameters Menu 00000 32767 00000 No 32767 Default Level BASIC Address Not accessible via the serial link The writing of the parameters from the serial link is always enabled Setting the correct value in the POOO enables the parameters
296. l to 1 3 of the time when motor 24 temperature is supposed to be kept constant The suggested values if using a motor from Elettronica Santerno are as follows 2 5 4 pole 2 6 7 7 If a motor is being used from another manufacturer the above values can be used as guide only however the correct values should be checked with the manufacturer 2 35 2 List of Parameters from C264 to C273 30 31 32 33 C269 Pick up current for motor 2 Inom ADVANCED 3 4 Thermal time constant for motor 2 ADVANCED C271 _ Thermal Protection activation for motor 3 ADVANCED C264 Heatsink Temperature for Fan Activation 3 6 Range 1 Always ON 100 C 3 Default 50 C Level ADVANCED Address 1264 38 The heatsink cooling fans are switched on each time the inverter is enabled and the IGBT commute When disabled the fans are switched off only if the heatsink temperature is less than C264 39 Set Always ON for cooling fan continuous operation The real temperature of the heatsink can be displayed in measure parameter 4 MO6A Table 77 Motor thermal time constant suggested values Table 78 List of Parameters C264 C273 35 Function the inverter control board N the information can be deduced from the product This parameter has effect only for models where fans are controlled directly by 4 1 screen in the IDP Menu 4 2 265 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTI
297. lass AT 515Vac 10 class 5T 630Vac 10 class 6T e Alarm A048 can trip with very inertial loads and when the deceleration ramp is too short see e RAMPS MENU e Alarm A048 can trip even when the motor is pulled by the load eccentric load e f the inverter is powered directly by the bus bar the bus feeder is responsible for the alarm trip e Failure in DC bus voltage measure circuit 1 Check voltage in terminals S T Check mains voltage value and DC bus voltage value M029 Also check the values of and 29 sampled in the TRIP LOG when the alarm tripped 2 In case of very inertial loads and if the alarm tripped when decelerating try to set a longer deceleration ramp If short stop times are needed or if the motor is pulled by the load try to activate the resistive braking unit 3 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service Hardware fault from IGBT converter side A IGBT drivers of power converter A detected IGBT failure e Electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference Overcurrent Overtemperature IGBTs IGBT fault 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET signal 2 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service Hardware overcurrent side A Hardware overcurrent detected by the inverter output current circuit See A044 Overcurrent SW See 044 Overcurrent SW 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
298. le if in the Remote mode the motor is running in the Local mode the inverter remains running with a modifiable reference with INC DEC starting at zero e All Bumpless During the changeover from Remote to Local mode functioning the inverter will maintain the same speed torque reference and the same running condition that was in the remote mode for example if in the Remote mode the motor is running at 1000 rpm in the local mode the inverter remains running with a reference of 1000 rpm that can be modified with INC DEC starting at zero SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 28 DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 22 28 1 Overview 23 NOTE Please refer to the Sinus Penta Installation Instructions manual for a description of 24 the digital inputs 25 The parameters in this menu assign particular digital control functions to each digital input on the terminal board Each parameter has a particular function which is assigned to a given terminal on the terminal board 6 Function STANT 2 ENABLE Start Ok RESET STOP Direction REVERSE Cw CCw ENABLE S DISABLE 2 O MULTISPEED 0 MULTISPEED 1 Multispeed MULTISPEED 2 MULTISPEED 3 DCB UP DOWN UpDown Reset Ext ALRI Ext ALR2 Ext ALR3 MULTIRAMPS 0 Multiramps MULTIRAMPS 1 JOG Master Slave PID Disable Keypad Lock 2 Motor 3 Motor VAR SPEED 0 VAR SPEED 1 Var SPEED VAR SPEED 2 SEQ Ena PID UpDowm Reset P0
299. le 52 Level ADVANCED 1023 Address 1066 1109 This parameter defines the global leakage inductance of the connected motor With a star connection it matches with the value of the inductance of one phase with a delta connection it matches with 1 3 of the inductance of one phase Autotune is always recommended Function C024 C067 C110 Mutual Inductance 0 65000 0 00 650 00mH Default 25000 250 00mH Level ADVANCED 1024 Address 1067 1110 This parameter defines the mutual inductance of the connected motor The approximate value of the mutual inductance results from no load current with the formula below M Vnom Rstat lo 2xfnom lo Function 192 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z TRONI Parameter C024 mutual inductance is automatically calculated based on the preset no load current value C021 whenever parameters 1073 and 1074 are set as follows AN NONE 1073 Motor Tune 074 O All no rotation whether current loop tuning is performed or not C025 CO68 C111 Rotor Time Constant Range 0 5000 5000msec Default See Table 52 Level ADVANCED 1025 1008 1111 Control FOC This parameter defines the rotor time constant of the connected motor If the rotor time constant is not stated by the motor manufacturer it can be obtained through the autotune function see FIRST STARTUP and AUTOTUNE MENU Function Whe
300. le A and the output torque 60 as variable B Variables are considered as absolute values 10 5 As ABS BRAKE but the brake unlocks digital output open when a given torque value is attained which is automatically determined based on the last torque value required in the previous stroke PWM MODE The PWM mode may be selected for digital outputs MDO1 and MDO2 only it cannot be selected for relay digital outputs MDO3 and MDOA The digital output becomes a low frequency PWM output with a duty cycle proportional to the value of the selected analog output 2 3 4 Selecting Variable A P271 P280 P289 P298 13 This selects the digital signal the analog variable used for Test set with 273 282 291 300 The whole list of selectable items and their description appears at the end of this section see Table 30 a digital signal is selected Test is not performed therefore the comparison value for Test A set with P275 P284 P293 P302 has no meaning NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the digital output 16 concerned is other than zero Example MDO1 P2700 MDO1 2 3 4 Selecting Variable B P272 P281 P290 P299 1 This selects another digital signal the analog variable used for Test B set with P274 P283 P292 P301 18 The whole list of selectable items and their description appears at the end of this section see Table
301. le value of selected variable See Table 30 Bea 2000 20 Level ADVANCED 594 This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test A 162 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 P285 MDO2 Comparing Value for Test 320 00 96 320 00 96 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable B See Table 30 Default 50 rpm Level ADVANCED 985 This parameter defines the comparing value with selected variable for test B P286 MDO2 Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests Range Default Level ADVANCED 55 OOO This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two Function tests to calculate the output value J Ul 4 UJ P287 MDO2 Output Logic Level 10 FALSE Default 1 TRUE 1 Level ADVANCED OO 12 Digital output logic function MDO2 to apply a logic reversal negation to aem the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 13 TRUE no negation is applied PWM MODE 18 DIGITAL ADVANCED Address 888 19 This parameter defines the operating mode of digital output 3 The different operating modes are described in the previous section 2 P288 MDOS3 Digital Output Mode DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG 16 DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAK
302. llustrates three types of programmable curves compared to the theoretical V f curve By setting C013 Constant Torque with respect to the theoretical curve it is possible to alter the voltage starting value to compensate for losses caused by stator impedance and for more torque at lower revs using the preboost parameter C034 By setting C013 Quadratic the inverter will follow a pattern with a parabolic trend for which it is possible to set the voltage starting value C034 the desired reduction in voltage compared to the relative constant torque with C032 and the frequency on which the actuate this torque reduction with C033 By setting C013 Free Setting it is possible to program the starting voltage C034 Preboost the increase in voltage to 1 20 of the rated frequency C035 BoostO and the increase in voltage C036 Boost1 to the programmable frequency C037 Frequency for Boost1 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 181 317 PROGRAMMING 9 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNG V V Vn iu C019 i C034 1 F Hz 1 F Hz 5 C015 fn fn Vn C019 C036 C034 AEN Midi cT i F Hz l F Hz C033 C015 1 20 fn C937 C015 fn fn P000342 b Figure 33 Types of programmable V f curves The voltage produced by the inverter may be altered also by setting the pa
303. lly put on stand by until the PID output value exceeds the min value If C149 is set as External Out or P255 is set to zero this function is disabled Function P256 PID Output Gradient Limit Range 1 65000 1 65000 msec Default Ims Level ENGINEERING Address 856 This parameter limits the max acceleration for the PID regulator output Function The max acceleration for the PID regulator output is equal to 100 P256 msec 142 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P257 Gain for PID Measure Scaling NETT MEE 32000 0 000 32 000 Default 1 000 TENE ENGINEERING Address 857 Gain for the scaling of PID measures M023 M025 This gain has effect only on the measures above does not affect PID operation This parameter allows scaling if you want to display PID measures with a different unit of measure M023 M020 P257 M024 M021 P257 ONO UI 4 UJ NJ 10 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 21 143 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS INSTRUCTIONS A 21 DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU 21 1 Overview The Digital Outputs menu includes those parameters allowing configuring the inverter digital outputs MDO1 MDO2 MDO3 and MDOA NOTE The Digital Outputs menu may be accessed only if the access level is ADVANCED or ENGINEERING For a detailed hardware description of the digital outputs refer to the Sinus Penta NOTE Installation Instructions
304. lues The condition greater than is selected for test 1 and lower than equal to is selected for test 2 Table 34 Parameterization for Example 3 P272 ABS x gt ABS x lt A Set B Reset Both tests are performed over the motor speed P271 P272 are set to motor speed The values of reference for the two tests are 1OOrpm and 20rpm the function applied is Flip Flop Set Reset and the output is considered as true logic Test 1 is the Set signal of the Flip Flop and Test 2 is the Reset signal Motor Speed rom A 100 20 20 100 sot Emm E Reset E gt Out pe Figure 29 Digital Output for Speed Thresholds Example UB 10 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 155 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO Example 4 Digital Output for Electromechanical Brake for Lifting Applications Default Digital Output MDO4 Table 35 Parameterization for Example 4 4 Digital output mode MDOA Variable A selection MDO4 Variable B selection MDOMA Testing variable A MDOMA Testing variable P302 MDO4 Comparing value for Test A 20 0096 P303 MDO4 Comparing value for Test B 50 00 rpm P304 MDOXA Function applied to the result of the two tests A Set B Reset ______ O P305 MDO4 Output logic level TRUE The di
305. lute torque 3 2 27 1 5 REMorE LocaL 33 With the factory setting the changeover from the Remote mode to the Local mode can only be made when the inverter is disabled for which the former reference and command sources depend upon the setting of the parameters C140 C147 and for the latter the command and reference functions are activated only from the 34 keypad With the parameter C148 it is possible to customise the Loc Rem function if the function is to be set also when the 3 5 inverter is enabled or if during the changeover from remote to local the same condition is desired if the same reference is to be maintained NOTE For further details regarding the Loc Rem function see also section 1 10 and DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 3 38 39 40 4l 42 209 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 27 2 List of Parameters from C140 to C148 Table 57 List of Parameters C140 C148 CI40 Command digital input ADVANCED CI41 Command digital 2 ADVANCED CI42 Commond digital 3 ENGINEERING 1142 CI43 ADVANCED 1143 CRF CI44 Inputreferenee 2 ADVANCED 1144 2 AINT C145 nputreferenee 3 ENGINEERING 115 0 CI46 lnputreferenee 4 ENGINEERING 116 0 CI47 Torquelimitingnt ENGINEERING 1147 C148 ENGINEERING 1148 0 StandBy Fluxing rem
306. m 96 500 96 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 CO048 Motor 1 C090 CO091 Motor 2 C133 C134 Motor 3 Active only when torque reference is used for the selected motor Address 1660 Range This is the measure of the torque reference required at constant speed and expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque Function 10 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 20 21 43 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO MO11 Torque Demand 96 500 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 CO0A8 Motor 1 90 91 Motor 2 133 134 3 Active Active for VTC and FOC controls only Address 1661 With speed control Torque demand of the speed regulator expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque With torque control Torque reference processed with respect to the preset torque ramp time and expressed as a reference of the motor rated torque Function M012 Torque Generated by the Motor 96 _ 500 Active Active only for VTC and FOC controls Address 1662 Approximate value of the torque produced by the motor and expressed as a percentage of Functi the rated torque of the selected motor M013 Torque Limit Demand before Ramps Nm 32000 Nm Note The actual range de
307. mand has opened before autotune was completed In this case reset the drive sending a command of terminal MDI3 or press the RESET key in the display keypad and repeat the autotune procedure First remove the ENABLE command then access the Autotune Menu and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 0 All Auto no rotation Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and until autotune is complete warning W32 Open Enable is displayed The inverter has computed and saved the values for P155 and P156 If alarm A065 Autotune KO trips this means that the ENABLE command has opened before autotune was completed or that the autotune algorithm failed In this case reset the drive sending a command of terminal MDI3 or press the RESET key in the display keypad and repeat the autotune procedure NOTE if the ENABLE command was not opened before autotune was over decrease by 5 the no load current value set in C021 and repeat the autotune procedure Rotor time constant C025 is estimated with a special autotune procedure making it possible for the motor to run even in no load conditions If autotune is enabled first remove the ENABLE command then access the Autotune Menu and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 All Auto no rotation Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and wait until autotune is over warning W32 Open Enable is displayed When autotune is complete the value obtained for the ro
308. manual NOTE Digital output MDO1 can be programmed only if the frequency output is not set up P200 Disable see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU 21 1 1 FACTORY SETTING The factory settings are as follows Digital output MDOT is programmed as a zero speed relay that energizes when a given threshold is exceeded Digital output MDO2 is factory set to control an electromechanical brake used for lifting applications Digital output MDOS3 is active when the inverter is commutating Digital output MDOA energizes when the inverter is not in emergency condition no alarms tripped 21 1 2 STRUCTURE or DIGITAL OUTPUTS The figures are an example of the functional structure of one of the four digital outputs MDOT The remaining three outputs MDO2 MDO3 and MDOA have a similar logical behaviour in reference to the relating parameters MDO1 2 3 4 Programmed Digital Output Mode P270 P279 P288 P297 It is possible to select the operating mode of the digital output by choosing one of the available options 144 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN Table 29 Digital Output Mode DISABLING The selected digital output is disabled DIGITAL The digital output depends on a selected digital signal and on the logic output function True False DOUBLE DIGITAL The digital output depends on 2 selected digital signals on the logic function calculating the output value and on the logic output func
309. me taken by the torque limit of the selected motor to go to zero from max value Function 0 0 Disabled Level ADVANCED Address 1050 1093 1136 Control IFD Function This parameter disables frequency decrease in acceleration limit 202 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 27 CONTROL METHOD MENU 22 27 1 Overview 23 of digital inputs COMMANDS and analog inputs REFERENCES Please refer to Sinus Penta Installation Instructions manual for the hardware description 24 See also the INPUT REFERENCES MENU and the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 2 5 With the factory setting the inverter receives the digital commands via the terminal board the main speed reference Is sent from the REF analog input and no external limit for torque limitation is enabled The parameters in this menu allow for the selection of the following 8 the source of the inverter commands digital inputs from three signal sources through the parameters C140 C141 C142 which are combined so as to obtain an active M031 command set For each of these parameters it is possible to select the source of the command signals from 4 different sources 2 a 8 the source of the speed reference torque reference from 4 different sources that can be selected with parameters C143 C144 C145 C146 and add up the 4 different sources For each of these 4 parameters it is possible to select the sourc
310. med up to each other For speed control and if references are to be sent also from digital inputs see the Multispeed menu Forcing the Reference Sources Sources REF Analog Input Ref AINT Analog Input AIN2 Analog Input AIN2 Frequency Input MDI8 Encoder Input input Pulse Input Encoder The reference scaling is obtained through No ihe parameters included Sources Serial Link Field Bus Keypad Preset Speed reference scaling is in the Input references are expressed in Selecting the Reterence Sources Reference from serial link Reference from field bus Ref from display keypad Reference from digital required 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 ll 1 13 l4 15 Speed torque Reference menu Each source is assigned to a parameter setting its min value and max value for the min max speed torque reference of the motor e g Motor 1 speed reference C028 for min speed C029 for max speed for torque reference C047 for min torque C048 for max torque references are expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque Saturation of the reference values depends on Min Speed and Max Speed parameters speed control and on Min Torque and Max Torque parameters torque control E g Motor 1 speed C028 for min speed C029 for max speed Motor 1 torque C047 for min torque C048 for max torque 16 1 18 19 20 21 27 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING IN
311. mm Ndafedes 217 29 ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU ccsccscsccccsccccsccccscccccccccsccccsceccsceccsceccscsccecs 234 NEMO N 234 29 1 1 Without Optional Board 6 234 29 1 2 WirOpional Board __ __ 234 29 1 3 Usina TWO Ende 235 29 2 List of Parameters from C189 0 199 i cse datei ae 237 30 BRAKING RESISTANCE eva S TREE OF EVR E uEER ERE YER PERO RES YU E Ra EYRE CER Y EY Na VERO EP eva axo 241 S s eee 241 30 2 Lishor Parameters rom saul itt a en re outre c san hoa Su erp 241 31 DC BRAKING QUA E 243 N reece tenes neva poe _ __4 ____6 _ ____________ 243 DC Braking at Start and Non condensing 243 31 1 2 DC Brekdng O erri Ru nU Pr a 245 31 153 DC Braking Command Sent from Terminal Board 246 201 2 Parameters mom C215 10 224 icu een cont uS Sepe eb bas ORA Sada es 249 32 POWER DOWN MENU oes _________________ 251 _ T c 251
312. mple if only one C009 1 motor has been programmed the menus for motors 2 and will not be displayed Configuration Motor 2 3 and Limit Motor 2 3 In addition if there is C010 IFD Voltage Freq programmed motor control the BRIDGE CRANE menu will also not be displayed By using linear navigation P264 Linear the settings displayed are no longer grouped into menus and it is possible to navigate in all the settings using the A and V keys If using the navigation P264 Modified Only only the settings with programming different to the factory settings will be displayed and it is possible to navigate in all the settings using the A and V keys An example of the use of keys for navigation and modifying settings is contained in the section Examples of Navigation P264 MENU The following paragraphs contain descriptions for the use of some of the keys and their functions 12 317 SINUS PENTA ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 Menu Tree MENU TREE MEASURE COMM PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION PRODUCT ANDS IDENTIFICATION INVERTER OK 00 0 00 2 0 00 rpm MEA IDP MEASURE MENU Non modifiable M type parameters MEA MOTOR MEASURE MEA PID REGULATOR MEA DIGITAL INPUTS MEA REFERENCES MEA OUTPUTS MEA AUTODIAGNOSTIC MEA PROGRAMMED DIGITAL INPUTS MEA ALARM LOG MEA POWER OFF LOG Figure 1 Menu Tree Structure
313. nalog Reference from Terminal Board 1 87 Figure 10 Input REF Processing Example 1 mene enn enne 88 Figure 11 Input REF Processing Example 2 Reo E i vk ond Fan bae dixe tnde ete Rast stat leaves 88 Figure 12 Aput REF Processing Example d ______ 89 Figure T3 Prohibit Speed _ ________ 104 Figure 14 Speed Control Example 106 Figure 15 Dual Parameterization Function Example 108 Figure 16 General structure of the Analog 115 Figure 17 Structure of the Frequency ___________________ UD NUS 116 Figure 18 Curve voltage speed carried out by AO1 Example 1 119 Figure 19 Curve voltage speed carried out by AO1 Example 2 emen 120 Figure 20 Curve voltage speed carried out by 1 Example 3 120 Figure 21 Curve voltage speed carried out by AO1 Example 4 121 Figure 22 Curve voltage speed carried out by AO1 Example 5 sessssssssessenee mener 122 Figure 23 Using Timers Exam
314. nce and Feedback ere a O O 10 CMDB Frequency Input EncB Feedback Values 7 8 the same encoder can be used both as a reference source and as a reference feedback Value 7 encoder A can be used both as a speed feedback for the motor control and as a PID regulator reference C190 Number of Pls Rev for Encoder A 256 10000 256 10000 pls rev Default 1024 BASIC Address 1190 Function Defines the number of pls rev for encoder A encoder in the terminal board C191 Number of Pls Rev for Encoder B Range 256 10000 pls rev Default 1024 Level BASIC ee 1191 Defines the number of pls rev for encoder B encoder that can be connected to the ES836 optional board Function C192 Timeout for Speed Alarm 0 65000 0 00 650 00 sec Default 5 00 sec EAR ENGINEERING 1192 If the speed alarm C194 is enabled and the speed error exceeds the speed threshold C193 this parameter determines the speed error timeout Even if the alarm speed is time set in C192 and error threshold set in C193 are used for a speed searching error to digital outputs set with BRAKE or LIFT mode Digital outputs are then disabled 238 317 SINUS PENTA 2 RONI C193 Speed Error Threshold 093 _ O 32000 0 32000 rpm P 300 300 rpm ENGINEERING 1193 If the speed alarm C194 is enabled
315. nd by gt gt 214 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 22 The ENABLE input function is assigned to terminal MDI2 It enables the functioning of the inverter It cannot be 2 3 programmed on other terminals although additional functions may be assigned to the ENABLE terminal The ENABLE input must always be active on all activated terminals to enable the inverter to function irrespective of 24 the control mode If the ENABLE input is disabled the inverter output voltage is always cut off so the connected motor starts idling the motor idles and stops due to either friction or to the mechanical load 2 5 In the case of towed loads like lifting when the motor is idle a mechanical load could bring about uncontrolled speed 28 1 2 ENABLE TERMINAL 15 MDI2 If the ENABLE command is active when switched on the inverter will not start until terminal MDI2 opens and closes 2 6 again This satety measure may be disabled in parameter C181 7 If the ENABLE input is disabled when the inverter is controlling the motor it is closed with a delay time depending on the inverter size This ENABLE delay starts from the instant when the input is disabled regardless of the enabling delay if any set through a software timer in MDI2 2 a The operating mode and the logic used by the ENABLE input to enable disable the inverter also depends on the programming of the ENABLE S and DISABLE functions
316. nded as a result the current injected into the motor drops to the value required for motor fluxing 2 O NOTE The Bridge CRANE menu is used for VTC and FOC Control only 30 To guarantee safety the contact of the successful brake closing must be exclusively 3 1 of a NO type close contact only when the brake is engaged In addition to parameters from C300 to C302 it has to be set a specific MDO as 6 BRAKE see OUTPUT DIGITAL MENU 3 3 NOTE NOTE gt 37 2 List of Parameters from C300 to C302 34 Table 80 List of Parameters C300 C302 3 5 36 C300 Pretensioning torque Cnom ENGINEERING 1300 C301 Pretensoningime ENGINEERING 131 C302 Closed Brake Input contact NO ENGINEERING 1302 C300 Pretensioning Torque 39 5000 5000 500 0 500 0 SNE 30 ENGINEERING YS 1300 4 If not set at zero this parameter defines the torque value expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor reached before the speed ramp starts after sending a START command 4 1 After sending a START command the inverter takes the motor torque to the level set in C300 and torque is adjusted by the speed loop for the time 4 2 set in C301 in order to keep the motor at a standstill Once this time has elapsed the speed ramp can start and the motor follows the required speed profile The torque sign defines the relative running
317. ne Cosine variables are selected which can be used as carrier frequency if MDOT or MDOJ2 is to be selected with PWM mode See example in the Digital Outputs Menu Function UI 4 UJ NJ 10 ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 19 20 21 131 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 19 TIMERS MENU 19 1 Overview In the Timers menu it is possible to set enabling and disabling delay times for digital inputs outputs 5 For ENABLE digital input no disabling delay is allowed because the logic status of the ENABLE command is used directly by the hardware activating IGBT commutation when no ENABLE command is sent the output power stage is instantly deactivated NOTE The reset function for the alarms on the leading edges of the MDI3 is not delayed NOTE Any auxiliary alarm set to the digital inputs is not delayed Five timers are available and for each timer it is possible to set an enabling disabling delay The same timer may also be assigned to multiple digital inputs outputs NOTE The ENABLE 5 function cannot be delayed gt gt gt ics 1 The inverter enabling MDI1 START depends on a signal coming from a different equipment source and there is the need to delay the inverter enabling by 2 seconds with respect to activation and by 5 seconds with respect to deactivation To do so set two delay times for activation and deactiva
318. ne Functions Automatic estimation of the stator resistance and the leakage inductance and calculation of the no load current value and the rotor time constant value Tuning mode required for the correct operation of the control algorithms Automatic autotune of the current loop 1 FOC Auto Tuning mode required for the correct operation of algorithm FOC no rotation If autotune of the current loop fails Alarm A065 Autotune KO trips the current loop may be manually tuned see 4 FOC Man rotation current Automatic estimation of the rotor time constant Tuning mode required for the correct operation of algorithm FOC 2 FOC Auto After the correct insertion of the no load current value parameters C021 C064 rotation C107 respectively for motors M1 M2 and M3 and the tuning of the current loop it is possible to measure the rotor time constant value for which the motor rotates up to 90 of the constant speed Manual tune of the current loop Display analog outputs 1 and AO2 showing the speed reference and the speed value obtained with the preset parameters of the speed regulator see the SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU Set the regulator s parameters so as to obtain the smaller difference between the two waveforms Manual tune of the current loop If automatic tuning 1 FOC Auto no rotation is unsuccessful it is possible to 4 FOC Man manually tune the current loop Display analog outputs and AO2 showing rotation current
319. ned to any of the five timers and the same timer may be assigned to multiple inputs Select zero to avoid delaying the digital inputs For setting via serial link see encoding below No timer assigned to the inputs MDI 1 4 Function Table 27 Codification of P226 Timers assigned to Digital Inputs Example 10 Ul 4 UJ NJ ValueinP226 101 011 101 010bin gt 2794dec P227 Timer assigned to inputs MDI 5 8 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 Default 0 0 0 0 No timer assigned to the inputs MDI 5 8 3 Level ENGINEERING Address 827 The second group of four digital inputs may be assigned to any of the five timers and the same timer may be assigned to multiple inputs Select zero to avoid delaying the digital inputs For setting via serial link see encoding in P226 Function P228 Timer assigned to outputs MDO 1 4 16 0 0 0 0 4 5 5 5 5 1 Default 0 0 0 0 No timer assigned to the outputs MDO 1 4 TEES ENGINEERING 18 Address 828 The digital outputs may be assigned to any of the five timers and the same timer may be assigned to multiple outputs Select zero to avoid delaying the digital outputs For setting via serial link see encoding in P226 2 21 135 317 19 Function PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 20 PID PARAMETERS MENU 20 1 Overview This menu defines the p
320. never one of these parameters is written the drive automatically computes NOTE and saves the parameters of flux regulator Pl and FOC control proportional constant for motor 1 P158 P165 for motor 2 P172 for motor 3 and integral time P159 P166 for motor 2 P173 for motor 3 C028 C071 C114 Motor Min Speed O 32000 0 32000 rpm BASIC EYE 1028 1071 1114 This parameter defines the minimum speed of the connected motor When references forming the global reference are at their min relative value the global reference equals the min speed of the connected motor Example Control Method Menu C143 REF Selection of reference 1 source C144 2 AINT Selection of reference 2 source C145 0 Disable Selection of reference 3 source C146 J 0 Disable Selection of reference 2 source Menu P050 7 0 10V Type of reference for input REF P051 10V Value of the min reference for input REF P052 o 10V Value of the max reference for input REF P055 5 0 10V Type of reference for input AINT 056 5V Value of min reference for input AINT P057 5V Value of max reference for input AINT The speed reference is the min speed set in C028 motor 1 when both input REF and input AINT values are lower than or equal to the minimum values set in PO51 and 56 respectively 193 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS
321. ng C189 6 A Reference B Feedback Encoder Frequency input operating mode C190 2048 pls rev Number of pls rev for Encoder A C191 1024 pls rev Number of pls rev for Encoder B C197 0 2Ch Quad Number of channels of Encoder A C198 0 2Ch Quad Number of channels of Encoder B C199 0 Fdbk No Ref No Encoder reading sign reversal Motor Control 1 Menu Setup of control mode with speed feedback from encoder and min speed and max speed of the controlled motor C012 Yes Speed feedback from M1 encoder C028 0 rpm Min speed of motor M1 C029 1500 Max speed of motor M1 Control Method Menu Setup of the source of the speed feedback from encoder C143 8 Encoder Selection of reference 1 source C144 0 Disable Selection of reference 2 source C145 0 Disable Selection of reference source C146 0 Disable Selection of reference 4 source References Menu Setup of the reading range for the encoder used as a speed reference P073 O rpm Encoder input min rpm 74 750 rpm Encoder input max rpm Ramps Menu Ramps time applied to the reference are reset to maintain the desired speed variation without entering any delay value 009 0 Acceleration time 1 PO10 0 Deceleration time 1 When motor 1 reaches its max speed 750 the speed reference is 100 because the speed value read by the encoder used as a reference source is saturate
322. ng it is possible to alter these parameters also with the inverter enabled and the motor stopped Before altering any of the parameters remember that the correct code for parameter POOO must be set It may be a good idea to write down any customised parameter in the table on the last pages of the present Programming Manual If an alarm trips find the cause responsible for the alarm and reset the drive Enable input MDI3 terminal 16 for some time or press the RESET on the display keypad SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 7 MEASURE MENU 7 1 Overview The Measure Menu contains the variables measured by the inverter that can be used by the user In the display keypad measures are divided into subgroups The measure subgroups are the following e Motor Measures Menu This menu contains the values of the speed reference at constant rpm the values of the reference being used and the speed values of the connected motor expressed in rpm the inverter rated frequency the torque reference at constant rpm the torque demand and the motor torque output the torque limit reference at constant speed and the torque limit being used expressed both in Nm and as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor the flux reference and the electrical variables measured by the inverter mains side DC bus e PID Regulator Menu This menu contains the values relating to the inverter PID regulator e D
323. ng submenu Set the two parameters relating to integral time P125 P126 as Disabled and set low values for the parameters relating to proportional gain P127 P128 Set equal values for P127 and P128 and increase them until an overshoot takes place when the setpoint is reached Decrease P127 and P128 by approx 3096 then decrease the high values set for integral time in P125 and P126 keep both values equal until an acceptable setpoint response is obtained Check that the motor runs smoothly at constant speed If no failure occurred go to step 11 Otherwise check the inverter connections paying particular attention to supply voltages DC link and input reference Also check if alarm messages are displayed In the Motor Measure submenu check the speed reference MOOO the reference speed processed by the ramps 2 the supply voltage of the control section the DC link voltage M029 the condition of the control terminals M033 Check to see if these readings match with the measured values 1 2 3 4 ES 8 9 10 ll 1 13 l4 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 35 317 PROGRAMMING 9 SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS A ELETTRONICASANTERNG 11 Additional Note that with parameter standby only condition for altering parameters C it is possible to alter the Cxxx parameters in the CONFIGURATION menu only when the inverter is DISABLED or STOPPED whilst if POO3 Standby Fluxing it is possible
324. ng submenu in the Configuration menu For FOC control the motor speed of rotation is always known so this function is always active and independent of the parameters of the relevant menu A When C245 is set to YES do the following to activate the Speed Searching function open and close the ENABLE command before t is over C246 disable the DC Braking command before the DC braking preset time is over see DC BRAKING MENU reset any alarm tripped with reference other than 0 before t is over NOTE The Speed Searching parameters are used for IFD control only SSdis Speed searching does not take place when the inverter turns off due to mains loss If the inverter restarts after a time longer than t C246 frequency output is generated following the acceleration ramp and no speed searching takes place By setting C246 Always speed searching if enabled with C245 occurs when the inverter restarts RUN regardless of the time elapsed from disabling The figures below show output frequency and motor rpm during speed searching After time t for rotor demagnetization speed searching occurs as follows 3 steps The speed at the beginning of search depends on the settings programmed in C249 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 257 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO Figure 46
325. nternal to the inverter this value is the actual torque limit Function M016 Torque Limit Reference after ramps 96 500 96 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor Range C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C134 Motor Active for and FOC controls only 1666 This is the torque limit value being used expressed as percentage of the motor rated torque Function 10 17 Flux Reference 0 500 0 5 00 Wb Active Active for VTC and FOC controls only Address 1667 M026 Output Current 2 Flux reference required and expressed in Weber Wb 3 0 6553 5A Note The actual range depends on the inverter size Always active Address 1676 16 of the RMS of the output current 17 M027 Output Voltage 18 0 65535 V eng 2 Note The actual range depends on the inverter voltage class 19 Active Always active Address 1677 assis Measure of the RMS of the output voltage 2 21 45 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO M028 Output Power 0 6553 5 kW 095 Note The actual range depends on the inverter size Active Always active Address 1678 Measure of the active power produced by the inverter M029 DC Bus Voltage 0 1400 0 1400 V Active
326. o PO24 PO25 2 P012 Speed Ramp 2 Acceleration Time 0 327 00 s if 14 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if P014 0 gt 0 1 s 32700 s if P014 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 s if 14 0 gt 10 5 Default 10 sec Level ADVANCED Address 612 Range 0 32700 Function Same as ramp 1 see 9 In order to be able to apply ramp 2 to the reference the multiramp digital inputs must be AN SE programmed and ramp 2 selected see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU PO13 Speed Ramp 2 Deceleration Time 0 327 00 s if P014 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if P01420 gt 0 1 s 0 32700 s if 14 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 s if 14 0 gt 10 5 Default 10 sec Range 0 32700 Level ADVANCED Address 613 Function Same as ramp 1 see P010 NOTE In order to be able to apply ramp 2 to the reference the multiramp digital inputs must be programmed and ramp 2 selected see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 76 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 14 Speed Ramps 1 and 2 Time Unit of Measure Default Level Address Function ADVANCED 614 Defines the unit of measure for the times for speed ramp 1 P009 and and speed ramp 2 P012 and P013 so that range for the programmable ramps may be extended from O s to 327000s e g 014 1 then POO9 100 means P009 100x0 1s 105 014 0 then POO9 100 means P009 100 x 0 01 5 1 5 14 3 then POO9 100 means P009 100 10 s 1000 s 15 Spee
327. o high for SLAVE mode 1 Check the compatibility of the parameter with respect to the maximum speed SURE 2 In SLAVE mode check the torque reference value A079 Encoder Not Enabled Description Event FOC control but encoder not enabled FOC control is active but no encoder has been enabled with parameter C012 for motor 1 equivalent parameters for motors 2 and 3 Otherwise no encoder enabled for speed measure with parameter C189 see ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU e C012 for motor 1 or equivalent parameters for motors 2 and 3 See MOTOR CONTROL MENU cause e The value set in C189 does not enable any encoder for speed measure e FOC control has been improperly enabled Set relative parameters correctly Solution A080 Speed Tracking Encoder speed measure error The system detected an error between the measured speed and the measure setpoint Speed has been exceeding the value set in parameter C193 for a time longer than the value set in parameter C192 This protection is enabled only if parameter C194 is not set at zero e Wrong setting in parameters C192 C193 C194 see ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU Mem e Torque limit too low cause e Connected load too heavy e Encoder failure encoder mechanical joint broken down disconnection of one of the signal cables of the encoder 1 Set parameters C192 C193 correctly 2 Check torque limit value see INPUT REFERENCES
328. ogrammed as FIRE MODE this function puts the inverter in an operational condition where all the protections are ignored so as to continue functioning without generating alarms The Fire Mode function must be used only when it is strictly necessary such as in fire pumps for the protection of human lives WARNING a This function must in no way be used for avoiding tripping alarms in civil or industrial applications In order to set the Fire Mode parameters it is necessary to insert the Password for access to the Fire Mode in the PRODUCT MENU To find out the password contact Elettronica Santerno Customer Service with the Serial Number of the product see Serial Number parameter of the PRODUCT MENU Only once the correct password is inserted for access to Fire Mode the following parameters will be displayed P032 Acceleration ramp in Fire Mode see RAMPS MENU P033 Deceleration ramp in Fire Mode see RAMPS MENU P099 Speed in Fire Mode see MULTISPEED MENU 10 C186 MDI for access to Fire Mode see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 If the MDI programmed with C186 is closed the Fire Mode is enabled In this mode the inverter uses the speed reference programmed in P099 using the P032 P033 ramp times all alarms are ignored except those that are truly destructive for the inverter A041 IGBT FAULT Side A Hardware Alarm IGBT side A general A044 OVERLOAD SW Overload Software 13 048 OVER VOLTAGE Voltage of Bus DC
329. oid OVERVOLTAGE alarm causing abrupt deceleration When the clamp transistor command is enabled braking resistance is obtained by setting C210 With Resistance 2 5 where With Resistance 0 01 In this operating mode when DC bus voltage exceeds a preset threshold value depending on the inverter voltage class the clamp transistor closes in the braking resistor so energy in excess is dissipated over the resistor and DC bus voltage does not exceed voltage ratings 2 6 The max duty cycle of the braking resistor is parameterized with C212 and C211 respectively maximum duty cycle 100 Ton Ton Toff 96 and maximum time of continuous supply Ton If the braking resistor activation is Ton C212 when this interval is over the relevant command will be disabled for a time equal to Toff 100 2 C212 211 C212 sec Factory setting assumes that no braking resistor is provided In this case C210 sets the promptness with respect to variations of DC bus for the deceleration ramp slowing down in order not to overload the bus capacitor bank 2 a If C210 is set to zero in FOC control deceleration slows down when given values of the voltage bar are reached depending on the inverter voltage class If C210 is gt 0 DC bus voltage is controlled by considering the derivative of the bus voltage The higher the value 2 O in C210 the lower the values for voltage variation affecting the deceleration ramp time The clamp transis
330. ome from these command sources O Source disabled REF single ended analog input from terminal board 2 AINI differential analog input from terminal board 3 AIN2 differential analog input from terminal board 4 FIN frequency input from terminal board see also ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 5 Serial link with MODBUS protocol 6 Field Bus field bus on optional board 7 Keypad remotable display keypad 8 Encoder on terminal board MDI6B ECHA MDI7 ECHB or optional board 9 Up Down from MDI Up down from digital inputs see C161 and C162 NOTE If multiple reference sources are selected the processed reference is the algebraic i N sum of all enabled references REF AINI and AIN2 The sources REF AINT and AIN2 come from the analog inputs on the terminal board and they generate a reference resulting from the setting of the relevant parameters from P050 to P064 See INPUT REFERENCES MENU for the scaling offset compensation and filtering of the reference obtained The inputs may be used in voltage or current depending on the setting and the position of the dip switch see the Installation manual FIN The FIN source is a frequency input on terminal MDI6 FINA or MD18 FINB and it generates a reference determined the setting of the relevant parameters from PO71 to PO72 allowing scaling see INPUT REFERENCES MENU and ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 206 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS
331. omer Service A047 Undervoltage DC bus Voltage lower than minimum Voltage measured in DC bus capacitors has dropped below the min value allowed for a proper operation of the inverter class being used e Supply voltage has dropped below 200Vac 25 class 2T 380V 35 class 4T 500V 15 class 5T 600Vac 5 class 61 e Alarm A047 can trip even when voltage temporarily drops below the allowable min value caused for example by the direct starting of the connected load e f the inverter is powered directly by the bus bar the bus feeder is responsible for the alarm e Failure in DC bus voltage measure circuit 1 Check voltage in terminals S T Check mains voltage value and DC bus voltage value 29 Also check the values of and 29 sampled in the TRIP LOG when the alarm tripped 2 IF the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service Event Solution 296 317 SINUS PENTA 2 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A048 Overvoltage Description Possible cause Solution Description Possible cause Solution Description Possible cause Solution Overvoltage in DC bus voltage in DC link Voltage measured in DC bus DC link capacitors has exceeded the max value allowed for a proper operation of the inverter class being used e Check that voltage does not exceed 240Vac 10 class 2T 480V 1096 c
332. on for MDI8 because frequency 7119730 input B is already set in parameter C189 FinB see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU and ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU Check and adjust programming of the digital input functions and of Solution parameter C189 Event A102 A103 A104 Current input gt 20 mA A102 Current input REF 4 20mA 0 20mA greater than 20mA 103 Current input AINT 4 20mA or 0 20mA greater than 20mA A104 Current input AIN2 4 20mA or 0 20mA greater than 20mA Event A current value greater than 20mA has been detected over input REF AINT Mas AIN2 set with the following ranges 4 20mA 0 20mA Wrong setting of switch SW1 on control board 5821 Possible cause e e Failure in the current signal source Solution 1 Check setting of switch SW1 iod 2 Check the current signal source A001 A032 043 A049 A063 A071 A078 A088 A092 A105 A127 Control Board failure 77 Control board failure There may be several causes the board autodiagnostics file constantly checks its operating conditions Considerable electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference e Possible failure of the microcontroller or other circuits on the control board 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET signal 2 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service Event Possible cause Solution 306 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN
333. on percentage 1 7 UB WN Function 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 107 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 16 SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU 16 1 Overview In the Speed Loop and Current Balancing menu for VTC and FOC controls it is possible to set the parameter values of the speed regulators for the three connected motors In addition this menu gives the possibility to effect manual balancing of the motor currents see P152 The speed regulator for each motor has two parameterization functions two integral terms two proportional terms and two speed error thresholds expressed as a percentage of the motor rated speed The response of the speed regulator can be dynamically linked with the speed error in this way the speed regulator will be more sensitive to remarkable speed errors and less sensitive to negligible speed errors Factory setting because two identical error thresholds are set only two parameters are used max integral time and min proportional constant The setup of min integral time and max proportional constant is enabled provided that two different error thresholds are used Example P125 500 ms Minimum integral time P126 100 ms Maximum integral time P128 10 00 Minimum proportional constant P129 25 00 Maximum proportional constant PI30 2 96 Minimum error threshold P131 20 96 Maximum error threshol
334. or motor 3 allows to separate torque control from flux control with no need to use a transducer the inverter can be then controlled with a torque reference instead of a speed reference Field oriented control is a closed loop control requiring speed transducer to detect the position of the motor shaft instant by instant The machine equations depend on the following magnetizing current obtained from no load current 21 64 for motor 2 and C107 for motor 3 mutual inductance C024 C067 for motor 2 and C110 for motor 3 rotor time constant C025 C068 for motor 2 and C111 for motor 3 The machine equations allow to separate torque control from flux control with no need to use a transducer the inverter can be controlled with a torque reference instead of a speed reference A NOTE FOC control requires a speed transducer such as an encoder feedback C011 C054 C097 Type of Reference Master Slave _ Range Default Level Address Control Function 0 Speed MASTER mode 1 Torque SLAVE mode O Speed MASTER mode ADVANCED 1011 1054 1097 VTC and FOC This parameter defines the type of reference to be used The torque control may be set up see section 25 1 8 0 1 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 189 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO C012 55 98
335. ote to local command The range of the parameters C140 C141 C142 depends on the setting of A NOTE parameter C150 and vice versa see the detailed description of these parameters C140 C141 C142 Command source selection 1 2 3 Disabled 1 Terminal Board R 2 Serial Link eiie i 3 Field Bus 4 Terminal Board B 5 Keypad C140 C141 1 C140 C141 1 Terminal Board C142 0 C142 Disabled Level C140 C141 ADVANCED C142 ENGINEERING Nee 1 140 1141 1142 Selection of the inverter command source Default If the command source is set as Keypad it is possible to set other command sources only if the STOP or STOP B digital inputs are set see C150 and 150 to enable pushbutton operation or ensure the Source Selection function is activated see C179 If the first command source is already set and is not a Keypad source it is possible to set the Keypad as a second or third source only if STOP or STOP B inputs are set C150 or C150a to enable pushbutton operation or ensure the Source Selection function is activated see C179 NOTE NOTE gt 210 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C143 C144 C145 C146 Selection Reference 1 2 3 4 Disabled REF AINT AIN2 Frequency input Serial Link Field Bus Keypad Encoder UpDown from MDI Default 143 1 144 2 C143 1 REF C144 2
336. p Out 10000 rpm Ramped speed reference D 4 Motor Frequency 1000 0 Hz Frequency produced by the inverter 1000 0 A Current RMS 6 Output Voltage 1000 0 V Output voltage RMS 6 7 Output Power 1000 0 kW 8 V DC Bus 1000 0 V DC link voltage Torque Reference 0 Torque reference at constant speed 0 Torque Demand 100 0096 Demanded torque 1 Torque Output 100 0096 Evaluation of the torque output a 2 Torque Limit 100 0096 Setpoint of the torque limit 3 PID Reference 6 100 0096 PID reference at constant speed O 4 PID Ramp 5 PID 16 Feedback 17 PID Output 18 REF 19 AIN AIN2 Ptc 1 Enc In 2 Pulseln 3 Flux Ref A Flux 5 iq ref 6 id ref 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 10000 rpm 100 00 kHz 1 0000 Wb 1 0000 Wb 1000 0 A 1000 0 A 1000 0 A 1000 0 A 1000 0 V 1000 0 V 100 00 100 00 1 0000 rad 10 000 V 10 000 V Ramped PID reference Error between PID reference and feedback Feedback to the PID 10 Output of the PID Analog input REF Analog input AINT Analog input 2 S Frequency input Flux reference at constant speed Current flux reference Current reference in axis q Current reference in axis d Current measure in axis q Current measure in axis d Voltage in axis q Voltage in axis d Cosine waveform Sine waveform Electric angle of delivered Vu Voltage level 10V Voltage level 10V 6 Flux Current 1000 0A Flux Current Square Wave 100 0096 Squa
337. ped Output current has been exceeding the inverter rated current for long periods Current greater than Imax 20 for 3 seconds KIILI e Current greater than Imax for 120 seconds S05 S30 or greater than Imax for 60 seconds S40 S70 Check the inverter current output during ordinary operation M026 in Solution the Measure Menu check the mechanical conditions of the connected load load locked or overload a Motor thermal protection tripped The motor thermal protection software tripped Output current has been exceeding the inverter rated current for long periods Possible Poor mechanical conditions of the connected load e Wrong setting of parameters in the Thermal Protection Menu 1 Check mechanical conditions of the connected load Solution 2 Check parameters C265 C266 C267 and equivalent parameters for motors 2 and 3 in the Thermal Protection Menu 301 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO A076 Limit Speed speed is too high Motor speed is higher than the current value set in parameter C031 for motor 1 or equivalent parameters for motors 2 and 3 If CO31 0 the limit speed protection is disabled Event If the encoder is disabled the variable used for this software protection is e The current speed setpoint for IFD e The estimated motor speed for VTC control Possible e Value of Parameter C031 too low cause e Torque reference to
338. pends on the preset torque limit values and the rated torque of the selected motor 047 048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C134 Motor 3 Active Active for VTC and FOC controls only Address 1663 This is the limit value for the torque at constant speed If an external torque limit is used the value of this measure is the torque limit obtained at constant speed on the other hand if the torque limit is internal to the inverter this value is the actual torque limit expressed in Nm 32000 Nm Note The actual range depends on the preset torque limit values and the rated torque of the selected motor Son C047 C048 Motor 1 90 91 Motor 2 C133 C134 Motor Active for VTC and FOC controls only Nelle 1664 This is the torque limit value being used expressed in Nm 44 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 15 Torque Limit Reference before ramps 96 500 96 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor Range C047 C048 Motor 1 90 91 Motor 2 133 134 3 Active Active for VTC and FOC controls only Address 1665 This is the limit value for the torque at constant speed expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor If an external torque limit is used the value of this measure is the torque limit obtained at constant speed on the other hand if the torque limit is i
339. ple ____ ___________ ___ _0 132 Figure 24 PID Block oeque t 136 Figure 25 DIGITAL MOOG RTT T u m 150 Figure 20 ANALOG O 151 Fig re 2 DOUBLE BLE W I Core een 152 Figure 28 General Structure of the Parameterization of a Digital 153 Figure 29 Digital Output for Speed Thresholds Example cccccecccseccneccnecceceeeccneeeeeseceueceaeceaeceeeeseeeeeceeeseeceneeaees 155 Figure 30 Electromechanical Brake Command Example 156 Figure 31 Carrier Frequency Example nenne nennen en ee rsen es see teens rns nennen 174 Figure 32 Equivalent Circuit of the Asynchronous Machine esssssssssssssssssseseee eene nene rennen neni nnne enar senes 180 Figure 39 Types or programmable V F CURVES sstersabociequs _________ eens 182 Figure 34 Selecting Ihe Command SON Cb 204 Figure 35 Selecting the Reference Sources er rhet te REI M egere esas YA pad taeda lup e 208 Figure 36 Controlling Run and Direction when STOP Input is not programmed sss 220 Figure 37 Controlling
340. puting modes are available 0 Disable 1 Normal 2 Compl Out If O Disable is selected the PID regulator is inactive and its output is always set to zero In the Normal mode the real PID output is considered If 2 Compl Out complemented output is selected the output implemented by the PID regulator results from the subtraction of the max output value set in P236 from the output obtained by the PID regulator This operating mode can be used for special applications see the Keeping Fluid Level Constant Example at the end of this chapter C292 Quantity Selection to Compute Derivative term Measure Be Error Default 0 Measure Level ENGINEERING 292 This parameter sets the variable used for calculating the derivative term By default the derivative term is computed according to the feedback measure but it can also be computed according to the PID error Error Reference Feedback Function C293 Proportional Multiplier of derivative and integral terms 0 No 0 1 1 Yes 080 Level ENGINEERING 1293 This parameter defines whether the proportional term is also used for the pem multiplication of the derivative and integral terms 0 No means that the proportional term DOES NOT also multiply the integral term 272 317 SINUS PENTA 2 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C294 PID implementation Default
341. r as displayed plus unit of measure Level Access level BASIC ADVANCED ENGINEERING Add ModBus address which the parameter can be read from ress i integer Optional field present if the parameter is active not for all the controls IFD VTC FOC Function Parameter description Default Control Parameters Cxxx Read Only with inverter in Run and motor in motion R W with inverter on stand by or in Run but motor stopped see P003 in PASSWORD AND ACCESS LEVEL MENU Display on the display keypad and the Inverter representation RemoteDrive integer may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure Factory setting of the parameter as displayed plus unit of measure Factory setting of the parameter Dau as represented for the inverter Level Access Level BASIC ADVANCED ENGINEERING ModBus address which the parameter can be read from or which the parameter Address can be written to integer Optional field present if the parameter is active not for all the controls IFD VTC FOC Function Parameter description Control 10 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ROHI Parameters Rxxx Read Only with inverter in Run R W with inverter on stand by j Unlike Cxxx parameters the Rxxx parameters become active only after the NOTE inverter has been switched off and switched on again or after resetting the board by pressing the RESET button for 8 seconds Display on
342. r Down start delay starting from the instant when power down occurs 2 deceleration ramp takes place deceleration ramp in Power Down C227 The time period of the deceleration ramp 32 POWER DOWN MENU 32 1 Overview can be user defined YES in case of power down for a time longer than C226 the motor coasts to stop so that DC bus voltage 2 a value is kept constant at C230 To do so a PI proportional integral regulator is used which is adjusted through parameter C231 proportional term and C232 integral term If the mains loss deactivates the ENABLE command the motor cannot coast to AN NOTE stop because the ENABLE command is required for the hardware enabling of M 30 If an inverter is DC powered by a Regenerative Penta or an equivalent drive AN NOTE stabilizing DC bus voltage Power Down cannot occur C008 xT Regen 3 1 where x can be 2 4 5 or 6 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 251 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO DC bus Voltage C230 AC Mains OK d x C226 Extra Power Down Delay Deceleration P000357 b Figure 45 Power Down Example The figure above illustrates the trends of the motor speed and the DC bus voltage in case of mains loss In this case power supply is restored before the inverter turns off and before the deceleration ramp is over so the motor accelerates with the preset acceleration ramp
343. rameter Automatic Increase torque curve C038 for motor 1 182 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 22 For the description of the parameters used in the figure see table below 2 3 24 25 Table 48 IFD Control Parameters for the Connected Motors Rated frequency i 101 rated frequency of the connected motor current rating C058 Rated voltage rated voltage of the connected motor voltage rating C019 C062 C105 V f curve type 1 Type of V f curve applied PS suse 2 6 Torque reduction quadratic curve C032 C075 C118 Torque reduction using V f quadratic curve Rated speed referring to torque reduction quadratic curve C033 C076 C119 2 Speed that actuates the torque reduction using quadratic curve Voltage preboost determines the voltage produced by the inverter at min output frequency C034 C077 C120 29 fomin Voltage boost O of torque curve determines the variation of the output rated voltage at fnom 20 Boost gt 0 C035 C078 C121 29 increases the starting torque Voltage boost 1 of torque curve determines the voltage variation with respect to rated voltage at preset C036 C079 C122 30 frequency Frequency for the application of Boost 1 12 determines the frequency for the application of the boost at preset frequency id RE 3 1 Automatic increase torque curve variable torque compensation expressed as a percentage of the motor rated C038 C081 C124 voltage
344. re wave 38 Saw Wave 100 0096 39 Heatsink Temp 100 00 C Temperature of the heatsink 40 Ambient Temp 100 00 C 20 Table 19 provides a brief description of each variable and its full scale value FE Ref 117 317 NINININININ 2 G9 CO CO CO RO FO dd Bi o 29 Volt Vq 0 Volt Vd 1 Cosine 2 Sine 3 Angle 4 10V 5 10V 100 00 100 00 Demandedtorque 100 00 Evaluation of the torque output 100 006 SSetpointofthetorquelimit 100 000 PID reference at constant speed ____ 100 00 jfRamped PlDreferene 100 0096 Error between PID reference and feedback 100 006 FeedbacktothePID 100 006 OultputofthePID 100 006 AnaloginputREF 100 006 AnaloginputAINT 100 006 AnaloginputAIN2 10000 rpm peed read by the encoder used as a reference 100 00kHz Frequenyinptt 1 0000 Wb Fluxreference at constant speed 1 0000 Wb Cumentflureferene 1000 04 Current reference in axisq ______ 1000 04 Current reference in axisd 1000 04 Current measure in axisq ______ 1000 04 Current measure in axisd 10000V 10000V 100 0060 Cosinewaveform 100 0060 Sine
345. receive any legal message through serial link 1 RJ45 connector 282 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 RONICAS RO13 Parity Bit for Serial Link 45 0 Disabled 1 Stop bit 1 Disabled 2 Stop bit Range 0 3 2 Even 1 Stop bit 24 3 Odd 1 Stop bit Default 1 Disabled 2 Stop bit 25 Level ENGINEERING 600 2 6 Functi This parameter determines whether the parity bit is used or not when wipe a creating the MODBUS message through serial link O RJ45 connector 7 7 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 283 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO 39 FIELD BUS CONFIGURATION MENU 39 1 Overview See paragraph FIELDBUS COMMUNICATION BOARDS in the Installation Manual for a description AN NOTE of the required optional board The parameters in this menu are of an R type NOTE Once saved they are active only when the inverter is turned on again or offer a control board reset pushing Reset for more than 5 sec 39 2 List of Parameters from R016 to R017 Table 82 List of Parameters 2016 RO17 Field Bus Watchdog Time RO17 Analog Outputs from the Field Bus 2 ENGI RO16 Field Bus Watchdog Time 0 60000 0 60000 ms Level ENGINEERING 55 603 If not set at zero this parameter determines the time limit after which A070 Field bus WDG trip
346. reception transmission storage from and to a calculator scan function for the automatic detection of the connected inverters up to 247 inverters may be connected You can also create your own dedicated software via serial communication link This manual provides any information concerning addressing Address field and scaling Range field for the inverter interfacing OND UB 10 16 17 18 19 20 21 9 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO 0 4 2 MENUS AND SUBMENUS This User Manual Programming Instructions is divided into several Menus Their sequence is the same as their display sequence in the display keypad and the RemoteDrive software Programming parameters and Measure parameters are divided into Measure Mxxx always Read Only Display on the display keypad and the RemoteDrive may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure Active Type of control IFD VTC FOC the measure is related to ModBus address which the measure can be read from Address integer Inverter representation integer Function Measure description Parameters Pxxx always R W Display on the display keypad and the RemoteDrive may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure Inverter representation Range integer Factory setting of the parameter as represented for the inverter Factory setting of the paramete
347. reset at power on by setting special parameters see the AUTORESET MENU If an alarm trips see the section on ALARMS AND WARNINGS regarding the diagnostics CAUTION Reset the drive when the cause for the alarm has been removed Electrical shock hazard exists on output terminals U V W and resistive braking module DANGER E terminals B even when the inverter is disabled To remove the reset function from the MDI3 set C154 Yes If removed only one AN NOTE additional function can be allocated to MDI3 even with multiprogramming active see C182 28 2 Factory setting of the Digital Inputs Table 60 Terminal board Factory setting 216 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN 28 3 List of Parameters C149a to C187 22 The parameters ranging from C149a to C180 and from C186 to C187 one for each command function activate 2 3 single functions and set the terminal for each enabling disabling function Parameter C181 enables a safe START mode Parameter C182 enables multiple programming if compatible on the same terminal In any case a maximum of 24 two functions are programmable on the same input Table 61 List of Parameters C149a C187 2 5 26 149 START B Input ADVANCED 1297 C150 STOP Input ADVANCED 1150 2 7 28 150 STOP B Input ADVANCED 1298 none C151 REVERSE Input 151 152 153 154 29 C156 C157 C158 30 C159 C160 C161 31
348. s no legal writing is received from the field bus in a given time interval Function The Watchdog activates only once the inverter has received the first legal message from the master according to the description in the paragraph ALARM A070 COMMUNICATIONS SUSPENDED this avoids untimely activation due to different start times between the master and the inverter RO17 Analog Outputs controlled by the Field Bus 000b None 000b 111b binary 001b gt AQT 100b AO3 BST OOO 000b None Level ENGINEERING 55 604 To select analog outputs controlled by the field bus select the bit corresponding to the analog output to be controlled Example 6017 00116 3 decimal analog outputs 1 and 2 are controlled directly by the field bus irrespective of their configuration in the Analog Output 284 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING A INSTRUCTIONS 39 3 EXCHANGED PARAMETERS The tables below state the Sinus Penta parameters exchanged via Field Bus Each table contains 1 the parameter code 2 its description 3 its range 4 its unit of measure also indicated on the display 5 the ratio between the Sinus Penta value exchanged via Field Bus and the represented hardware value as displayed N B each parameter is exchanged as an integer number with a 16 bit sign from 32768 to 32767 39 3 1 FROM MASTER TO SINUS PENTA
349. s 30 terminal hardware Therefore in order to avoid any relative external alarm the input CAUTION signal for the active terminal must have an input signal on the terminal board 3 1 The alarm trips when only one input signal for the terminal selected on one of the active command sources is disabled An alarm trip delay can be programmed with the relative parameters C164a C165a C166a 3 2 33 O 32000 O 32000 msec 34 Mo Immediate EA ADVANCED 35 ERS 1305 1306 1307 External alarm trip delay To avoid untimely alarm trip it may be necessary to set a check time for the opening of the input set as an external alarm 36 before the alarm trips 39 40 4l 42 164 C165a C166a External Alarm Trip delays 225 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C167 C168 MULTIRAMP Inputs 8 M Jw Inactive MDI Level ENGINEERING Address 1167 1168 This function allows to select up to 4 acceleration deceleration ramps Each ramp has its own programming parameters see P009 P025 RAMPS MENU These 2 functions determine which of the 4 ramps is to be selected the active value 1 or inactive value 0 of each preset input signal determines a binary number with a bit logic where Multiramp is the less significant bit bit O and Multiramp 1 is the most significant bit bit 1 as stated in Tables 61 and 62
350. s list for the settings that are different from the factory setting default values _ ce _ POOxAccessLevel NENNEN POO1 AcsLev 0 Basic P003 ModCmode 0 Stand by Only product P263 long kEnglsh fT P2 xDislay SS P264 ModNav 0 Menu P264a ModNavMenu 1 Yes P264b ModMenu O Standard _______ _ P265 FirstPage Status S P266 kpd type sid Active Ref 267 1 PD O Diabe P269 DisabKeyl 0 No 269 2 _ ____ _ _3 355 _____ ________ Ramps Coo Le P009 Tpp o 1000s yjPOlOTd 1000s P012 Tp2 1000s X jPOl337d2 10005 O 4 5 2 ___ 1 01 15 3 1000s PO16 Tdn3 10005 8 10005 P019 Tdn4 1000s 020 0 53 4 1 015 PO021a RndSel bOn JjPO2IbRdSdl2 On PO21c Rnd Sel3 bOn jPO2Id dSe4 On PO22 RndStat cc 50 023 50 PO24 RndStariDbec 50 P025 RndStopDec 5096 J o P026 TTp 5005 7 5500s 28 1 015 JP02 Top ls o P030 Tdn 1s POBT SpdAccReset P032 TupFreM 100s
351. s possible to toggle between the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD pages any page c UPLOAD Page L Ge Press the SAVE ENTER key from the UPLOAD DOWNLOAD page to confirm the Meyer tere operation signalled by the LED switched on If the operation with the SAVE ENTER key is not confirmed within 10 seconds the display keypad automatically returns to the page we started trom During the UPLOAD operation the respective flashing warning light WO8 UPLOADING is switched on If the procedure is successtul the following warning is displayed W11 UPLOAD OK If unsuccessful the warning light W12 UPLOAD KO will be switched on and it will be necessary to repeat the operation During the DOWNLOAD operation the respective flashing warning light WO7 DOWNLOADING is switched on If the procedure 15 successful the following warning is displayed W09 DOWNLOAD OK If the DOWNLOAD operation is unsuccessful alarm A073 is generated and it will be necessary to repeat the operation 18 317 SINUS PENTA 2 INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING 1 10 LOC REM Key Keypad pages The Keypad page can be used in Local Remote where remote sources are command and reference sources other than the display keypad by pressing the LOC REM key in the display keypad or by using a digital input configured as Loc Rem see C180 The LOC REM key is operating if no digital input is configured as Loc Rem or if it is configured as Loc Rem
352. ses used for synchronous modulation A lower value for carrier frequency ensures a better performance of the motor but implies higher noise levels Suppose that the connected motor has a rated speed equal to 1500rpm at 50Hz and that you need the best performance up to 200rpm and a noiseless carrier frequency at max speed 3000rpm In this case the max speed of the inverter will produce an output voltage with a frequency value equal to 100Hz in proximity to this speed the carrier frequency should be at its maximum level Suppose that a model having a max carrier frequency of 1 6kHz is used Assign the following C001 1600Hz C002 16000Hz gt 002 100 2 160 pulses per period fcarrier 18000 Hz C002 16000 14000 12000 10000 8000 6000 4000 2000 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 C001 C003 fout Hz C002 C003 Figure 31 Carrier Frequency Example 174 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONIC ASANTERN Suppose that we configure 192np so that 2 16000 192 83 33Hz The max carrier frequency is obtained with this output frequency The min frequency is kept constant until frequency C001 C003 2 3 8 33 Hz is attained corresponding to 250 rpm of the motor speed In the output frequency range ranging from 8 33 to 83 33Hz a synchronous modulation is obtained and the carrier frequency applied results from f carr
353. sources may be configured 285 C287 considered as a sum The sources are used by the PID and are expressed in percentage values with reference to their max value and min value set in the References menu If multiple reference sources are selected their sum is considered They are saturated between P246 and P245 PID reference maximum and minimum value respectively C288 C289 C290 PID Feedback selection no 1 2 3 Disable REF AINT AIN2 PTC Pulse Input Serial Link Fieldbus Keypad Encoder lout 10 Vout 11 Vdc 12 Pout C288 3 AIN2 PTC Default C289 0 Disable C290 0 Disable OONANKRWN O Level ENGINEERING 1288 1289 1290 C288 selects the first PID feedback source Up to three feedback sources can be configured among the eleven reference sources available If multiple sources are selected their sum is considered They are saturated based on parameters P247 and P248 PID reference maximum and minimum value respectively The same considerations apply as C285 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 3 38 39 40 4l 42 2 1 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO C291 PID Functioning mode 0 Disable 0 2 1 Normal 2 Compl Out 0 Disable Level ENGINEERING 1291 This parameter defines how to compute the PID output Three com
354. ssible to select several types of V f patterns see paragraph V f Pattern IFD Only 6 If using an IFD Volt Freq control algorithm e g motor 1 C010 IFD Tens Freq it is possible to program a slip 4 3 Slip Compensation compensation for more accurate speed control see paragraph Slip Compensation IFD Only 4 4 Speed Searching 9 If using an IFD Volt Freq control algorithm e g motor 1 C010 IFD Tens Freq it is possible to program the speed searching function of the motor rotation speed which is useful when the inverter must control a motor that cannot be still from the start e g fans See the SPEED SEARCHING MENU for information regarding programming 10 parameters and a description of this function 4 5 Controlled stop in case of power failure Power ll Down E 12 13 See the POWER DOWN MENU for information on programming a controlled stop in the case of power failure 4 6 DC Braking If using an IFD Volt Freq VectorTorque control algorithm it is possible to program DC braking at start or at 14 stop For the IFD Volt Freq control it is possible to also program the holding function See the DC BRAKING MENU for information regarding programming parameters and a description of this function 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 23 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 4 7 Motor Thermal Protection It is possible to program thermal protection of the motor
355. stallation Power on the inverter the wiring to the ENABLE input terminal 15 is to be open so that the inverter is disabled Access parameter POOO Key parameter and set its code default value 00001 and access level 1 Eng Use the ESC A V and SAVE ENTER keys and move towards the Submenu Tree in section 1 2 of the present Programming Manual Set the real supply voltage for the inverter You can set either mains voltage range or the DC supply stabilized by a Regenerative Penta inverter To set the type of power supply for the inverter access the Configuration Motor 1 menu and set configuration parameter C008 to the value corresponding to the installation concerned Access the First motor menu and set ratings as follows C015 fmot1 rated frequency C016 1 rated rpm C017 Pmot1 rated power C018 rated current C019 rated voltage C029 Speedmax1 max allowable speed Moreover it is possible to choose the type of V F pattern setting the parameter C013 C056 C099 For loads with a quadratic torque with respect to the rpm centrifugal pumps fans etc set C034 preboost1 to 096 Press SAVE ENTER each time a new parameter value is set For this control algorithm the Autotune function is not necessary but it is always recommended First remove the ENABLE command then access the Autotune Menu and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 0 All Auto no rotation Use the
356. t Always active 1687 Measure of the voltage current value detected by the inverter in analog input REF M038 External Analog Reference AINT Function of the type of reference voltage current set in P055 The numerical value always includes two decimal figures the unit of measure is V or mA Function of the preset type of reference voltage current Range Active Always active Address 1688 sS OOA Measure of the voltage current value detected by the inverter in analog input AINT M039 External Analog Reference AIN2 10 Function of the type of reference voltage current set in PO60 The numerical value always includes decimals the unit of measure is V or mA Function of the preset type of R angs reference voltage current Active Always active Address 1689 M040 Speed Reference from Serial Link Measure of the voltage current value detected the inverter in analog input AIN2 13 32000 99 rpm 32000 Note The actual range depends on the selected motor because it is determined by the values set for the min speed and max speed parameters of the selected motor 16 28 29 Motor 1 72 73 Motor 2 17 C114 C115 Motor 3 Active Always active Address 1690 integer part 1691 decimal part 18 This is the value of the speed reference set via serial link 19 nteger part 9 decimal 51 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCT
357. t has been measured The value set is added to the signal measured before saturation conversion see Figure 10 P054 Filtering time over analog input REF O 65000 0 65000ms Default 5 ms Level ADVANCED e E 653 This parameter selects the value of the filter time constant of the first command applied to the input REF signal when the signal saturation and conversion is over 92 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P055 Type of signal over analog input AINT 0 OV 1 20 mA O 4 2 4 20 3 0 4 0 20 mA Default 2 4 20 Level ADVANCED Dele OOD This parameter selects the type of differential analog signal over terminals AINT and AINT in the terminal board The signal can be a voltage signal a current signal a unipolar signal or a bipolar signal 0 Bipolar voltage input between 10V and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 1 20 mA Bipolar current input between 20mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values Function 2 4 20 mA Unipolar current input with min threshold between 4 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values Before being saturated if the detected signal is lower than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA alarms A067 or A103 trip 1 2 3 4 5 9 9 3 0 10 V Unipolar voltage input betwe
358. t is the motor speed torque reference the system will ignore any other reference source parameter P236 Is a percentage referring to the max value considered as an absolute value between the max and the min speed torque reference of the active motor If C294 Add Reference the percentage in P236 relates to the instant value of the speed torque reference to be adjusted If a Frequency control is used the PID regulator can be used to adjust the inverter output voltage in this case P236 relates to the instant voltage value E g if the inverter produces 50V by making an adjustment of 10 the inverter will produce 55 ENGINEERING 836 100 00 ENGINEERING 845 0 00 P249 PID reference ramp up time ENGINEERING 849 0s ENGINEERING 850 Os UB ll 1 13 l4 5 16 1 18 19 21 137 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO P237 Min Value of PID Output Range 10000 10000 100 00 100 00 Default 10000 100 00 96 Level ENGINEERING Address 837 This is the min allowable value of PID regulator output For the value percent of P237 see description of parameter P236 P238 Max Value of Integral Term 0 10000 100 00 100 00 Default 10000 100 00 Level ENGINEERING Address 838 This is the max allowable value of the integral term It is to be considered as
359. t of ramp gradient in P D ENGINEERING 1228 0 10 C229 Increase sensibility of DC bus control ENGINEERING 1229 339V for class 2T 679 for class 4T 380 480V 707 for class 4T 481 500V 813V for class 5T 976V for class 61 Voltage level of DC bus in Power Down ENGINEERING C231 Proportional constant PI of automatic ENGINEERING deceleration C232 Integral time Pl of automatic deceleration ENGINEERING C234 Ramp action at the end of Power Down ENGINEERING C235 Motor speed at the end of Power Down ENGINEERING _ C225 Procedure in case of Power Down Disabled 0 3 Alarm Default Disabled ENGINEERING TE 1225 Type of power down 0 Disabled The Power Down function is disabled 1 Yes In case of mains loss after a time longer than the time set in C226 starting from the mains loss detection the deceleration ramp set in C227 is performed 2 YesV In case of mains loss deceleration is automatically regulated a PI regulator see C231 and C232 so that voltage level in DC link is kept constant at the reference value set in C230 IFD control because no torque demand regulation is available the deceleration ramp gradient is adjusted depending on the gradient value set in C227 3 Alarm In case of power failure the 064 Mains Loss alarm 15 trips If an inverter is DC powered by a Regenerative Penta or an equivalent drive A NOTE stabilizing DC bus voltage Power Down
360. t parameters for motor 2 and motor 3 Max absolute torque Max C047 C048 With the factory setting 147 0 the reference source is disabled so the torque limit depends on the max absolute torque see also INPUT REFERENCES MENU 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 211 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SINUS PENTA Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C148 Changeover from Remote to Local command 212 317 0 StandBy Fluxing 1 Drive Running No Bumpless 2 Drive Running Commands Bumpless 3 Drive Running All Bumpless w 0 StondBy Fluxing Level ENGINEERING 1 148 With the factory setting the changeover from Remote to Local mode functioning and vice versa may be carried out only when not running To follow are the descriptions of the other settings possible with C148 the changeover from local to remote mode functioning and vice versa can also be carried out when running No Bumpless During the changeover from Remote to Local mode functioning the inverter will be sent to a speed or torque reference at zero and it will be always be necessary to push START to run e Commands Bumpless During the changeover from Remote to Local mode functioning the inverter will find a reference of speed torque to zero but the running will remain the same as in the remote mode for examp
361. tary reference for motor 1 P163 and P170 relate to motors 2 and 3 The regulator s structure is as follows error Set Point Measure Function integral status integral status error Ki Ts Output integral status where Kp is the proportional coefficient Ki is the integral coefficient 1 Ti where Ti is the integral time Ts is the regulator operating time ranging from 200 to 400 microseconds based on carrier frequency NOTE This parameter is automatically computed and saved with the Autotuning procedure See AUTOTUNE MENU 112 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 P158 P165 P172 Flux Regulator Proportional Constant 0 65000 300 Level ENGINEERING 758 765 motor n 2 772 motor n 3 FOC Proportional coefficient Kp of flux regulator for motor n 1 P165 and P172 relate to motors 2 and 3 The regulator s structure is as follows error Set Point Measure integral status integral status error Ki Ts Output integral status where Kp is the proportional coefficient Ki is the integral coefficient 1 Ti where Ti is the integral time Ts is the regulator operating time ranging from 200 to 400 microseconds based on carrier frequency 0 00 650 00 Function P159 P166 P173 Flux Regulator Integral Time MITT MEE 32000 1 0 32000 Disabled 10 Default 200 ms EAR
362. that will be saved on its own flash memory WO9 DOWNLOAD OK The keypad successfully downloaded the parameter writing to the drive W10 DOWNLOAD KO The keypad interrupted the parameter download to the drive The parameter writing has failed W11 UPLOAD OK The keypad successfully uploaded the parameter reading to the drive W12 UPLOAD KO The keypad interrupted the parameter upload to the drive The parameter reading has failed W13 NO DOWNLOAD procedure was queried but no parameter is saved in the flash W16 PLEASE WAIT Wait until the system completes the requested operation W17 SAVE IMPOSSIBLE Impossible to save parameter The keypad interrupted the parameter download to the drive The parameter W18 PARAMETERS LOST writing has failed Therefore not all the parameters have been updated and the parameters are inconsistent W19 NO PARAMETERS LOAD UPLOAD impossible W20 NOT NOW The required function is not available at the moment W21 CONTROL ON The required function is inhibited because the drive is running Download failed because parameters saved to keypad memory relate to a SW Was version or product ID incompatible with the drive SW version or product ID W24 VERIFY DATA Download preliminary operation underway system is checking the integrity and compatibility of the parameters saved in the keypad memory W28 OPEN START Open and close the START signal to start the drive W31 ENCODER OK Encoder tuning procedure finished the en
363. the X axis value and the speed torque reference values in the ordinate Each point is detected through its two coordinates The ordinates of the two points are the following the value of Vel Min or Trq Min for the torque reference for the first point the value of Vel Max or Trq Max for the torque reference for the second point motor 2 motor 2 motor 2 motor 2 motor 1 C071 motor 1 C090 motor 1 C072 or C114 motor 3 or C133 motor 3 or C115 motor 3 or C134 motor 3 Vel Min depends on the selected motor see parameter 28 Min depends on the selected motor see parameter C047 Vel Max depends on the selected motor see parameter 29 Trq_ Max depends on the selected motor see parameter C048 motor 1 C091 7 7 gt 86 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICA N The X axis values of the two points depend on the analog input Input REF Parameter P051 is the X axis value of the first point parameter 52 is the X axis value of the second point Input AINT Parameter PO56 is the X axis value of the first point parameter 57 is the X axis value of the second point Input AIN2 Parameter 61 is the X axis value of the first point parameter 62 is the X axis value of the second point The figure below illustrates how parameters set processing the signals for speed or torque analog reference
364. the active reference to reverse the JOG reference Function CAUTION of this terminal determines the motor to RUN if the inverter is NOTE The RUN function will override the JOG function Therefore if the RUN function is active the JOG function is ignored In the SLAVE mode torque reference instead of speed reference if the motor NOTE 5 not running it can rotate at JOG speed by enabling the JOG function In SLAVE mode the JOG function is ignored if the motor is still rotating for an active reference torque gt gt gt C170 SLAVE Input 8 Inactive MDI1 Default Inactive Level ADVANCED Dele E 1170 VIC and FOC By activating the relative programmed terminal this function makes the main reference become a torque reference completely bypassing the speed loop This function enables the SLAVE operating mode torque reference instead of the MASTER operating mode speed reference and in this case the Torque References and the Torque Ramps are used References Menu and Ramps Menu This function is ignored if the operating mode selected for the active motor is the SLAVE mode i e CO11 1 motor 1 054 1 motor 2 CO97 1 motor With factory setting the commands are set in MASTER mode and the speed reference is selected CO112 0 C054 0 C097 0 A bind T CAUTION It is possible to switch from MASTER to SLAVE mode or vice versa only when the inverter is dis
365. the attempt number If the Autoreset function is disabled you can program an autoreset procedure at power on which resets an active alarm at the inverter power off Undervoltage alarms or mains loss alarms can be saved in the fault list in the Autoreset menu To activate the Autoreset function set a number of attempts other than zero in parameter C255 If the number of attempts Is reset within a time interval t C256 is equal to the value set in C255 the autoreset function is disabled it will be enabled again only when a time longer than or equal to C256 has passed If the inverter is turned off when an alarm is active the alarm trip is stored to memory and will be active at next power on Regardless of the Autoreset function setup an automatic reset of the last alarm stored can be obtained when the inverter is turned on C257 Yes Undervoltage alarm A47 DC bus voltage below allowable threshold with motor running or Mains Loss alarm A64 mains loss when the motor is running and the Power Down function is disabled are not stored in the fault list when the inverter is powered off factory setting To enable parameter storage set C258 to Yes 34 2 List of Parameters from C255 to C258 Table 76 List of Parameters C255 C258 C255 Autoresetattempt number ENGINEERING 1255 0 C256 Attemptcountingresettime ENGINEERING 1256 C257 Alarm reset at Power On ENGINEERING 1257 0 Disabled 258 Fhabling saving Undervoltage an 1
366. the display keypad and the RemoteDrive may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure Inverter representation integer Range Factory setting of the parameter as displayed plus unit of measure Level Access Level BASIC ADVANCED ENGINEERING ModBus address which the parameter can be read from or which the Address parameter can be written to integer Optional field present if the parameter is active not for all the controls IFD VTC FOC Factory setting of the parameter Pus as represented for the inverter Parameter description Inputs lxxx These are not parameters but inputs the values assigned to these inputs are not stored to non volatile memory Their value is always when the inverter is powered on Display on the display keypad and the Inverter representation RemoteDrive integer may be a decimal figure 1 2 3 4 5 9 Q Range plus unit of measure Level Access level BASIC ADVANCED ENGINEERING 10 ModBus address which the input can be read from or which the input Address be written to integer Control Optional field present if the parameter is active not for all the controls MEE IFD VTC FOC Input description ll 1 13 l4 5 new value immediately flashing cursor when you quit the programming mode fixed cursor Typically numeric parameters immediately come to effect while alph
367. the other reference sources selected in the Control Method Function e 2 Exclusive Preset Speed the selected multispeed is the actual rpm value upon saturation due to min and max speed parameters for the selected motor of the motor speed reference Unlike function O Preset Speed if no multispeed is selected no digital input programmed for multispeed selection is activated or all digital inputs programmed for multispeed selection are deactivated the speed reference is zero P081 P098 Programmed Speed n 1 15 32000 32000 32000 rpm Defoult 000rpm From P081 to P086 BASIC From P087 to 98 ADVANCED 681 698 Determines the value of the output speed for the selection of multispeed effected with the relative digital inputs see Table 63 The multispeed value is scaled based on the Function programmed unit of measure in P100 This multispeed reference selected via the digital inputs will be processed based on setting in 8 Level 102 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 RONICA P099 Fire Mode Speed NEST 32000 32000 32000 rpm Default 0 00 rpm Level ENGINEERING Address K Determines the value of the output speed in Fire Mode The Fire Mode speed is function of the unit of measure programmed in P100 Function P100 Multispeed Unit of Measure 0 0 01 rpm 2 1 0 rpm Default
368. the startup page will be the keypad page with the four measures whilst by setting P265 2 Keypad the startup page is the keypad with the reference shown on the fourth line 10 5 N O NJ e O WO 21 67 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO P266 Type of Keypad page in the local mode LN 0 Only measures 1 Ref Activated 2 Ref Activated Speed 1 1 Ref Activated ADVANCED Address 211 The P266 setting determines the type of keypad page to be displayed in the Local mode By setting P266 0 Only measures and entering the local mode it is impossible to modify the reference With P266 1 Ref Activated in local mode the keypad page displayed is the one relative to the activated reference for example a torque control is obtained in the local mode where the torque Keypad page displays the fourth line that can modify the torque reference with the A and V keys With a speed control mode and a output C294 PID Action 1 Reference inverter reference it is advisable to exclude the PID during local mode operation and provide the speed reference directly from the keypad this is possible by simply setting P266 2 Ref Activated Speed Therefore when entering the local mode pressing LOC REM the Keypad page is displayed with the PID reference th
369. through the digital analog converter DAC P177 is the selection parameter for the AOTanalog output and P185 and P193 for AO2 and AO3 respectively Mode Determines the acquisition mode of the selected variable or as an absolute value and the type voltage current for the analog output If Mode Disable a different operating mode is activated for the 10 analog output for which the represented variable is determined by the MODBUS address set in Address and the gain value set in Gain is applied P176 Mode P207 Gain P210 Address for AOT 11 P184 Mode P208 Gain P211 Address for AO2 P192 Mode P209 Gain P212 Address for AO3 12 Val Min Out Min Defines the minimum saturation value of the variable to be represented and the corresponding value to be assigned to the analog output For values equal to or lower than Val Min Out 13 Min will be assigned to the selected analog output For analog outputs AOT AO2 and AO3 the following parameters will be used P178 P182 P186 P194 and P190 P198 for values Val Min Out Min 14 Val Max Max Defines maximum saturation value of the variable to be represented and the corresponding value to be assigned to the analog output For values equal to or higher than Val Max Out 15 Max will be assigned to the selected analog output For analog outputs AO2 and the following parameters will be used P179 P183 P187 P195 and P191 P199
370. tion it only avoids altering the programming parameters while it is still possible to AN NOTE send references and the START STOP REV JOG RESET commands via keypad If the LOCK command is active and the LOCAL mode is disabled the LOCK function prevents the activation of the LOCAL mode C173 MOTOR 2 SEL Input 8 Inactive MDI8 Level ENGINEERING ele 173 This function activates motor 2 and sets the programming parameters for motor 2 see Table 66 C174 MOTOR 3 SEL Input 8 ___________ Inactive Inctive Level ENGINEERING Address 1174 This function activates motor 3 and sets the programming Function parameters for motor 3 see Table 66 The active motor may be changed only when the inverter is disabled 228 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 TRONICASANTERN By enabling both inputs Motor 1 is again selected 2 3 Table 66 Motor Selection 2 4 0 Motor pT 0 Motr2 C175 C176 C177 SPEED VAR Inputs 2 28 0 8 Inactive MDI8 Default Inactive ENGINEERING 2 O 133898 1175 1176 1177 This function generates up to 7 values of variation 96 for the active reference ranging from 100 to 100 with parameters P115 P121 30 The 3 functions determine which of the 7 values of the speed reference variation is active the a
371. tion 3 the current reference decreased by 80 096 Speed control example Speed reference P156 50 096 Reference before 155 0 0 speed variation P157 80 0 Selected speed variation Variation 3 Variation 2 Variation 1 Figure 14 Speed Control Example 106 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ITRONICASANTERN Whatever the speed torque reference value resulting from the application of a AN NOTE speed variation the value used to control the motor is saturated at max and min speed torque values set in the parameters relating to the selected motor 15 2 List of Parameters from P115 to P121 Table 16 List of Parameters P115 P121 P115 Variation percentage of reference 1 ENGINEERING P116 Variation percentage of reference 2 ENGINEERING P117 Variation percentage of reference 3 ENGINEERING 0 P119 Variation percentage of reference 5 ENGINEERING P120 Variation percentage of reference 6 ENGINEERING P121 Variation percentage of reference 7 ENGINEERING P115 P121 Variation percentage n 1 n 7 of Reference P118 Variation percentage of reference 4 ENGINEERING 0 0 718 Range 100 0 0 0 Level ENGINEERING Address 715 721 These parameters define the variation percentage of the current reference MOOO for speed control MOO7 for torque control to be 10 considered as a ramp reference when selecting variati
372. tion True False ANALOG The digital output depends on a selected analog variable which is tested through Test A and Test B thus obtaining 2 digital signals starting from their value the selected logic function calculates the output value whereas the logic output function True False calculates the end value DOUBLE ANALOG The digital outputs depends on 2 selected analog variables Test A is performed for variable A whilst Test B is performed for variable B thus obtaining 2 digital signals starting from their value the selected logic function calculates the output value whereas the logic output function True False calculates the end value DOUBLE FULL As for DOUBLE ANALOG or DOUBLE DIGITAL mode although it is possible to select both digital signals and analog variables If you select a digital signal its value TRUE or FALSE is used to calculate the selected logic function If you select an analog variable the test selected for this variable is performed and its result TRUE or FALSE is used to calculate the selected logic function values but depend on the selected tests ABS BRAKE The ABS BRAKE mode allows to control the electromechanical brake of a motor used for lifting applications To enable the relevant output check that all the conditions depending on the inverter status are true see description at the end of this section The ABS BRAKE mode is applied by selecting the measured or estimated speed value 51 as variab
373. tion to the same timer and assign it to START digital input In the example below timer 1 is used P216 2 0 sec Activation delay 1 P217 5 0 sec Deactivation delay T1 P226 0 0001 Timer assigned to MDI1 START MDI OFF ton lt P216 P216 Start Start Inverter Inverter 4 POOOS40 b Figure 23 Using Timers Example Figure shows two possible operating modes on the left application of the delay times set for the inverter enabling disabling right the start signal persists for a shorter time than the delay set for enabling in this case the Start function is not enabled The Start function will be enabled only when digital input MDI1 is ON for a time longer than the time set in P216 132 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z LETTRONICA 19 2 List of Parameters from P216 to P228 Table 26 List of Parameters P216 P228 P223 T4 Disabling delay P224 T5 Enabling delay P225 T5 Disabling delay 00 85 25 P226 IT to inputs MDIT 4 W cere No timer assigned to 826 imer assigned to inputs 4 os ihe inputs MBIS 4 827 No timer assigned to the Timer assigned to inputs MDI5 4 Inputs MDI 5 8 Timer assigned to outputs timer assigned to the P228 MDO 1 4 EE JJ Lu MDO 1 4 P216 1 Enabling delay lO ONO UI 4I UJ NJ 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec PE MEMO 1
374. to alter these parameters also with the inverter enabled and the motor stopped parameter alterations Before altering any of the parameters remember that the correct code for parameter POOO must be set It may be a good idea to write down any customised parameter in the table on the last pages of the present Programming Manual 12 Reset If an alarm trips find the cause responsible for the alarm and reset the drive Enable input MDI3 terminal 16 for some time or press the RESET on the display keypad 36 317 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 6 3 FOC Type Motor Control 1 Wiring 2 Power on 3 Parameter alteration 4 Supply voltage 5 Motor parameters Follow the instructions stated in sections Caution Statements and Installation Link to terminal ENABLE terminal 15 is to be open when the inverter is started inverter disabled Access parameter POOO Key parameter and set its code default value 00001 and access level POO1 Eng Use the ESC A V and SAVE ENTER keys to access the other parameters See the paragraph Menu Tree Set the real supply voltage for the inverter You can set either the mains voltage range or the DC supply stabilized by a Regenerative Penta inverter To set the type of power supply for the inverter access the Configuration Motor 1 menu and set configuration parameter to the value corresponding to the installation
375. to be modified The POOO default password is 00001 The password for modifying the parameters can be personalised by setting the new password in P002 Function 62 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ROHI POO1 User Level O Basic 1 Advanced 2 Engineering Range 0 3 0 Basic Level BASIC Pelo EE 214 The programming parameters of the inverter are divided into access levels according to the complexity of the functions Depending on the user level set in the display keyboard the visibility of some menus or parts of them on the part of the user is modified if a BASIC user level is set once the inverter is properly parameterised navigation is easier because the user can view a more limited set of parameters including only those parameters requiring more frequent modifications Every Parameter in the Manual is displayed in the Level field and the relative user level is highlighted P002 Password for Writing Enabling 00001 32767 00001 32767 Default 00001 Level ENGINEERING Address 867 Once the password has been typed into POOO and writing enabling has been Function gained the setting may be personalised by means of this parameter LE Once a setting has been typed into 2 that is different from the default setting 10 the password for access to writing of the parameters to be used is
376. tor is not commanded if the inverter is supplied from a E AN NOTE Regenerative source see C008 xT Regen where x can be 2 4 5 or 6 3 1 30 2 List of Parameters from C210 to C212 32 Table 72 List of Parameters C210 C212 3 3 34 C210 ENGINEERING 1210 0 20 Duty Cycle Braking C212 Toni ENGINEERING 1212 1096 36 C210 Automatic extension down ramp 1 32000 0 01 With Resistance 320 00 37 Default 0 20 Level ENGINEERING 38 NRI 1210 If C210 With Resistance this parameter commands enabling resistor and 30 DC bus relating to this operating condition allowing to dissipate energy regenerated from the motor If no braking resistor is used energy regenerated from the motor cannot be dissipated In this condition the down ramp is 4Q extended if the variation in DC bus voltage is too rapid or if it exceeds certain threshold values Set a higher value in parameter C210 for a more sensitive ramp extension a lower variation in DC bus voltage allows to obtain longer 4 1 Function ramps 42 241 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO C211 Max time of continuous supply for braking resistance 0 32000 320 00 sec Default 200 2 00 sec Level ENGINEERING 1211 This parameter determines the max continuous operating time required for the Function braking resistance If the braking resist
377. tor time constant is automatically saved in parameter C025 If the connected motor can t run without load the inverter will save automaticly a first attempt value of the motor time constant according with the motor ratings during the autotune procedure described in step 7 SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTEONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 10 Startup 11 Speed regulator adjustment 12 Possible failures Now that all the parameters have been set for the FOC motor control algorithm access the First Motor menu and set the following C010 control algorithm Field Oriented Control Activate the ENABLE input terminal 15 and the START input terminal 14 and send a speed reference the RUN LED and REF LED will come on and the motor will start Make sure the motor is rotating in the correct direction If not operate on terminal MDI5 terminal 18 CW CCW or open the ENABLE and START terminals Shut off the inverter wait at least 5 minutes and reverse two of the motor phases and reverse the encoder reading sign either reverse the channel signals or access the Encoder Frequency Input menu and reverse the feedback sign through parameter C199 If an overshoot occurs when the speed setpoint is reached or if a system instability is detected uneven motor operation adjust the parameters relating to the speed loop Speed loop and current balancing submenu Set the two parameters relating to integral time P125 P126
378. tory setting this may be activated only when the inverter is disabled To change the settings see C148 Changeover from remote to local command with which it is possible to choose whether the changeover from remote to local and vice versa may also be carried out during RUN and if sent to the Local mode the RUN or Reference state is to be maintained This function makes it possible to changeover to the LOCAL mode that is bypass what has been set with the parameters C140 C141 C142 C143 C144 to ignore the digital command sources and the references where all can be set only from the KEYPAD The following functions however remain active on the hardware terminal board ENABLE External Alarm 1 2 3 Motor 2 Sel Motor 3 Sel SLAVE PID Disable and the actual LOCAL function in order to allow the disabling of the modes Deactivate the Local input when the inverter is disabled to reactivate signals coming from other command sources If the inverter s main reference is the PID output it may be useful to set the C180a Contact Type for Loc Rem Pushbutton and P266 Keypad type page in Local mode Ref Active Speed In this way at the first Loc command edge the inverter is sent into the local mode and it will be possible to change the PID reference whilst at the second edge of the Loc command only if the inverter is disabled the PID is disabled and it is possible to make reference to the motor in RPM see also C180a in the CONTROL METHOD ME
379. totune aborted or failed e The ENABLE contact was opened before autotune was over KICL e Autotune aborted maybe because the parameter values were inconsistent with the motor ratings 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET signal 2 Check the motor parameters and make sure that they are consistent with Solution the motor ratings see MOTOR CONTROL MENU and perform a new autotune procedure 3 If the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service A066 A067 068 Current input lt 4mA A066 Current input REF 4 20mA lower than 4mA A067 Current input AINT 4 20mA lower than 4mA A068 Current input AIN2 4 20mA lower than 4mA A current value lower than 4 mA has been detected over input REF AINT AIN2 set with the following range 4 20mA Wrong setting of switch SW1 on control board 5821 311526 Signal cable disconnected e Failure in the current signal source 1 Check setting of switch SW1 Solution 2 Check that the signal cable is properly connected to its terminal 3 Check the current signal source Event A069 Slave Mode KO Slave mode selected with IFD control SLAVE mode enabled with IFD control but IFD control does not allow torque Event references e Incorrect parameterization type of control or master slave mode e Incorrect enabling of digital input SLAVE 1 Check parameters 2 Check status of digital command SLAVE
380. turbance filters are installed on the coils of contactors and electrovalves if fitted inside the cabinet 4 Set longer acceleration times see RAMPS MENU 5 Set longer deceleration times see RAMPS MENU 6 If necessary decrease the LIMITS MENU values 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 295 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO A045 Bypass Fault Description Bypass precharge Fault The inverter imposed to close its relay or contactor for the short circuit of the precharge resistors in DC link capacitors DC bus but it did not detect the relevant closing signal during the precharge See also A046 e Disconnection of auxiliary signal e Precharge relay contactor failure Event Possible cause Soluti 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET signal 2 IF the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Customer Service A046 Bypass Connector Fault Description Precharge bypass connector fault Auxiliary signal for the closing of the bypass connector of the short circuit precharge Event resistor is considered as closed before the relevant closing command is sent See also A045 Precharge bypass connector reversed Possibl ossible cause Precharge relay contactor failure Soluti 1 Reset the alarm send a RESET signal as 2 IF the alarm persists contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO Cust
381. uency input if used along with MDI7 it can be used for encoder A 34 reading Reading of both encoders A and B can be programmed parameter 189 defines the encoder to be used as a reference source if set as a speed torque reference source in the Control Method Menu or as a PID reference source in the PID Configuration Menu and the encoder 36 to be used as a speed feedback Configuration allowed for quick acquisition digital inputs is shown in aei 70 37 If the encoder is used as a reference source the detected speed value will be saturated and scaled based on values in P073 and P074 respectively minimum and maximum value for the encoder 39 Example C189 A Reference B Unused P073 1500rpm P074 1500rpm if the encoder is used as a PID reference the reference measure is 39 expressed as a percentage of the max value 73 74 If a frequency input is selected its reading is saturated and scaled 4 based on parameters 71 and 72 respectively minimum and maximum value for the frequency input 4 1 42 237 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO Table 70 Codification of C189 used EncA Feedback Not used EncA Reference Not used Not used EncB Feedback Not used EncB Reference 5 tncAFedbeck EncBReferene 6 EncBFeedbak LT Ene Reference and Feedback EncB Refere
382. um allowable value depends on the inverter size C044 C087 C130 Current Limit at Constant Rom O Disabled Range 0 400 7 1 0 Min Imax inverter Inom mot 400 0 9 71 See Table 52 Level BASIC C044 ADVANCED C087 C130 10441087 1130 This parameter defines the current limit at constant rpm it is expressed as Function elsi a percentage of the rated current of the selected motor The maximum allowable value depends on the inverter size C045 C088 C131 Current Limit while Decelerating 0 Disabled 0 400 1 0 Min Imax inverter Inom mot 400 0 See Table 52 Level BASIC C045 ADVANCED C088 C131 1045 1088 1131 Control IFD This parameter defines the current limit while decelerating it is expressed Function died as a percentage of the rated current of the selected motor The maximum allowable value depends on the inverter size C046 C089 C132 Current Limit Decrease in Flux Weakening 021 0 Disabled i 1 Enabled o 10 Disabled Level ADVANCED Address 1046 1089 1132 Control IFD This parameter enables the current limit decrease function in flux weakening The current limit is multiplied by the ratio between the motor rated torque and the frequency forced to the inverter limit current limit being used Fnom Fout Function 201 317 SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Z ELETTRONICASANTERNO C047 C090
383. urrent loops flux loops and speed loops and for the estimation of the motor 39 ratings see section 23 1 1 If you select 2 Encoder Tune you can check the correct operation of 4 Function the encoder used as a speed feedback see section 23 1 2 4l 42 171 317 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1074 Type of Motor Tune Default Level Address Function SINUS PENTA 2 ELETTRONICASANTERNO All Auto no rotation FOC Auto no rotation FOC Auto rotation VTC FOC Man rotation speed FOC Man rotation current FOC Man rotation flux This is not a programming parameter the input is set zero whenever the inverter is powered on and whenever the command is executed BASIC 1461 1074 selects the type of autotune to perform if 1073 1 Motor Tune see section 23 1 1 No changes can be made to 1073 and 1074 with the ENABLE signal present If an NOTE attempt to change these values is made with ENABLE active W34 ILLEGAL DATA warning is given Remove the ENABLE signal to set these values and activate the ENABLE signal to begin the selected autotune process AY NOTE If SAVE ENTER is pressed to store the changes to 1073 and 1074 W17 SAVE IMPOSSIBLE warning will be displayed Use ESC key instead 172 317 SINUS PENTA 2 INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONIC ASANTERN PROGRAMMING 24 CARRIER FREQUENCY MENU 24 1 The Carrier Frequency Menu sets some of the PWM modulat
384. value for Test ADVANCED 875 50 rpm P276 MDO1 Comparing value for Test B ADVANCED 876 10 rpm P277 MDO1 Function eo to the result of the 2 ADVANCED 877 1 A SET B RESET P278 Output logic level ADVANCED 878 1 TRUE P279 MDOJ2 Digital output mode ADVANCED 879 6 BRAKE P280 MBO Seleding veri bleA ADVANCED 880 Demand P281 MDO2 Selecting variable B ADVANCED 881 A51 MEA Speed P282 MDOJ2 Testing variable A ADVANCED 882 0 gt 283 MDOJ2 Testing variable ADVANCED 883 3 lt 284 MDO2 Comparing value for Test ADVANCED 884 2096 P285 MDO2 Comparing value for Test B ADVANCED 885 50 rpm P286 MDOJ2 Function ion to the result of the 2 ADVANCED 886 1 A SET B RESET P287 MDO2 Output logic level ADVANCED 887 1 TRUE MDOS3 Digital output mode ADVANCED 1 DIGITAL Selecting variable ADVANCED D2 Inverter Ok On MDOS3 Selecting variable B ADVANCED D2 Inverter Ok On MDOS3 Testing variable A ADVANCED gt MDO3 Testing variable B ADVANCED gt MDOS3 Comparing value for Test A ADVANCED MDO3 Comparing value for Test B ADVANCED MDO3 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests ADVANCED MDOS3 Output logic level MDOA Digital output mode ADVANCED ADVANCED 1 DIGITAL MDOA Selecting variable A ADVANCED D1 Inverter Run Ok MDOA Selecting variable B ADVANCED D1 Inverter Run
385. waveform 1 0000rad Electric angle of delivered vv 10 000V Voltgelevel 10 10 000 Voltgelevl 1OV 1000 04 FluxCurrent 100 0060 J Squrewave SINUS PENTA PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 ELETTRONICASAMTERNO 18 2 1 OPERATING MODE OF ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS This section covers the different representation modes to be selected for the analog and frequency outputs The following modes can be used for analog outputs 0 Disable Disabled analog output Enables an operating mode of the analog output which can be accessed only by the Elettronica Santerno staff 1 10V The analog output is set as a voltage output and the possible min and max output values range from 10V The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 2 0 10V The analog output is set as a voltage output and the possible min and max output values range from O 10V The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 3 0 20 The analog output is set as a current output and the possible min and max output values range from O 20mA The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 4 4 20mA The analog output is set as a current output and the possible min and max output values range from 4 20mA The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 5 ABS O 10V the output mode 10V except that the selected vari
386. z Max carrier freq allowed for the inverter size Example Max carrier freq allowed 10kHz If C002 5kHz for FOC control modulation frequency is 8kHz If C002 10kHz for FOC control modulation frequency is 10kHz The max value set in 002 cannot be lower than the min value set in 1 Decrease the min value in 1 if you need to decrease the max value and if C001 equals C002 IFD Control only The max value in C002 also determines the max allowable speed value for the selected motor in order to ensure a minimum number of pulses per period of frequency produced 16 for maximum carrier frequency max 2 value greater than 5kHz and 10 for lower maximum carrier frequency see Table 43 0 12 1 0 5 2 48 3 4 192 5 384 Default 1 1 24 3 96 1 24 ENGINEERING 1003 IFD This parameter has effect only if 001 002 It represents the min value of pulses per period obtained when modulation frequency changes synchronous modulation Function 22 23 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 177 317 PROGRAMMING SINUS PENTA INSTRUCTIONS ELETTRONICASANTERNO 004 Silent Modulation 0 1 0 No 1 Yes Default 1 Yes ENGINEERING 1004 This parameter enables silent modulation The electric noise due to the commut

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual del usuario - SENSUS Pain Management  1 million candle power spotlight 41-1097 important safety instructions  Clicca qui per scaricare il manuale della stufa ZURICH  INSERT 8,5 Kw Manual de Usuario, Instalación y Mantenimiento (12  Speakman SB-1111 Installation Guide  EG I F D E P GR ARGO 245C ARGO 3SC Air conditioner  IMPORTANT! IMPORTANTE! IMPORTANT!  PDF - Los Aparatos  Istruzioni per l`uso  PNY VCQ4000-PB NVIDIA Quadro 4000 2GB graphics card  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file